Applied 1\t!

echamcs

1. T.no term 'force' may be defu:le-d aa an a.~nt wb:icn

tands t.o produce, destznys Gi' tends to destToy motion.
Agree O Diasgree 0
2. A force while t!.~ on e. body may
(a) change its motion (c) :retard its r!!otio:r:
(c) balance the forces, ekeady acting on it
{d') give rise to the internal s~sses in i&
(e) all of the above {f) nor.e of the a.bove
3. In oroar to deter.nine the effects of s force. !l.Cting: on a body
wa must know . ·-
:a; :r::::.;;,gnitude of the force (b) line of action of ;;be fm·~
{c) nstu?-.a oi the force ;.e., whether the force is push or :.1~
{d) POint at which the fnrt>e acts on the bod-.;
(e) ;ll of 4e above (f) none of th~ above
The unit offo!'ce in S.I. system of units il3
(a) dyne {b) 1tilogra.m (c) newton {d) watt
5. One kg force is equal to
) (a) :i:02 N (b) 8·9 N (c) 9·8 :N (d) 12 !f
I ~. A resultant force is a. single force which produces the eame
e-.:!eet as produced by all the given forces a.ctfJ.D.g on a body.
I
Trne O False
1 "i. T'ne procesg of rlridfug out the resultant force is called ......
l

r
of ibrces
(a) composition· {b) resolution

1-:M.E. 1
l
 8. '!'he a.lgebra.ic sum of the resolved parts of a. number o~forces in
s. given di-:ection is equal to the reso!ved part of their :rel!Ultant in
the same direction. This in known as . ·
{<i) principle of independence of forces
(b) principle of resolution of forces
9. Vectors method for the resultant force is also called J)olygoll law
of forces. -
Correct 0 Incorrect 0
10. The resultant of two forces P and Q acting at an angle 8 is
(a) VPI+Q2+2PQ sin 8 ~b) vP8 +Q1l+2PQ •:JOB fj

11. If the resultant of twu force!! P and Q acting at an ang.ie ,7.

makes an angle et with the force P, then
Pco,.; rl.
{a) tan o: = -Psmti
-·-·
P+Q co~ d
(b) tan :t =
P + Qco~ i ·
Q sin i1 Q 1:uo:< '·'
(c) t.a.n a.
P+Q cos a ta)
. tan .% = .,P + Q SI.G
. \J.

12. The resultant of two forces P a.nd Q {such that P>Q} ~ng
along the same straight line, but b opposite direction. is ~1ven by -
(a) P+Q {b) P-Q (cJ P/Q (d) Q/P

!3. The resultant of two equal fcrce:; P makin[ an a.n:;le d, 1e

given by
{a) 2Pab. :;~ (b) "'
2r'CO!$
j
2
tJ til f:i
{c) .2 p tan.- {d) 2Pcot-q
2
""
14. The terms 'leverage' and •mechanical advantage' of a. compound
lever have IJ!Qt the same meaning.
Right 0 Wrong 0
15. A number :>f forces acting a1i a point w.ll be i:o equilibrium, if
(a) aJl t.he forces are equally mc.tined
{b) smn of all the forces is zero
(c) sum of resolved parts in the v.ertical direction is zero
(i.e. !:V = 0)
(d) sum of resolved parts in the horizo:rr".,al direction is zero
{i.e. 'Zil = 0)
(e} both (c) and {d) {f) oone oftJle a.bc.rve
 l
I
16. If a. number of forces are acting at a point, their resultant is
------given by··-- ·-

I {a) {:EY)li+(:E.H)ll
(o) {:E'PV+(W)ll+2 (ZV)(:Ell)
(a} '\I'(~V)~+(£EJ 2 +2(:EV! (l:H}
(b) .{(:EY)2+(ZB)'l

II
17. Fig. 1·1 shows the two forces at
right angles acting at a point. The
va.lue of force B acting along their
bisector and in opposite dfrection -is
p

l
{a) P/21 (b) 2P
J
i fc: .y2 P (d) P/v 2
I
18. If a number of forces are actiruz
;j' a.t a. point, their resultant will be inclined R,
ij
at an angle fJ with the hor~ontal. such .Fig. I-I
~~ that
ii (~) tan e= "ZH/!.1' (b) tan e = "fJT/kE
ll
";! (dl tan e =v:tv +1:.8
i
I 19. If the resultant of a number of forees actin!" on a bodv is zero,
l
I then the body will not be in equilibrium. ., ~
!
i
Yes O No 0
2Q. '.f'ne f'Orces. which meet at one point and their lines of action
a!so lie on the same pla.ne, are known 88
(a} oop!aner ooncm:rent forces
{b) cop!aner non-c-oncmrent forces
(e) non-ooplaner concurrent fo:ces
(&l non-coplaner non-concurrent forces
21. The fo~. which do not meet at one point, but tlleir lines of
action lie on the same plane, are known as coplanar non-conclll"!'ent
forces.
'.!':ue 0 .False 0
~- The forces which meet at one point, but their lines of action .••
on the same plane, are known 88 non-coplanar non-con~;u1Tent forces.
{a) He {b) do no-r, lie
~. The forces which do not meet at one point a.nd their lines of
s.etion do !lOt lie on the same pla.ne are known as ·
(a} ooplaner concurrent _forces
{&) oopW.ner non-conC'W.'rent forres
(e) non-copiS:ner concurrent fol'l"',es
(d) none of the above
24. Copl&ner 00!1-ooneurrent forces are those forces which .••
at one pomt, but their lines of action do no;:, ·.lie,on the same plane.
(a} mee11 tbl do not mee1i,
 25. Coplanar concurrent foroea are those forces which
{a) meet at one point, but their lines of :wction do ;aot ~ on
the same plane
(b) do not Infet at one noint and their lines of action do not
4

lie on the same plane

(c) meet a.t one point and their lines of action
the same plane
{d) do not meet at one point, but their lh>es of a.otion fie on
the same plane
26. Non-copla.ner concurrent forces are those forces whlch "
(a) meet at one point, but their lines of c,ction do not .:!3e on
the same plane
(b) do not meet at one point and their lines of e.otion do not
lie on the same plane
(c) :meet at one JJOint and their lines of action also lias on tile
same plane -
(d) do not meet at one point, but their lines of action~ on
the same plane ·
21. Non-coplanar non-concu.""rent forces are those forces whlah
(a) meet at o:1e point.: but their lines of action do not ~ on
the same plane
(b) do not meet at one voint and th•.:ir .lines of action do not
lie on the same plane
(c:) none of the above
23. 1i three coplanar forces acting on a point ~re . in equilibrium,
tht-n each force is pronortional ~o the sine oi the angle between the
other two.
0 Disagree 0
29. Fig. 1·2 shows the three coplaner forces Q and B aating on
a point 0. If these forces a!.'e in equilibrium, then
p Q R
(a) sin~ =~=sin·-·
(b) p Q R
~ = sin ~- = ain ·1
p Q
(c:) sin 1 - ain ex = Sin ~
p Q R
{d) si'll c:: = sin y = !:fin ~~
According to lami's theorem
(a) 'the three forces must be equal
(b) the three forces must be at 120~ to each other
 5

----(e)-the-three forces must be in equilibrium

(0) if the three forces acting on a point a!"e in equilibriam,
then each force is proportional to the sine of the angle
between "Ghe oth;n. two
(e) if three forces acting on a. point are representerl in
magnitude and direction by the three sides of a ttia.ncrle.
then the forces a-re in equilibl'ium "' -

31. If a: given force (or a given system of fo:.:ces) acting on a bodv

· · ·. · · · · ·. · ··. the position of the body, but keeps it in equilibrium,
then.its effect is to produce internal stref'S in the body.
(a) change (b) does not changs
3;,'g. If three forces acting at a point are represented in r.:..agnitude
and direction by the three sides of :1 triangle, taken in order, then
; the forces are in equilibrium.
i' Correct 0 Incorrect

I
1
;3. If a. number of forces acting at a point be represen:.ed in
magnitude and direction by the three sides of a triangle, taken

I in O!'de!', then the forces are not in equilibrium.

Eight 0 :Wrong
I :;.!. 'l"'ne moment of a for~e

Il (a) is the turning effect. producea by a. force, on t.h.a body, o:1

which it aets
i (b) i.5 equal to the procuct of force acting on the body ad.
the perpendicular distance of a. point and th3 line of
I a.ction of the force
{c) i.e equal to twice the area oi the tris.ngle, whose base is
the line representing the force a.nd whose verte::s.: is the
! point, about which the moment is taken

I
l
(~$) ali of the above (e) none of the a.bove
0..--------9
\'',,c!.'
l\/c
'' I
35. 'l"'ne moment of the force
P a.bout 0 a.s shown is Fig. 1.3 is,
(a) PxOA

I {b) PxOB
(~ PxOC
;
I
l
p

I (4} P'i!:AfJ .A
Fig. 1·3
3!S. If a. numbei" of coplaner ·forces a.otib.g at a point be mequili-

Ii brium,the enm of clockwiSe moments must be ......... the sum of

anticlookw-'.se momenta, a.bout any point.
(~ eq~l to (b) less than (c) greater tlmn

I
 6

'$4. The principle of moments states that if & number of eo-

planer forces acting on a particle are in equilibrium, then
(a) their algebraic sum is zero
(b) their lines of action are !»t equal distances
{e} the aJgebmo sum of their moments about any point in
their plane is zero
{d) the aJgebraio smn of their momenta ahout any point is
equal to the moment of their reau..itant force a.boui the
same point.
(e) none of the above
:':B. Aooordin~f to·· the la;w · of moments,if- ·a number of co planer
forces acting on a .particle are in equilibrium, then
(a) their a.JgebL"&ic sum is zero
{b) their lines of action are &t equal distances
(e) the algebraic sum of their momenta about any p-oint in
their plane is zero
{d) the algebraic su:m of their moments a.bont liiDY point is
equa.i to the moment of their resultant force about the
same point.
(e) none of the above
l9. For any system of coplaner forees, the condition of eqml.i-
brirun is that the
{tZ) algebraic sum of the horizontal components of all the
forces should be zero
(b) algebraic sum of the vertical component;; o:f all the :fo&ae:
should be zero
{e) algebraic sum of moments of all the foroes a"hotlt a,ny
poinli should be zero
(d) aJl ofthe above
(e) none of the above
40. The forces, whose lines of action are paa:allel to each other
and a.ot in the a.ame d.ir-oetion.s, are known a,s
{a) ooplaner concm:rent forces
(b) <'.oplaner non-concm:rent forces
{c_) like parallel forces
{dJ unlike parallel forces
41. The three forces of 100 N, 200 N and 300 N il.a.~ ~ Jmoo
of action 'D8>l'allel to each other but act in the opposi"..e di."ectiom!.
The86. fo~ sre known as
(e) coplaner concurrent forces
(b} oophmer nonoeoncurrent forces
parallel foroas
(d) ;mt.ike parallel forces
A.P;Plkd 'if eChanics 7

42. Two equal and. opposite ~a.llel forces whose lines of aetio111
are -dmerent;--can -be replaced by a single force parallel io the
given forces.
Yes 0 No Q __
43. Two equal and opposite parollei forces whose lines of a.eJtion
axe different form a couple.
T.rue 0 False 0
44. A couple produces
(a) t:rsnslatoey motion
{b) rotational motion
(c) oombined translatory and;w: ~ional motion
(d) none of the above
45. Whlch of the following statement is correct ~
(a) The algebraic sum of the force~, constituting the eouple
1s zero.
(b) 'l.'he algebraic sum of the forces, constituting -Dhe eouple,
about any point :is the same.
(c) A couple cannot be balanced by a. single foree bu-r; e&:l
be balanced only by a couple of opposite sense.
(d) a.ll of the above
(e) none of the above
4-6. Match the correct answer from Group B for the statementa
given in Group ..:!

Group A

(al A force while acti:ng on (A) P-Q

a bod'T may !rive
(b) The result&nt of two (B).P+Q
forces P and Q tP>Q)
acting along the same (C) 2P sin~
stmi:zht line, but in "'
o-pposite direction, is (D) rise to the intamz.i
stresses in ~he body
(c) T"lle resultant of two
like parallel forces, (E) :Z f/'Z H
p s,nd Q, is
(d) The result&nt of two 8
{.F) 2P cos -;;-
equal forces P making ~

an angle 8, is (G) ...; P 3+ QZ +2PQ oosfi

(e) The a.ngle of inclination Q sin8
of the ~nt of the (B) P+Q cosi
two fol'Ce$ P tmd Q,
with. the force P, is
 _ 4"1. The :force induced in the
string .AB due to the load W, a<>
't. • 11';,. I &. •
8l.lOW11 !0 .... ~. • -• lJ!

{a) wBin e(b) wcos f)

(e) Wtan e{d) W cot 8
(e) W cosec 8 (f) W sec B Fig. !oo4

48. The force induced in the string .BO due to the load W as
shovrn in Fig. 1·4, is
(«) w
sin (J (b) w cos 8 {c) W tan fJ
(4) W cote (e:) W cosec 8 {j) W e.ec 8
49. The point, through which the whole weight of the body acta,
ir.:espective ofita position, is known as
(a) moment of :inenia (b) centre of gravity
(e} centre of percussion (d) centre of n:JB.Sa

SO. The term •centroid' ia

(a} the sa.ma as centre of pvity
(b) the point of suspension
(c) the point of applica.tion of the resultant of all the
forces tending to c:l.tlfle a. body to rota.te &bout a, cer.ain
axis
(d') none of the above

Sl. An :irregular body may h&ve more tha.n one centre of grs.vity.
Agree O Disagree 0
52. The oentre of gravity of a. rectangle lies at a point where ita
two d.ie.gon;,ls m.~t ea.ch other.
Co?.Teot O Incorrect 0
!3. The centre of gravity of a. tria.ngl~ lies &t a. point where ita
medisana i:r.ersect each other.
Right 0 "\Yrong 0
54. The centre of gra:vity of an iseosoeies triangle with bare (~
~nd sides (q} m•..•.•from its ha.se.
(b)

M. The centre of gravity of an eouilateral triangle with each

side a, iiJ ••.••••••from any of the three aides.
(~ vS aj2 (o) 2"\13 a (c) a/2v3 {It) 3 .y2 a
 ..
··.~:::-=:-=:::-:---.-. •"

55. T".!le centre of gravity of a semi-circle lies at a distance of..... .

from its base measured along-the vertical radius.
(a) 3r/8 (b) 4r/3~ (c) 8r/3 (4) 3r/4r:

'51. The centre of gravity of s. hemisphere lies at a distance of

3r/8 from its base mea.sured a.long the vertical radius.
Yes 0 Xo 0
58. The centre of gravity of a trapezium a --J
with parallel sides a and b lies a.t a dista- I
nce of 'II from the base b, as shown in
Fig. 1·5. The value of y is

1, ,
\ <I1
;, {
IU
2a+b \ {x.)
·\ a..,...uI. ~~ U
l I

{
I \
r---+\--r
T'"'
y i
!
;~
: ____j_L
\
l
i

I I I
~--b~I
~

Fig. 1·5

59. The centre o! gravity of a right circular 50lid cone is a.t a

disi;a.:nce of .••.•. from its baae, measured along the vertical a:.:ris.
(b) h/3 (c) .,lz,f4: (a) r.;s
1r!lere ;. = Height of a right circular solid cone.
•· Ma.toh the correct anewer from Group B for the statements
given in Group A

Group A (froup B

(a.) e.G. of e. rectangle (A) is at its centre

(B) is a.t intersection of its
(b) O.G. of a, triangle diagonals
(c) O.G. of a cirde (0) is at 4r/3r: from its
base along the vertical
radius
(a} e.G. of a semicircle {D) is a.t h/4 from its ba.se
along the vertical am
(e} C. G. of a hemisphere {lil} is &t intersection of its
medians
en c.d. or a. right circular (.f} is at 3r/S from its ha.se
a.long the vertfual
cone
:radius
 10

61. .-!.. circular hole of 50 mm

diameter is cut out from a
circul& disc of 100 mm diameter
as shown. in Fig. 1·6. The centre
of gravity of the section will lie
(..;) in the shaded area
(b) in 'the hole
(c) at 0 Fig.H
~. Moment of inertia :is the
(a) second moment of 1oree
(c) second moment of mass {d) all of the above
(e) none of the above
63. The unit of moment of inertia of an area is

64. The unit of mass moment of inertia in M.K.S. nnita is kg~.

True O False El
65. Tile unit of mas~; moment of inertia. in B.I. units is the l!&J:Uiil
as that in M..K.S. ru:rits.

oo.
C-orrect
0
The radius of gyration is the distance w-here the w-hole
(or area.) of a body is assumed to be concentreted.
Incorrect
f/J. Mass momem of inertia of a uniform thin rod of mass M and
length (l} about its mid-point and perpendicular to its length is
~

I
l
l

(a) j.Ml2 (b) ilfl3 (c) !.MZll \GJ ~.llP J

00. Mass moment of inertia of a thin rod about its one end
is ...... the mass moment of inel'tia of the same rod about :iUl mid- I1
point
(a) same as (b) twice (c) tb...-=ice (d) folll' times
69. Moment of inertia of a rectangular section having width (b)
I
and depth (d)" about an a:ris passing through its C.G. and pa:mll~
to the width ·~ is

(a}
dJj7>
12 (c)
I
j
!

10. Moment of inertia of a rectangul!u· section having width (b)

and depth (d) about an a:Us passing through .it!i> C.G. and panll~
to the depth (d), :is
(;dS
(a) dJi7' . (b) 12
12
 \
\

' '
BJY$ li!P
\:lj
12 -12
1)}1J l,ljl
(b)
-rr -12
B1J3 MS
{c)
T6 ---
36
""' DB& d1Jl !Y
(d) -36
36 Fig. H
'n. Moment of inerti& of a hollow reota.ngnlar ooct:ion 85 shoWJt
h. about y:y axis, is not the sa.me as th&t ·about Jl-:Z:
a~s.
Yes LJ lio 0
13. Moment of inertia of a. circular S$Otlon about its rlis.meter
(~is
(a} r.C.S/16 r.il.3/32 {c) r.d4/'32
{b} (&) T:d'/64::
7~. Moment of :inertls. of a. cjrcu1ar section about an s:;tia ~n­
dk:cls.r to the section is
{a) r.;lS/16 {b} n~/32 (c) -::d'j32 (a) r.d'/64
iS. Moment of inertis. of a 'hollow cirewar section as ahown in
Jr,g. 1·8 about,

'?.
{a)
18
?.
{b) {1)3- <3'"S)
16
'it
(c)
&2
r.
(ti) (D~-d.')
6~ Fig. J.!l

16. Moment of fuertis, of a. h?ll~w oi:i:>o~ &~on, aa·· shown .in

.Fk;. 1·8 about, an axis pel"p&Ddicwar to 'ij!l,e ooctiont is.••...•.•than
tbit about X-X a.rls.
(a) two times {b) 8$me {~1 h.s.lf
11. Moment of mert:ia. of a. ~ section of 'base {b) and
<M &;,bout an ~ p&BSing through its e.G. ~d ps,~el to
is
 12 Applied M echan.ics

of
-----18.-Moment of inertia of a t~ngular section ba.ae (b) and height
(.~) about an axis through its base, is
(aJ bll}/4 (b) bh}/8 (c) MJ!/12 (a) bh3/36
_ i9. Moment. of inertia of a triangular section of base (b) and height
{k) about an axis passing through its vertex and parallel to the base.
is ...... than that passing through its C.G. and parallel to the base.
(a) nine times (b) si:s: times (c) four times
(~) one-half (e) one-th:ird
80. .According to parallel axis theo:rem, the moment. of inertm
of a section about an axis paraHel to the a::tis through centre of
gravity (i.e. ]p) is given by
(a) ]p = la+Ah2 {b) [p = lG-.dh.~ (<:) ]p = lofAJtZ
Aha
(;:)
...
I p = 1;-

where A =A...=es. of the section,

lo=Moment of inertia of the section about an a.::tis
passing through its e.G., and
h=Distancebetween e.G. and the parallel a.::tis.
81. A force acting in the opposite direction to the motion Of t.he
body is celJed force of f..'":iction.
Right [] Wrong
82. T"ne maximum frictional for:;, whi~h com_?s into play. ~~~n
2. body just begins to shde over .;:;ne sunace o1 the other bouy,
is known t1s
(a) static friction (b) dynamie friction
(e} limiting friction {a) coefficient of friction
$3. '!'he friction e:s:perienced by a body, w.hen at rest, is kno"·n
:uJ
(a) static friction (b) dynamic friotion
(e) limiting friction (d) coefficient of friction
M. The friction experienced by a body, when in motion, is known
as
{a~) rolling friction (b) d:ynamic friction (c) limiting friction

~- The st&tic. friC"..ion

{~} beers a constant ratio to the normal rea..~ion between the
two emrl'aces
(b) is independent of the area of contact, between the two
su..~aces ·
(c) depen~ upon the :roug.hn.ess of the sm:faces
(I} always acts in a. directio~ opposite to that in whieh th~
body tends to move
{e) !'ill of the above · (J) none of tb.e above
 $6. -T".ue anole
e ~..
·a,
of the inclined p]a.ne a.t wh.icn hodv.v w-iust b~.ns
-~..
~o
ande dovm the plane, is-callea-:ue~gte. . -~--- .. .
'!r.:ae n False 0
~~~. Tne angle which the norma1 reaction ma.kes with the resu;unt
rea.ction is called angle of friction.
0 0
sg, T'ne angle of inclina.tion of the plane a,t which the body
bei.ns to move down the plane, is oslled
(a) a.l$1e of friction (b) angle of repose
(c) a.ngle of projection (~") none of the above

89. The :minimum force :required to slide a. body of weight W on

a rough horizontal plane is
(a}. w
sin 6 (b) w
cos e (c) tan f)w
{d) W cosec 8 {e) W sec e (j) W cot fJ
~. A body will begin to move down an inclined plane· if ~i
ang1e of inclination of the plane is ....•..•....the angle of friction.~
(a) equai to (b1 less than (c} greater than
91. A body of weight W is required to move up on :rough inclined
plane whose angle of inclination with the horizontal is ex. The effort
applied parallel to the plane is given by
(a} P = W tan:. (b) P = W tan{tt.+~}
(c} P = W (sin a.+,u. cos a.) {a} P == W (cos tt.+P. sin c:.)
where ,u. = tan r/; = Coefficient of friction betw~n the plane
and the body.
92. Coefficient of friction is the ratio of the limiting friction to
the normal reaction between the two bodies.
Correct 0 Incorrect 0
93. In. s screw je.ck, the effort required to lift the load is given by
{a) P = Wta.n (a.-<fo) (b} P = Wtan. {et+sb)
(c) 1' = W t.an (cfr-a.) (d) P = W cos (ex++)
where W ~Load lLfted, o-;=Helix angle, a.nd 4>-=Angle of friction.
~. a. screw js.ek the effort required to lower the load ~
...... the effort required to raise the same load.
(a) less than (b) equal to (c) more the.n
95. Efficiency of a screw jack is given by
(a)
tan {a.+</>) (b)
tan a.
1
(c) (d) i·.
tan (c:.-~)
where a. = Helix angle, and 8 = Angle of friction. j:
1:
~~1
t·'.
 --

---~.---l!'he-e.fficieno:v of a sc:::ew jack is ~u:m, when

{a) ar. - 45c +t/>/2 {b) ar. = 45°- tfoj2
(c) ct = 9(t+q) {d) Q1. = 00°-p
where a. =- Hell:x angle, and cp == Angle of friction.
91. The ~run efficiency of a screw jack iB
l-ain </> l+Rin cp
( a)' (b\
l+ain tfo ' l""sin. cp
1-tan cp l+tan. cp
(d)
(e}
l+t!!n €(; 1-tan cp
~. The velocity :ra-tio m case of an inclined:p!ana mclfufld at angia
(j to the horizontal and weight being pulled up the inclined plane by
vf!ltica1 effort is
(a) am 6 (b) COB f7 (C} tan IJ {d) CO!!eC 8
99. An ideal :m.achlne is one whose efficiency is
(a) between 00 and 00% (b) between 00 a:ud 70%
(e) between 70 a-nd 00% (d) between 80 and 00%
te) 100% (J1 none of the above
100. The mecl:l:&:cir'~ advantage of a lifting mac;hlne .is the ratio of
{a} distance moved by effort to the distance moved by load
(b~ load lifted. t-o the effort appJie<l
(c) output to the input
(el none of the above
101. The emoiency of 8, 1ffiing machine is the :.;;;"atio of
(a) output to the :input.
(o) wo.rk done by the machine to tb.e work done on the
:mrwhfue
{e) mech.anieai ad:vantsge to the velocity ratio
(d) all of the above {e) none o£ the above
of a is constant, its
velooity miio is •••• co ••• propotiona! to its moohnica! adV~:m.tege.
(aJ ~y (b} indirectly
In ideal machines.
wtio.
 A~WJ JL eeiianiea
~. A lliting machine lifts a. loa.d of 100 kg through a.. dista.nee of
20 em by means of a.n eifort of.20.kg....thro.ngh_u:Us:tanee of lOO.Cm.
T'"nis machine is an ideal one. .
Right 0 Wrong
1~. A mfl.chlne having an efficiency less than 00%, is known as
(a) !'evemibie machine . . (bl - non-reversible machine
(c) neither reversible noi' non-reversible machine
(G) ideal ma.chlne (e) none of the a.bove
107 A ma.chine having a.n efficiency greater tha.n 50%. is known a.s
{ll) revem"b'le machine (b) non-revermole machine_
iei neither reversi"ble nor non-reversible ma.ehine
(d) ideal machine (e) none of the above
100. A machine which is ca.pa.ble of doing work in the ravamsd
direction, a.ft,er the e.ff'on is removed, is called a non-:reversibie
l':ll!l}Chine.
Yes 0 No 0
109. A machine which is not capable of doing any work m the
reversed direction, after the effon is removed, is ealled ~ble
machine.
True 0 False 0
no. .A non-reversible machine is also called self-lbo:!dng machine.
0 0
U.L A screw jack used fo:r ~;;m.g the loads is
(a) a reversible !llli1>chine (b) a. non-~"b!e ~
(e) an ideal machine
112. A weight of :woo kg ca.n be lif""...ed by a.n effort of 80 kg. H t.hs
velocity ratio is 20, the machine is
(a) reversible (b) non-reversible {c) ide&!
113. The !a.w of the m&chine is
{a.) P = mW-0 {O) P == mJW.{-0
(e) P = mW +0 (d) P = 0- mW
whel'e P = Ettort applied to lh~ the load,
m = A corur..ant which :is equal to the alope of the tine,
W = Load lifted, and
0 =Another constant which represents the ~e
friction.
114. The maximum me<::h.a.nicaJ advantage of a. liftmg ma.chi:i:le m
(a) l+m (b) l-m (c) 1/m (d) m
115. The maximum efficiency of a li.fting machlne is :fi/'
(a) 1/m (b) TT.R.fm (e) m/ Y.B. (cij 1/mxV.R. n~
ill

n
Iii
m
 UG. Tlte·~~cii;~'~ti~~for the first sys"'~m ofplilleya ia
-(al n {b) n 2 (e) 2» (tl) 2"-l
where n is the number of pulleys.
lli. The velocity ratio for the second system of pulia:fiS :ian.
C::~rrect 0 Incorrect 0
118. The velocity ratio for the third system of pulleys is
(a) n te) n!1 (b) 2ffl (a) .2"'-l
!19. ·Match the correC1i an.swer from Group B fo:J:> the statements
giv~n in Group .A..

~~4 B

(a:) M.I. of s, circular ~etion about its l-ain~

diameter (G} (A)
l+sin +
{B) 1/m
1b) Efficiency of a 801'ew jack
(C) tP
'7i: v .
64"
(c) Maximum efficiency of a. screw jack
_!:. ;{8
(D) 32
(d) Mrucimum :mechacic~ advantage of "'
a lifting ma~hine tenet
(11}
tan (a:+<P)
(e) ~nm efficiency of a, lh;;mg l
:!Ilachine (li')
mxV.R.
(G) m)(V.R.

120. Which of the :following statement is wrong ~

(a) A force acting in the opposite direction to the motion of
the body ia cslled force of friction.
(b) The ratio of· the limiting friction to the :reaction~
called coefficient of friction.
{c) .A machine whose efficiency ia 100% is known as an idea!
:ma.ch.ine.
(d) Velocity ratio of a machine is the ratio of load lli.~ to
the effort applied.
(e) A screw jack is a. self locking machine.
m. All the st-eel tl't:!sses of the bridges, have one of their end roller
supported, and other end hinged. The main advantage of such a
support is that the trnsa rema.fus atsble.
Right 0 Wrong . 0
 ~ . "':.'- " ·- -
-:'"':"""":"::-:"~---.

17
122. A framed struc~ure is, perfect, if the number of members
are ..••••.. : (2.i- 3), where j is the number of joints:----·--·
(a} equal to (b) less than {c) greater than
(ell either (b) or {c}
123. A framed structure is imperfect. if the numbr.r 'Of members
are .......... (!2J - 3).
{a) equal to {b) less th:t-n {c) greater tha:."'l
(ci) either {b) or (c)
124. .A redundant frame !(3 also called .......... frame.
(a) perfect (b) imperfect (c) deficient
125. A framed structure a.s ft
shovm L"'l Fig. 1·9, is a / \\
(a) perfect frame

~--\--<:?.
(b) deficient frame
(c) redundant frame
(d) none of the above Fig. 1·9

126. In a framed structure, as 01 s. '

/\

!/ \~
I
shown in Fig. 1·!0, the force in
the member BC is
Wf V'3
1{s~
(a) (compression)
(b) WJ "13 (tension) IB
(c) 2W/v3 (compression) A f
{ci) 2W/ \13 (tension) w
(e) none of the above Fig. HO
127. In a framed structure, as shown in
Fig. 1·10, the force in the
member AC is numerically equal to the force iii member BC.
Yes d No 0
123. In a framed structure, a.s shown in Fig. 1·10, the force in the
member .AB is ............the force in member AC.
{a) half (b) equal to (c) double
129. In a framed structure, as shown in Fig. l· 10, the force in
the member CD is tensile in nature.
i i
Agree 0 0 :!
' Il
136. Whlch of the following is a scalar quantity ? I

(a) Volume (b) Speed {c) Velocity (d) Acceleration i I

(e} Force jit
131. The negatiYe acceleration is called retardation. III
True 0 False 0 'fl
2-M.E.

1r
 --
·.ApPlied H~nit:a
:132. Jf the body falls freely nnder ~~•. then the gra.Vfta.tiona.l
accelemtion-iSta.ken as
{a) +8·9 mfs: {b) -S·9liJ./s* (c) +9·8 mjsrt -{d) -9·8 mjsi
1~. _lf a. body is thro'Wll up-wards, then the gravitational accelem-
tion m taKen BR zero. ---- _____ .. ___ _
0 Wrong 0
134. If the gra.vitationaJ s.ooele:ra.tion at any place is doubled, then \
!
the weight of a body 'Will be -
t
(a} g/2 (b) g (c) v'% (d) 2g j

~- The veioeity of a. body on reaching the ground from a height

i, is
{a) 2v gA {b) # (c} ,f2gA (d) 2uV'l I\
1!~. The Becelera.tion of a body sliding down an inclined surface is
(a) g sin 8 lb) g cos 8 (c) g tan 8
13"1. .According tc Newton's first law of motion,
{fl) every body continues m its state of rest 01' of mili"orm
motion, in a straight line, unless it is acted upon by some I
extema.l force '1•
(b) the rate of change of momentum is directly propor-tional
to the impressed force, and takes p1a.ee in the same
direction, in which the force Mts 1
(e) to every ~ction, there is always an equal and opposite
reaction
(ti) none of the above
138. Newton's second law of motion ....•.••.•..a relation between
force a.nd m· ss of a. moving body.
(a) gives (b) does not give
139. A science teacher claimed that Newton's third law o:f
motion is involved while studying the motion of rockets. 1s his
statement
{a) justified (b) not justified
14t. D' Alembert's principle basically depe~ds upon Newton's
second law of motion.
Correct 0 Incorrect 0
141. The rate of change of momentum is directly proportional to
the impressed force, and takes place in the same direction in which
the :force acts. This sta.tement is known as·
(a) . :Newton's first law of motion
{b) Newton's second law of motion
(r) Newton's third law of motion
{d) none of the above
 ..>. : -: ."',fl
;
142. The law of motion involved in the recoil of gun is ' ;

(a) Newton's first la.w of motion

-------- !J

(b) Newton's second law of motion

(c) Newton's third law of motion
(a} none of the above

143. The matter contained in a body, is called

(a) impulsive force (h) ma.-;s (c) weight (d} momentum
144. The force, by which the body is attracted, towards the
cent.re of the earth. is called "'
{t:). impulsive furce {b) mas::; (c) weight (a} momentum

1~. The total motion possessed by a. body, is called

(a) impulshe fiyrce (b) mass (c) weight (d) momentum
145. A newton is defined ns the force while acting upon a. ma.ss
of one kg, produces an acceleration of l mfs2 in the direction of
which it acts.
Ye"~ n
,__. No 0
147. .A .!h"t moves downwards with an acceleration of 9·8 m/s2 • T'.ne
pressure exerted by a. man on the fioor of the lift is zero.
True n False 0
148. When the lift i~:~ moving upwards with some acceleration, the
pressure exerted by a man is ......... proportional to its acceleration.
(a) directly (b) indirectly
14:9. Tension in the cable supporting a lift is more when the lift
is moving ......... with an acceleration.
(a) upwards (b) downwards
lSD. If tension in the cable supporting a Ih'1; moving downwa.r& is
half the tension when it is moving upwards, the acceleration of
the lift is
(a) g/2 . (b) g/3 (c) g/4 (d) 2g
(e) none of the above

151. Two bodies of maFses 3U kg

and 45 kg a.re h'u 1g from of the . i
i I
ends of a. rope, passing over a. iij
frictionless pullely as shown in
~..g. 1·11. Ifthe masses of both
the bodies a...-e doubled, then iJ
,.
''
acceleration of the ~.ng, ......... . ,,i ·:1(
remain ·the same.

{a) wm
{b) will not Fig. H!
Ii,
'il
Iif
'.f
 20 .Appiiea Mechanics

152. If the masses of both.the-b<>dies-shown-in Fig. 1·11 is reduced

by 50%, then tension in the string >rill be ...... the present va1ue.
(a) ha.Jf of
(b) equal to
(c) double than

153. Two blocks A. and B of

weights 150 kg and 50 kg respe·
ctive1y are connected by me-.ans
of a string..as shown in Fig. 1·12.
The· tension in all the three
strings ..... : ... be same.

(a) wm
(b) will not

154. If two blocks of equal weight are attached to the two ends of . II
a light string and one of the blocks is placed ,)ver a smooth horizo-
ntal plane while the other is hung- freely after passing over a smooth J
pulley, then the t.>m blocks will have some motion.
(a) .A.g:.-ee 0 (b) Di,.agret> 0 '!
155. .4. hluck of weight 20 kg lying on a horizontal plane is connec-
ted by a light sttin!! passing over a .«mooth pulley to anot.he:
I
l1
weight 5 kg, which can move. freely in the vertical directo:in a:.<
shown in Fig. 1·13. Th<> tension
in the strh"1g will......... witi1
the increase in eocfficie>nt of fric-
20 kg
T
1--------;"-..
I
I

tion. .... -·.,·

/' .,,. / / . ,..
//"" ..
(a) h"1erease
(b) decrease
(c) -not he e.ffertt>C!

Fig .. 1.. 13

156. A block of weight W1 placed on an inclin~d smooth plaue i:-;

connect.ed by a. light string passing over a. ~mooth puHey to weight
W:!, which moves \·erti<.:ally
rlownwards as l'lhown in Fig. 1·14.
The tension in the :-;tring i~
(a) W~~Wz
(b) wl
sin,';(.
{c) W1 Wz/lf.1 +W~
(G) _!f.1W2 · (l.!.. sin :x)
W1+1f 2
 .. .
Applied Mechanic-s

157. In Fig. 1·14, if the angie of inclination of the pl~ne is in·

creased, then acceleration of the system will --:-----
(a} increase (b) decrease (c) remain the same
15-S. In Fig. 1·14, if the weight W:;, is placed on an inclined rough
plane hasi11g coefficient of friction ,u., then the tension in the string
7r"ill be ' ~

(a) {b)
wl w, (l+sin :::+1' cos !X}
W1 lr
W1 Wz (l+J.k cos :t}
{t;) (d)
W1 +W:
159. '..Vni:ch of the folJo•.ving statement is correct in con'lection witb
projectiies ?
{11,\ _.;.-path, traeed by a projectile in the space. is known as
t7:1jectory.
(b) The velocity with which a projectile is projecteci, is known
as the velocity .of projection.
(c} The angie, with the hor:i.zom:d. at '-vhich a projectile is
projected is known llS angie •:0 r ?fG jeetion.
(d! The total time tak~n by a proj~::ctile to reach maximum
hei~rht and to return 1a.::k to the ,;;round. is known as the
time of flight. -
(el The distance, between the point of projection and the
p0int where the projectile strike:'! th0 ground, is k.'l.own
as ra.n!;e.
([: all of the above (g) uone of the oLDfJVOJ
lSil. T!1e ca.r.:es:ian equation of trajectory is

-+·x tan?: Ia\ ~~-= -:~ tanc:.

' gZ:.
(,;:. -u= x tan:::--,-)-.--.-
_u· cos·:.:
wnere u = VeloCity of proje~tion,
:.: = Angle of projection and.
z.y = Co-ordinates of any point on the trajectory after t
seconds.
161. The path of the projectile is a parabola
Correct U Incorrect 0
1i2. The time of flight of a projectile on a horizontal plane
is given by
2u sincr. 0)
(b) t = ~u coso:
(a) t=
g g
2u tana. 9u
(c) t= (d) t = - - -
g g s:in a.
 2.2

(bi R = ~ill sin

~ 2 cos 2ct 2!lt
(a\ B- - - - - ~
g I

~:3 COSet - - ...:~ idne&

(c) 11 = (d}ll= ~--
g fj

164. The range of a. projeclile is ma:timum, when the ~le o:f

projection !a
(a) 30° (b) 45° {e) ooo (aj 00"
.....
165. The maximum height of a projectile on a. .horizontal piane, is
'U~ sin:a<X ulil ·cos8 a.
(a) {b)
.2g 2g
u 3 sin2 c:
-(d)
r coa3 a.
(c) g
g
!66. The time of:Big.ht of a. projectile on R.n upward melinedpl!me is I
I'
g cos!' 'b) t 2u sin (ot-f'} .l
ia) t = 2u sm. («-~) 1 = fl cos~ .
!
g cos ~ 2u sin (IX+~)
(c} t = 2u sin («+ {3) {d) t = g cos I)

where 'It=Velocity of projection~

= .Angle of projection, and
lit

~ = Inclination of the plane with the horizontal.

l6i. T'ne tiine of :Bight of a. projectile on downwr""---d inclined plane

depands upon
(a) a.ngle of projection
(b) a.ngle of inclination of the pi&ne
(c) both (a) and (b)
none of the above
168. The range of projectile (R} on an upward inclined pi&ne is
g cos&[) 2uZ aln (ex+~} ·COS IX
(a) (b) ' )
2u3 sin (ct+/3) cos ::t g cost~ 'i
J
g cosll !3 2u 3 .sin {«-!'} cos ct
(c) (d)
2u; sin (a.-f)) COGIX g cos2 j3
169.. The :range of projectile on a. downward inclined plane is•..•••
the range on upward inclined plane for the same velocity of "l:k"''iec-
tion and angle of projection. ~ •
(a} less than (b) more than {e) equal oo j
I
 Applied .Mechanics

1 'iO. Match the correct answer

statements in Group 44.

Group A Group B

2u sin ,;
(A)
(a) The carte~ion equation IJ
of trajectory is 2u sin (J:-.B1
(B)
(b) The time of fiizht of a ~·cosy--
projectile on ~a. hori- ua sin 2::.
zontal plane is (0)
q
(c) The horizontal range
of projectile is (D) parabola
(d) The rna..:riroum height
of a projectile on a 2u sin (ct+{))
{E)
horizontal plane is g cos~

(e) The time of flight of a fP?

projectile on~ an up- (F) x ta.n :L-
;!ull cosz ct
ward inclined plane is
u,!l sin=::.
(G)
2g

lil. The maximum displacement of a body, from its mean position

is called amplitude.
r;
Right L..: Wrong 0
1'12. Freauencv of vibrations means the number of cycles per
second • "
Yes 0 No 0
173. The time taken by a pa..'"iiicle for one complete oscillation
is known as periodic time.
0 .l;
Agree Disagree 0
174. The amplitude is always ...radius of the circle. -
{a) equal to (b) less than (c) greater than
175. The periodic time (T) is given by
'.
(a) w/2-:: (b) 2-::/w (c) 2'!!: X co (d) '!l:/w
where w = Angular velocity of particle in rad/~c.
176. A body .is said to move or vibrate with ..simple harmonic
motion if its acceleration is directed towards the mean- position
and is proportional to the distance from that point.
True 0 False 0
117. The velocity of the particle moving with simple harmonic
motion is •.•..•..• ·at tlie mean position.
{a) zero (bJ minimum (cl ma.:rimum
 1 '18. The acceleration of 1he particle movmg with simple harni.omc
mo·tion .is...... at the mean position.
{a) zero (bl minimum (c} . maximum
179. The velocity of a particle {vj moving with· simple harmonic
motion, at any _instant is given by ·
{a) w4' ~l-r! · . {b) w .fr -'!I .
{c) wa..J y3-r (d) w3 4?J-1f
where r = -~mpU!ude of motion, and
y = :Displacement of the parti~le from mean pc.e:ition,
100. The acceleration of a particle moving with simple ha.rmonic
motion, at any instant js given by
(a) w • y (b) w 2 • y (c) w=fy (d) w 3y
:uu. The :maximum velvcity of a. particle :moving with simple
harmonic motion is
(a) w (b) ulf' ic} (d) w/r an
182. The maximum acceleration of a particle moving "'ith simple
harmonic motion is
(a) w (b) U11' {c) w'lr (d) :tJ/r
183. One end of a. helical spring is fixed while the other end car-
ries the load W which moves with simple harmomc motion. The
frequency of motion is given by ·
p-- , ("""'",""
l g ... ' g
{a) 2':1: "'I 7Q (b) - .. I -
'iJ 2r.'J IS,
t7 lfT
(c)
..... vg
<>- _I -
;;:-:'\f~ -IJ
(d) -

where 6 = Deflection of the spring.

184. The acceleration of a particle moving with. simple harmonic
:motion is inversely proportlonl!.l to the displa.r:ement of the particle
from the mean position.
me 0 False 0
lBS. The peri~dic time of one oscillation for a simple pendulum is

(a)
1 :rz
2:-:\/ T (b) 2:-:
1
\1rg
-r
r1 f'7
.:
(·c} »- J. •
-··'\J g t..:r)
,tv
9-
.... '\1 T I g

where l = Lengt-h of the pendulum.

186. ·In order to double the period of simple pendulum, the length .·f
of t.he string should be l
~·
·(a) halved (b) doubled (c) quadrupled
)
Applied Mechanic-~

187. The motion of the body from one extremity to the other
is known as a beat.
Conect 0 Incorrect (]
188. A pendulum which executes one beat per second is known as
(a} simple pendulum (b) compound pendulum
(e) torsional pendulum (d) second's pendulum
1~9. ~ ~ pen~ulu:z:t in ta.ken 1 km beiow the earth surface in a
mme, :at will ••••.. m time.
{a.) gain (b) loose
100. The length of a second's pendulum is
(a.] 94·9 em (b) 99·4 em {c} 100 em {d) 101 em
191. W'nen a rigid body is suspended ">'"ertica.liy. and it oscillates
with a. smsll amplitude under the Mtion of the force of gravity,
the body is known a.s
(a) simple pendulum (b) compound pendulum
~) t-orsional pendulum (d) second's pendulum
!92. The frequency of oacilla.tion of a compo:znd pendulum is

(a)
.,_ f gio
....'1 ~=
•·)
10
'"'- ~G +;;,:
-··v g J
r
2

(cl}

where leo = Ra~ of gyration about the centroidal axis. and

ll, = Distance betwt~en the noint of sus-pension and O.G.
o£' the body. ~ •
193. The equivalent iength of a simple pendulum which gives the
same frequency as compound pendulum is -
r. ko=+nl·
(a) l:o!l+h= {b) A-
J.i
(c) -kc:+h11
~. The centre of percussion is be.low the \!entre of gravity of the
body and is at a ~tance equal to
(a) h/ko (b) "h2/ko (e) l:o~Jl?, (a) x ko r.
195. The frequency of oscillation of a. torsional pendulum is
" r[fg
-xv-
... n ~~:"· I:---
{j

ru
(a) (b}
!" t 2::- l: X\

2~r
(c)
-r-x T (d) r
2nl: x v{1.T
26 . A.pplied Jlecha_nie:s
196. Which of the following statement is correct !
(a) The periodic time of a particle moving withsimple-·harmomc --
motion is the time taken by a. pa..."'1:icle for one complete
oscillation.
(b) The periodic time of a particle moving with si-mple hannonic
motion is directly proportional to its angular velocity.
(c) The velocity of the particle moving with simple harmonic
motion is zero at the mean position.
(d) The acceleration of the particle moving with simple har-
monic motion is maximum at the mean position.
{e) The frequency of a particle moving with simp]<! harmonic
motion is directly proportional to periodic t.ime.
19'7. Match the correct a.t"lswer from Group B for the given state·
ments in Group A, in connection with simple harmonic motion.

Group A Group B

(a) The ma:d.mum displacement (.A) frequency

of a body from its mean p-::>;;:i.
tion is
(b) The n~ber of cycles per
second ts
(.Bj end of extremeues l
(c) The velocity of the particle
is zero at the
(C) simple pendulum I
(d)

(e)
The acceleration of the pa.rti·
cle ia zero at the
A pendulum executing one
{.D) second's pendulum

(.E: periodic time

I
heat per second is

{f) 2:-e j; is the periodic time

(.F) torsional pendulum
of
r r-
(g) r;r ~ j is the frequency of {G) amplitude
oooillation of
(h) f2:-e is (H) mean position
(IJ

!98. '.ple unit of a~<:TUlar velocity is

(a} m/'JJJ.in.
em/sec (cj -s::adfsec (d) revolutions/min
(b)
{e) eithell!' \C)
(d) Ot
199. The angular velocity (in rad/sec) of a body ro~ a1i ff
r.p.m. is
(a) 'teN !60 (b) ruvjlSO (c) 2~1/00 (d) 2nN/l80
 200. The unit of &."lguia.r s.cce]eration is
(a) kgm (b) m/sec {e} m/sec'il (d)· mal~
2@1. The linea? velocity of a body :rotating at wradjsec along a.
~ oot.li of r.,dius 7 is given by
~ ~

{€&) wfr (bj w.r {e) w'ljr {ti) u;.r

~ The motion of a. whee! of a. car is

((1;) purely tran.sle..tion (b) pm'eiy rotational
(e} combined tmr..sla.tion and rotational .....
29l. When a P'<'-rson, on a bicycle, drives round a curve, he bas to ·
~ •••••.••••. to me.intam equilibrium.
(G) Ouiwan:i (o) m:w.s.,"""'
~ The angle of inclination of a vehicle when moving along a
ch'cula.'r path ......••. upon its mesa.
{a) depends Cb) does not depend
~. The angle of incli."l&tion with the vertical is .......•• ··~······ .....
if the cyclist is running at a fester speed than that when he is
nn:ming at a. slower speed.
(a) !ess (b} more

~- T'ne force which acts &long the radius of a circle and dilf'ected
toward.s the centre of the ch"""Cie is kno-wn as centripetal force.
Yes 0 No [J
2ffi. The force which acts along the :rndius of a circle and diroo+..ed
away from the centre of the circle is called centrifugal force.
Agree O Disagree 0
200. Which of the following are ,·ector quantities 1
(a) linear displacement (b) linear '\""elocity
{cj iinea.r 8.-eeeiemtion {d) displacement
(e) a.ngWar velocity (f) angular a.ccleratioil
(g) a.n of the above
• · The motion of a particle round a fi:2ted a::r;is is
(a} t.mn;:J.atory (b) rotary (c) eircnh.r
{d) translatory as well as :rotary
- 21@. In oroer to completely specify angular displacement by !:>
vector, it must fix
(a) direction of the axis of rotation
(b) magnituda of. angular displacement
(c) sense of angUlar displacement
{d) all of ~e s.oove (e) none of the e. hove
 -
28 Applied Mer.luznic.s
.. ·~ -.~~:: ~ '

211. When a praticle moves along a circular path,its a.ccelera.tio~-----1

two compenents one is normal component and the other is tangentia:
component of acceleration.
Trne 0 False 0
212. When a particle mores along a straight path, there be will
centripetal acceleration as well tangential acceleration.
Right U Wrong 0
213. When a particle mo\·es along a circular path with u!'iform
. then• will be no tangential acceleration.
velocitv, ...._
Correct U Incorrect
214. 'The slope on the mad surface generally provided on . the
curves is known as
(c.:) angle of friction (b} angle of repose
(c) angle of ba.n!>ing (d) none 'of the above
21.5. The ideal angle of banking pro,.ided on the cur;·es on road~
depends upon
(a) weight of the vehicle
(b) ( v ~locity)~ of the ,·ehicle
(c) nature of tb.<> road surfa.ce
(d) coefficient of friction between the road and vehicle
I
contact point (e) a!l of the abo,·e
1
21S. When a train is ~ounding a cur\'e. t..t\e side th..""Ust on the
wheel flanges is pret'ented by raising the outer edge of the rail.
I
Yes 0 No 1 1
l
211. The amount bv which the
is kno'i'll). as super-ele~tion.
out~r edc,re of th" rail .is raised.
-
I
I

Agree 0 Disagree c
:;!18. ln. railways, the super-elevation is expressed in te:rms of the
difference of level b~tween the two :rails.
True 0 False 0 Ii
21~. The super-elevation is given by
GrP Gg
(a) (b) (c) J
gr Vir
where G = Gauge of the track ..
v = Velocity of the vehicle, and
i
j

I1
r = P...adius of the circular path.
~. The maximum velocity of a vehicle in order to avoid over-
tm:ning on a level· circular path, is
.i
*
k
(a} (b)
g'!'G
(c)
"' {sJ)

'
gra T ;. j
..Jgra 1
~

f
 29
221. When Bt vehlcle mo\·es on a lever circular path, the :resction
at the inner whee! is
lgra .\
w
u:~)
1(1
{a) ( 1- (h) i- _;.i 1{
2 \ 'iN/. j 2 \ ti~k j

(c)
'IC ( J
• lv'h
-- \ (d)
'IC
( ] +v'h- ;)
-:! gra J T \ (p'a '
where w = Weight ofthe vehicle,
'0 = Velocity of the -rehicle,
h = Height of C. G. of ti'1e Yehicle from ground level,
2a = Distance between outer and inner wheel, and
r = Radius of the circular path
222. The maximum velocity of a verricle in order to avoid skidding
away on a level circular path, is
(a) p.f!i' (b) !JJ!Jr (c) v;;gr (a} !~J.Lgr

223. The overturning of a vehidc on a. leYel circular path can be

avoided if the velocity of Yehicie is ..... "'lgroih.
{a) less than cb) gre~ter than
224. The skidding away of the vehicle on a level circu!a.r path can
be avoided if the force of friction between the wheelsa.nq, the ground
is ..••.••••• the centrifugal force.
(a) less than !b) gre·tter than
223. The total momentum of a system of :masses (i.e. moving bodies)
in any one direction remains constant, unless acted upon by an
external force in that direction. This statement is called
(a) Ne·wton's 5rst law of motion
(b) Newton's second la.w of motion
(c) principle of conservation of energy
(d) principle of conserYa.tion of momentum
226. The bodies which rebuu:1d after impact are ca.Iled
(a) :inelastic bodies (b) elastic bodies
(c) neither elastic nor inelastic bodies

Z'l.i. The loss of kinetic ~nergy durin.e: inelastic impact, is gi,·en by

mlm: 2 (m 1 +71• 2 )
(a) (·r1-·r::)2 (b) {vl-'?..'2)2
2 (m 1 +m.~) 111!111·:

(c)
11/lfll!
(t·, 2 --r})
:? (ml + -m:)
-2(m. 1 +m:) (d) {v, 2 -r})
mlm2

where m-1 = l\Iass of the first body.

m" = Mass of tlw second body, and
v 1 umlt·~ = Yelocitic~ of the fir~t nnd seconrt .bodies ,,
respectiwiy.
228. The impact between two iea.d spheres is approximately eqU&I t-;)
an .•...... impact.
(aj elastic {b) inelastic
229. In collision of elastic bodies. the coefficient of restitution is
the ratio of the relative velocity after impact to tae :reh'!;!:i.Ye velo·
city before impact.
Correct n fncorrect 0
2:ro. The coefficient of restitution L')r inelastic bodies is
(a) zero (b) between zero and one (c) one (d) more than one
~. The coefficient of restitution for elastic bodies is one.
Right 0 Wrong 0
~. During elastic impact, the relative velocity of the two bodies
wdmpact is ........ the relative '\"elocity l)f the two bodies before
impact
(a) equal to (b) equal and opposite to
(c) less than (d) greater than
~- The loss of kinetic ener~y riuring elastic impact is zero.
Yes 0 No C .,
~ The loss of kinetic energy due t.o direct impact of two bodies I
•••...... upon the value of coefficient of restitution.
(a} depends (b) noes not riepend
I
235. Whlc.h of the following statement is correct 1
I
(a) The kinetic energy of r~ body during impact remains con-
5"-...ant.
(bj The kinetic energy of :t body before impact ~.; equal to
the kinetic energy of a booy a-fter impact.
(c) The klnetic energy of ~t bnr!y befo:r? impact is iess than
the kinetic energy of a body after impact.
(d) The kinetic energy of a body before impact is more than
the kinetic energy of a body after impact.
(e) none of the above
2!6. When two elastic bodies collide with each othe:;:.
(a} the t:v>·o bodies wiU momentanly come to rest after
collision
(b) the two bodies tend to compress a.nd deform at t.he sur-
face of
contact
1
(c:) the two bodies begin to regain their orlg-h"lal shape
(d) aU of the above {e) none of the above 1

m. ·Two b&11s of eaual mass and of perfectly eiastic material are

lying on the floor.- One of the ball with v~Jocity 'll ~s made
to stmck the second ball. Both the balls after xmpa.ct will move
with a velocity
(a) v (h) v/2 (c)j v/4 {a) '<J/8
~ -: -:-~~~":-:~:~~~:i::;:::~~7Y:~.~·
A~~~ M~nici -

---~· A. !ea-d ball with_a certain veiocity is made to strike a. wail ,it
falls down, but rubber ball of same mass and with same velocity
strikes the same wall, it rebounds. Select the correect reason from
the :following : .
(a.)_ J~<;>t_h, phe halls undergo an equal change in momentum
(b) the change in momentun1 suffered by robber ball is more
tha.n the lead ball -
{c) the change in momentum suffered by rubber ball is less
than the lead bail
(d) a.ll of the above (eJ none ofthe above
~. If v and ·ZJ:: are th"' velocities of two mo~ bodies in the
same direction before impact and v1' and v .' are"' their velocities
af6-..er impact, tht::n coefficient of restitution is given by
I
v, -v v:· -v1'
{a) --·-
1:1-~-,
(f-/
'!J!'-'V~

V:-V= Vj-·V~
(cl (d)
v!'-'li:;~ 'lJ:~ ~'!11~

240. A body of mass m .wo,·Hlt! Wlth a constant velocitv v strike::;

anothf'r body of ,;a. me mas:s In mo Mn;z 'vith same vefocity b:;::.
in opposit.t~ di!'l:ctJf\!!. Tht:: common velocity of both the bodies
after coliision is
Ia} t' (b) ~ c• tc) 4 v (d) 8 v
241. A mbber ball is dropped from a height oi2m. Ifthere is no
:loss of velocity after rehotmding-. the ball will rise to a height of
ia) 1 m rb) :: tu (c) 3 m (d) 4 m

242. Whent'Vt::l' a fort:t: <lt:l;:. 11t1 ,( body aml th~ body undergoe:s
a disp1uc:ement, tht: \\·orli: is saicJ tu ht-- done.
Agrt::: U Disagrt:t r1
243. Tht:: nnit- of ~\ ork
iu M.K.S. units i:>
(b) kg ru (c) erg (d) dyn~
244. 'fhe unit of work in S.l. unit!! ll'
(a) newto:u {b) erg {d) joule
245. One kgm is equal to
(a) 980 ergs (b) 9·8 joules (c) 8·9 joules (d) 980 ~ules

246 One joule is equal to

(a) O·l Nm (b) l N'm {c) lO Nm (d) lOONm
247. Work done is said to be z.>...ro, when
(a) some force acts en a, body, but displacement is zero
(b) no force &eta on a body but some displacement j·:
place '
(c) either (a) or (b) (d) none of the above l'
t
l.
I:
 248. -One-joule means that__.____
(a) work is done by a force of IN when it displaces a body
th=ough l.m
(b) work is done by a force of l kg when it displaces a body
through 1m
(c) work i"l done by a force of l dyne when it displaces a body
through l em
(d) work is done by a force of 1 gm when it displaces a b.:dy
through 1 em
249. Joule is the unit of
{a) force (b) work (c) power (a) energy
(e) none of the above
~50. The rate of doing work is known as pmver.
'l'!'-.1e O False
2511.. The unit of power in M.K.S. units is
{a) horsepower {b) joule (c} watt (d) k;~rn
252. The unit of power in S.I. units is
{a) horsepower (b) joule (c) watt (d) kgm
253. One horsepower is equal to
(a) 450 kgm/min (b} 4500 kgrn!min
(c) 550 kgm/min (d) 5500 kgmjmin
L~ One watt is eq~Jal to
(a) O·l joule/sec (b) 1 joule/sec
{c) 10 j<Ouleo/se<' (d) 100 ioules/~ec
255. In order to find horsepower, multiply the workdona/rnin by
4500.
:Right 0 Wrong [J
256. The power developed by a body acted a.
P kgrn a.nd revolving at N :re;·olutions per minute given by
, 'i'xN T:n ':f.N.
(aJ P= 4500 h.p. (b) P= OO n.p.
, P T x 'l<ttN b D Tx2-::J.Y h
(c, ~ = 4500 ·P· (d) "' 60 ·P·

'lSi. T'.o.e pow<>r developed by a body al?ted upon by a torque T

Newton metre tNm) and revolving at w radian/sec is given by
\a) P.w (in watts) (b) P.wf60 (:in watts)
(c) T.w/75 (in kilowatts} (d) P.w/4500 (in kilowatts)
258. Energy may be defined as the capacity of doing work.
Coft'ect 0 mooiTect 0
 33
259. The unit of energy in M.K.S. units is
(!i) dyne ·(b) watt (c) kgm ·----(d}-joqle----
250. The unit of energy in S.I. units 1s
(a} dyne (b) watt (c) kgm (d) joule
261. The energy possessed by a body, for doing work by virtue
of its position, is called
(a) potential energy (b) kinetic energy
(c) electrical energy (d). chenricalenergy
262. , The kinetic energy of a bQdY .•....... upon its mass and velocity.
(a) does not depend (b) depends
263. The potential energy stored by a spring in compression~ is
called strain energy.
Yes .No 0
26-!. When a bodv of mass m attains a Yelocir;v t• from Il'lSt in.
time t, then the k:inetic energy of translation is •
(a) mv2 (b) mgv2 (c) 0·5 mzr (d) 0·5 mgv'J;
~S5. When a. body of ma.ss moment of inertia I (about a given a::ris}
is -::ot.a.ted about that axis with an angular velocity w, then the
kinetic energy of rot:J.tion is
(a) lw (b) JwS (c) 0·5 lw (d) 0·5 Jwll
2oo. The wheels of a moving car possess
(a) potential energy only
(b) kinetic energy of translation only
(c) kinetic energy of rotation only
(d) kinetic energy of translation and rotation both
(e) none of the above
25'1. .According to principle of conservation of energy, the total
momentum of a system of masses in any direction remains constant
unless acted upon by an external force in that direction.
Trne 0 False 0
258. Tne total energy possessed by a system of mo>ing bodies
(a} is constant at every instant
(b) varies from point to point
(c) is maximum in tb.e start and minimum at the end
(d) is ·minimum in the start and maximum at the end
(e) none of the above

269. The potential energy of a vertically raised body is ••.• ···-

the kinetic energy of a vertically falling body.
{a) equal to {b) less than (c) greater tha.n
3-'M.E.
 2i0. When -~he spring of a watch is wound, it will possess
(a.) atraiu energy ---{br-kinetic energy
(c) h~t energy {d) electrical energ;r
m. !i two bodies haTing masses m1 and m! {m,.>w...a) have equal
kinetic energies,- the momentum of body having mass
the momentum of body ha. ~ing mass ~Jla.
m,
is •••...••••••

(a) eqiml to (b) le8s ·than {c) greater than

l. Agree .2. (~~ 3. (e} 4. !cl · 5. {e;

6. 'l'rne 7_. (a) 8. (b} 9. Correet 10. (b)
H. (e) 12. {b) 13. (bj ],4. Right 15. (e}
16. (b) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. No 20. (a)
21. 'rme 22. (bJ .23. (e) "24. (a) 25. {c)
.26. (a) 2'1. (b) 28. Agree 29. {b) 80. (d)
31. -(b) :~2. Cor!"cct 33. ~.Wrong• ~ (Gi) 35. (c)
36. (a) 37. (d) 38. {c) ~9. (~ 40. {c)
.41. (cij 42. No 43. Trtle 44. {b) 45. (d)
46. {D), (A), (B:, (F), (H) 47. {e) 48. {e) 49. (b)
00. (a) 51. .Agree 52. Correct 53. Right 54. (a)
.00. {e) 56. (b) 57. Yes 58. {c) 59. (c)
.00. (B). {J:), {A), {0), (.F), (D) 61. {a.) 62. {d)
~. {tl) 64. False 65. Disagree 66. Conect 67. (b)
'68. (d) 69. {b) 70. (a) n. {a) 72. Yes
'13. (tl) 74. {c:) i5. {d) 76. (a) 71. (d)
18. (e) 79. (al 80. (a) 81. Right 82. (c)
:-."3. (a) 84. (b) 85. (e) 86. False 87. Agree
88. (b) 89. (a} 90. (c) 9!. '$3 92. Correct
93. (b) 94. (a) 95. (b) 96. !jl 97. (aj
98. (a) ~9. (e) 100. (b) 101. (d) 102. {a)
103. (a) !.04. \O} 105. Right 106. ttn 107. (a)
lOS. No iOH. False 110 . .Agree lll. {b) ll2. (a)
113. (c~ 114. (c) 115. (d) 116. {c) !l 7. Correct
US. rcl) 119. {0), (E), (A). tB), (F) 1.20. (d) 121. Right
122. (a) 123. (d) 124 \b) 125. (a) 126. (d)
l2i. Yes 12~. (a) 1:?». Agree 130. {a), {b) 131. Trne
132. (e) l33.W.ro!.tg 134. (d) 135. (cj 136. (a}
137. {a) 138. {a) 139. {a) 140. Correct l4L (b)
142. (c) 143. (b) 144. (c) 145. (d) 146. Yes
 Strength of

l. Whenever 50me e:.rtemal fijstem -of. forces acts on a

body, it undergoes some defor.mation. As the body undel'goes some
deformation, :it sets up some resistance to the deforma.tien. This
resistance per unit .area. to deformation, is called
(a) strain (b) stress · (c) p:ress!ue
(tl) modulus of elasticity
2. The unit of stress :in M.X.S. units is
(c) kg em (b) kgjcm
3. The tu:Ut of stress :ir. S.I. lmits is
{c) N/mmg (b) kNf;;nm'- (c) 1i1N/A.f!i!l
(I) &II ofthe above {e) none of the above
4. The deformation p-er unit length is called j

(a} taBsile stress

(c) >~hear stress
(b)
(a)
compressive stress
strain (e) none of1he above I
i
!$. The '!mit of strain is
(a)
(d} mm
kg em

6. Strain is equal to
{b}
(e)
kg/em
no unit
(c) kgjcm2
I
(a) Z/& (b) oZ/l (c) I 3l (d) :::!.One of the above
where l = ~llength, and
ol = Clu!.nge in length.
7. When .a body is iimbjected to two equal and opposite
puimes, .as s. :result of whlch the body tends to reduce .its length,
the stress and strain induced is compressive,
~e 0 0 I)
I
· &~nath of Jl~ 3'1

8. When a body is subjected to two equal and opposite pulls,---

as a result of which the body tends to extend its length, the stress
and strain induced is
(a) compressive stress, tensile strain
(b) tensile stress, compressive strain
(c) tensile stress, tensile strain
(d) compressive stress, compressive strain
(e) none of the above
9. \Yhen a body is subjected to two equal and opposite
forces, acting tangentially across the resisting .section, as a. result of
which the body tends to shear off across the section, the stress and
strain induced is
(a) tensile stress, tensile strain
(b) compressh·e stress, rompre:<siYc stra.in
(c) shear stress, tensile st.rain
(d) shear stress, shear strain

10. Hook's law holds good up to

(a) yield point (b) elastic limit
(c) plastic limit (d) breaking point
(e) all of the abo\·0 ( j :''J none of the above

n. Whene;·er a material is loaded within elastic limit, stress is .. · ··o

strain.
(a) equal to (b) directly proportional to
(c) inversely proportional to
12. The ra.tio of linear stress to t.he lim,ar strain is called
(a) modulus of rigidity (b) morlulus of elasticity
(c) bulk modulus (d) Poi;;son's ratio

13. When·a. change in length takes place, the strain is known a~

(a) linear strain (b) lateral strain
(c) volumetric strain (d) shear strain

H. The change in length due to a tensile or compressive force

acting on a. body is given by
P.l ..A Pl AE
(a) --y- (b) (e) (d)
Pr
where P =Tensile or compressive force acting on the body,
l = Original length of the body,
A = Cross-sectional area. of the body, and
E = Young's modulus for the material of the body.
 38 Strength of Materials

(e) 0·1 x 106 kg/em.'l (b) 0·8 X 1011 kg/cm'~­

{c) 1·0 X 106 kgfema {cl) 2·1 x 101 kg/cm2
16. Young's modulus may -bede~&s the .ratio of
{e) linear stress to is.teral stram
(b) la.teral strain to linear strain
(c) linear stresa to linear strain
(ci) shEar stress to shear strain
(e) shear sU'es8 to linear strain
11. The unit of Young's modulus :is same as that of~.

0 0
13. The deformation of a bar under its own weight is .....•... t.ne
deformation, if the same body is subjected to a direct lcsd equal to
weiiht of the body.
(e) equal w (b) half (c} double (d) quadrupi,.

19. Strain rosetters are used to

(a) measure shear strs.in (b) measure linear strain
(c) measure volumetric strain (d) relieve strain
(e) produce strs.in
20. .A bar of length L metres extends by l mm u."lde!' a. tensile !ores
of P kg. T'ne strain produced in the bar is
(a) lfi. {b) O·l lfL {e) O·Oll/L (d) O·OOll/L

21. The extension of a. circu1a.r bar tapering uniformly from

diameter d1 at one end to diameter d, at the other end, a.'ld subjected
to an a:ri&l pull of P is given by
4:PE 4r.Jd!!.
(a) 8l- (b) ~l = Pii'
'ltldll ~&I

4Pl 4PlB
(c) cz = -;:Ed1ds
(d) i>l-
Ttdad.;;
22. The extension of a circular bar tapering uniformly from diameter
dt a.t one end to diameter <is at the other end, and subjected to an
axial pull of P is............the extension of a circula,r bar of dia.meter
v' ct1ds mbjected to the. same load P.
(e) equai to (b) less than {c) greater than
~. T.ne ultim&t.e t-ensile !lltf'el!!s for mild steel is ......tha ultimate

I
compressive stf'e!8.
) ·~1 to. f~ Jeg "Mn · (e} more than
Strength of Materiakl

24. Moduia.r ratio of the two materials is the ratio of

(a} linear stress to lateral strain
(b) linear stress to linear strain
(c) shear stress to shear strain
1d 1 their modulus of elaaticitieta
{e) their modulus of rigidities tj) none of the above
25. \Vhen e. bar is subjected to a change of temperature and ita
.deformation is prevented, the stress induced in tl1e bar is
{a) tensile st'!:eBs (b} com~ve stl't'1!5
(c) shear stress (d) thermal stle&>
26. T'ne thel'lllal stress in a c.irculs.r bSll' tapering mili'ormly from
diameter d1 at one end to diamet-er ds at the other end. is
(a) (J..t.Pd, (b) atd1 lC} cx.~
dt ~ d,lfJ
le)
ditt
~
where (J. C-oefficient of lineal' expa.nsion,
:;;=

t Change in temperature, a.nd

:m

E = Modulus of elasticity of the bar ms.ter...&.

27. The thermal stress in a lmr is .••...... proportional to the change
in temperature.
(a) directly (b) indirectly

28. The thermal stress ......... upon the cross-sectional ares of thto
bar.
(a) depends (b) does not depend
29. If there is a full in the temperature of a composite body, then
a member having greater coefficient of linear ezpansion will be
subjected to compressive stress.
True 0 .False 0
30. Which of the following statement is correct ~
(a) The stess is the pressure per unit area..
(b) The strain is expressed in. mm.
(c) Hook's Ia.w holds good upt.o the breaking point.
(d) Stress is directly proportional to strain within e~ic
limit.
(e) The ratio of the linear stress to the linear strain is C3lled
modulus of rigidity.
(f) The mod'War mtio is the ratio of lateral strain to ~
strain.
 · Stren.gti of M aterlak

:n. The defOI'Ill&tion of the ba.r per ...:unit-J.engtl:Lin_the..direction ~r

the force is known as
{a) linear stra-in (b) la:tera-1 strain
(c) volumetric stra.in {d) shear strain
32. Evel",Y direct stress .is always a.ccompa.nied by a. strain in its
own direction a.nd an opposite kind of stra-in in every direction, a.t
right angles to it. Such a. strain is known a-s
{a) linear stra.in (b) la-teral strain
(c) volumetric $'sin (d) shear strain
33. 1"he ra.tio of the l&tera.l strain to the 1inear strain is caJled
{a) !!Dodultm of'elasticity {b) modulils of rigidity
(c) bulk modulus (d) Poisson's ratio
~ A steel bar .2 m long, .20 mm wide a.nd lO mm thick is sub-
jected to a. pull of .2 tonnes. If the same bar is subjected to a push
·of ..2 ~. the poission's ratio of the bar in tension will be ..•.••.•...•
the poisson's ratio ior the bar in compression.
·(a) equa! ro (b) less than (c) greater than
35. A lQce.lised compressive stress a.t the area. of contact between
two members is known a.s
{a) tensile stress (b) bending stress
(c) crushing stress (a) shear stress
(e) none of the a'Oove
36. The poisson's ratio for steel varies from
fa} ~·23 tO 0·2'1 {b) 0·25 to 0·33
{c) 0·31 to 0·34 (cl) 0·32 to 0·42
31. The poiason·s ratio for cs.st iron varies from
(4) D-.23 to. 0·27 {b) 0·25 to 0·33
.-~. {e) 0·31 to 0·34 td) 0·32 to
38. When a bar of length {lJ, width (b) and thickness (t) is subjected
to a ptill of (P) kg, its
(a) length, width a.nd thickness increa.ses
{b) length, width a.nd thickness decreases
(c) length increases, width and thickness decreases
(4} length decre&ses, width and thickness increases
(e) width increa-ses, length and thickness dec~ases
(J) thickness decressea, length a.nd width mcreases
39. The ratio oC cbsnge in volume to the original volume is called
{cz} lineal' stmin (b) lateral strain
~e) -rolw:netric stra.in (d) Poisson's i'atio
 Strength of M ateriala 41

40.. Wnen a hal' of length (E), width (b) and thickness(:) is subjected
to a push of {P) kg, its
(a)length, width and thickness increases
(b)length, width and thickness decreases
(c) length increases, width and thickness decreases
(a) length decreases, width and thickness increases
(e) width increases, length and thickness decreases
(f) thickne:ss decreases, length and width increases ..._

41. The maximum diameter of the hole that· can te punched from
s plate of maximum shear stress l/4th of its maximum crushing
stress of punch, is equal to
(a) t t/2
(b) {c) t/4 (e'
' }
4t
(f) none of the above
where t = Thickness of plate.
42. The volumetric strain is the ratio of the
(a) origina.l]eJ;tgth t.o the change in length
(b) change in length to the origina.llength
(cl original thickness to the change in thickness
(d) change in thicknes& t.o the original thickness
(e) original ~olume to the change in volt:me
(j) change in volume to the original volume
43. When a rectangular bar of length l, breadth b and thick.."leSS t
is subjected to an axial pull of P, then linear strain is given by
9
p b.t.E
(:z) e = b.t ..E (b) e = --p--
b.t :: P.E
(c) e =-P.E (~) e=
- b.t
where e = Linear strnin, and
E = Modulus of elasticity.

44. \Yhen s rectangular bar of length Z, breadth b and thickness t

is subjected to a pull of P, then volumetric strain is
(a) e (l-2m) (b) e (2m-l)

(c) e ( 1-!) (rl) e

i 2
tm:·-1 \
}
where e = Linear strain, and
l/m = Poisson's :ratio.
 42
-------··
·4S. _T'na length of a conical bar is L, diameter of base is ci and weight
per unit volume is w. The elongation of the bar under the action of
its own weight will be
wL (b)
wL 3
(a) 6.E (c)

~. The ratio of bulk modulllS for a Poisson's ratio of 0·25 will be

(a) l/3 (b) 2/3 (c} 1 (d) 3/2
(e) none of the above '"'

41 A dead load is one which ehiwges m magnitude and direction.

True 0 False 0
48. When a body is subjected to three mutua.Hy :p!rependicu.llu'
fit.resse~,
vf equai intensity, the ratio of direct stress to the corres·
paneling volumetric !t'..ram is known as
{a) Young's modulus {b) modulus of rigidity
(c) bulk modulus (d) Poisson·s ratio

4S. The reia.tion between Young's modulus (E) and bulk modulWl
l E) is
given. by
3m-2 mE
(a) K= (b) K=
mE 3m-2
3 (m-2} mE
(0) E. ==
m.3
(d) K= 3 (m-2)

50. Wnen a. cube is sub~..ed. to three mutually perpendicu.ls.:r

tensile stresses of equal inte:nsity (p) the volumetric strain is

(a}
311 \{ 1--.!.)
E m1
(b) .!_(
3p
1-!.)
m
E I 2 -'
(c) (d) -\'-
3p m -l),
51. '.The relation betwee11 modult!!'l gf elasticity (.E') and modulus of
rigidity (0) iB given by
mE 2 (m+l)
{a} 0=
2.lm+U
tAl
t'l.l} C= mJjJ

2mE m+l
lc} C= m:;r {d) 0 = =rmE
S:t The ratio of ~ mooclus to the mooclus of ~icity for ~
p~·s ~tic

(~)
of &4 r.Jl be
5/"! (b) "3/l]; (c) 5/U (d) 14/5
lj
{e} ~ of the ~oove

'
 Sirengtl~ of .Material8

5S. Wuich oi the foilow',ng statement is wrong ?

{a) The deibrma.tion of the bar per unit length in the direction
of the foroe is caned linear strain.
(b) The Poisi:!on's !'&tio is the ratio oflsteral stmiri to ·~he lin~

{c) The mtio of change in volume to the origi."'la] volume is

called volumetric strain.
(a) The bulk modulus is the mtio of linear stress to the linear
at~
(e) The ntic of abe&r Bt:ress to shear stmin hi called modn!mr
of rl.jlidity.
~ .A shes.r ~ ~...l'OOS a pl&ne. 18 always accompanied by fi;
balau~ shear~ ac:rooo the pla.ne and normal to it.
T:me 0 False n
55. Within elastic limit, shear stress is .........sheal' stmin.
{a} equal '00 (b) less than
(c) grea.te:r thsn (d) directly proportional to
(e) inversely proportional to
56. Shear modulus, mthe ratio of
{a) lines: stress to linear strain
(b) linear stress to la.te:ml atmin
{c) volumetric stmin to !inea.r strain
(d) Bbear BireBS to shear strain
Si. Match the ooH"eet answer from Gt-oup B for the given stat.aments
in Group A.

Group A Gt-oup B

(a} The change in length due t.o n. tensile or mE

compressive lood is {A.)
3 (m-2)
(b) The extension of a circular ba.:r tapering I 2 \
from lit to tEa is (B) e ll--}
m
(c) The volumetric strain of a. :rectangular Pl
bar is (0) .4E
(a) The rels.tion between Young's modulus (D)
4Pl
(E) and bulk modulus (K) is r.Ea1<h.J
(e) T'ne :relstion between modulus oi' eia.ati- 3p ( 1-2 \
(E)
city {.E) and modulus of rigidity (OJ is E m;
mE
(F)
2 {m+l)
 58. A conical rod of length L and diameter dt-s.t"ih-e--iwttom--md--1
~at the top is subjected to s.1oad of P. The tensile load in the rod ;
of a. distance l from the. top is

(a) -~a
41?
(b}
4P
'f"~f,

4P tb_"'Y,
(c) (a)
r. (d.:i!s-a,:~) r. [{!lt-d:) l-H~J~:

59. The P.ls.nes, which carry no shear stress, are known as Principal
planes. "" - -
True O False 0
~. When a body .is subjected to a dil"eilt ~e stress {p) in one
plane, then norma.l stress on an oblique sectio::l of the body inclined at
ru1 angle B to the normal of the section .is
(a) p cos 8 (b) p ooslil a
(c} 'P sin e
~p~8 OOP•~ WP~~
61. The direct stress, across a pr.ncips.l pl&:ne, is kno'WI! as principal
!tress.

0 No 0
6.2. When a body is subjected to a direct tensile strees (p) in one
plane; then tangential or shear stress on an oblique ooction of the
body inclined at an angle B to the norma.I of the section m
(a) p sin 28 (b) p cos 28 {c) p tan 28

(d) ~ sin 28 (e) ~ cos 28 (f.) ~ tan 28

~- When a body is subjected to a direct tensile stress (p) in one

plane, then maximum normal stress occurs at a section inclined at
.........to the normal o! the section.
0
{a) V (b) 30° (c) 45° (d) 00°
64. When a. body .is subjected to a direct tensile stress tP), the
maximum normal Ir-..ress is equal to the cllieet te~Je stl'esll.
Agree 0 Disagree 0
G5. A body is subjected to & direct ~;P..nsile stress (.P) in one plane.
The shear stress is ~tun at a. section inclined s.t ......... to the
nol"'.!l&l of the section.
(a} 0° (b} 60° {c) 45° and 90°
(G) 45° s.nd 135° (e) 60° and 150° (/) 30° and 135~
~. When a. body is subjected to a. direct tensile stress (P) in one·
plane, the ma.ximum shear stress is •••••••••the nol"l':llal stress.
(a) equal to (b) one-half (c) iwo.third
(4) moo {e) fom times.
 67. Wnen a ·body is imbjected to a dfrect tensile stress (p) in one
plane ~cromp&nied by a simple shear strel'lt~), the maximum rro:rma.l
stress IS

{a) ~ +! v'r+4q~ (b)

2
1 ;/ p'i+~
p<___
2
p 1 'j) 'l I
(e) -r+Tvp~-~ (d) .::__...:_'\1 11a_4qS
2 2 - -

(e) ~ypS+~ ....

""
68. When a. body is subjected to a direct temille stress (P) m one
plane accompanied by a simple shf>.a.r stress (q), the minimum norms.l
stress is

(a) .!!... ..l.. .!.. . ./ p:...:... 4Qll (b) ,.:_

1) __
1 ,,/po...:..
ft 4qll
')
"'
i
...
(') I c~.
2 2 I

P l I pu-
o 4qn• p 1 •
..
o·r...,v (d) o-Tv'r-4<1
1
(c)
"" "' ""
1
(e)
2 vp +4q22

69. When a. body is subjected to a direct t-ensile stress (p) in one

pls.ne accompanied by a simple shear stress (q), the maximum shear
stress is

(a) (b)

(c) J;... + ..! 4r-:---~4-:rf:- (d)

p l ./ .
---vp·-~
2 2
. .
·~

70. When a body is subjected to bi-a.:tia.J stress i.e. direct stresse!\1

(.Pl) and {1i:) in two mutually perpendicular planes accompanied by &
simple shear stress (q), then maximum normal stress is

(a)
..
Pl:;Ps +!
.,
V(Px-P~)ll+4q2
1'1....1..'71.. 1 ,----,.,-,.....,...
(b} ~-2'\' (PI-P:) 3 +4qll

(c) P!;Pll +! V{Pd .P:!?+4qS

(d)
 "',·,-

71. Fgtbiaxia.l stress, the pia.nes of maximum shear are-at--right·----4

angles to ea.ch other a.nd are inclined at 45° to the principal planes. !
I
True 0 Fa.!Be 0 i

7.!. In question 70, the maximum normal stress is

("'"') Pt+P-.l
2 +.2._-
2\1l(p1-p ~ )".J..,
,-:qa

73.. fu question 'iO, the maximum shear stre-ss is

1
T'I(PI-Ps)S+4q2
True O False 0
'74. The ma.:timum ehesr stress is ..........•.the algebraic difference of
ms.::Dmum and :m.mimmn normal stresses.
(a) equal to (b) one-fourth tc} one-hs,lf
(a) twi<:e {e) four times (J) none of the aoo,·e

75. Mohr's cireie is ru;ed to determine the stresses on an oblique

section of a body subjected to
(a) direct tensile stress in one plane accompanied by a shear
stress
(b) direct tensile stress in two mutually perpendicular direc·
tions
(c) direct tensile ~in two mutually perpendicular direc-
tions accompanied by a simple sht>ar stress
{a) aU of the above
{e) none of the above
16. Wllen a body is subjected to direct tensile stresses (p1 and ?2) in
two mutually perpendicula!! direction.~. accompanied !>Y a st:np~e
~ mess (q), then in Mohr's circle method, the ctrcle rndxus lS
taken as

(a) 1h P: +q {b) Pd·P2 +q

2 2

(c ) ( lPt-P2) \ 2
\ 2
,
i -;-q 2 (d) ~( (Pt;Pzl r+q2
 47

'r'J. In Mohr's circle, the oontre of circle from Y-a.::!:is is taken as

Ps-PA P1+.P2
(a)
·--r- (b)
2

1h-Pr, ..i-q {d) P1. +t;J

\C! 2
' q
I
"
41 '

'm. The extremeties of any diameter on Mohr's circle represent

(~Z)principal stresses
(b) :normo.l stresses on planes at 45"
(c) shear stresses on p!a.nes at 45°
(a) normal and shea? stresses on a p1a.nf'
(e) nont> of the a.hove
'79. The mB.l:imum shea!' stress is equal to the radius of .l}fohr'ti
circle.
Correct 0 Incorrect 0
30. The energy stored in a body ..,,·hen strained within eiastic L~it
is known as
(a) resilience {b) proof resilience
(c) strain energy (d) impact Pnergy
(e) nonf.' of the above
~1. The tota.l strain energy stored in n bt>dy is termed as
(a) resilience (b) proof resilience
(c) impact energy {dJ modulus of resilience
82. The proof resilience is the m~u::imum strain energy which can
be stored in a body.
Yes 0 0
~. The proof resilience per unit >-olume of ::;. m11tedal is blown as
mooult!B of resilience.
0 False 0
M. Stmin eneljzy .is the
f«) energy stored in i> body when strained ·within elastic limits
I~) ~.Y stored .in a body when strained upto the breaking
of a specimen
(el .t:llS.Ximnm strain energy which can he stored in a body
(cl) proof resilience per unit volume of a material
~. The strain energy stored iD a body, when suddenly loaded, is
omoo the ~in energy ~.,0~ when same Joad is applied gmdue.lly-
(a) ~~to {b) one-half {c) t:w:aee
(d) fum' timeg {e) none of the above
 48 Stre11.gth of .M~

86. :B..esilience is the 'i

(a} energy stored in a body when strained within elastic limits
{b) energy sto~ed in a. body when strained apto the breaking
of the specunen
(c) :ma.ximum strain energy which can be stored in a body
(d) none of the above
87. The total strain energy stored in a body is called proof resilience .
•~gree O Disagree ._ 0
88. Modulus of resilience is the proof resilience per WJit volume of a
material.
Correct 0 Incorre·ct 0
89. The strain energy stored in a body, when the load is gradulally
applied, iE.
pE pV p~E
(a} (b) E (c) 2V (d)
T
where p = Stress in the material of the body,
V = Volu:tpe ofthe body, and
E == ~Iodulus of elasticity of t-he material.
90. The stress induc~d in a body, when suddenly loaded, is ........ .
the stress induced when the same load is applied gradually.
(a.) equal to (b) one-half (c) twice
(d) four times (e) none of the above
91. The strain energy stored in a spring, when subjected to
maximum load, without suffering permanent distortion, is known as
(a) impact energy (b) proof resilience
(c) proof stress (d) modulus of resilience
92. The capacity of a strained body for doing work on the remo,.-al
of the straining force, is called
(a.) strain energy (b) resilience (c) proof :resilience
(d) impact energy (e) none of the above
93. Which of the following statement is correct ·?
{a) The energy stored in a body, when strained within elastic
limit is known as stra.in energy.
(b) The total strain energy stored in a body is called resilience.
{c) The maximum strain energy wbich can be stored in a body
iS termed as proof resilience.
(d) The proof resilience per unit volume of a material is
known as modulus of resilience.
(e) all of the above
(f) none of the above
 ':...:._·.
. \

Strength of Materials

-------94. The strain energy stored in a. body due to shear stress, is

a 2C
(a)
20 xV (b) 20
q.V
(c) ·Lxv
2C (d) <fV
where q= Shear stress,
C= Shear modulus. and
V = Volume of the body.
95. A beam which is fixed at one end and free at the other is
called
(a) simply supported beam (b) fixed beam
(c) overhanging beam ld) cantile\·er beam
96. A beam supported at its both ends is not a simply supported
beams.
Trae 0 False 0
97. A beam extending beyond the supports is called
(a) simply supported beam (b) fixed beam
(c) overhanging bea.m (d) cantile,er beam
(e) continuous beam (J) none of the above
98. A beam encastered at .both the ends is called
(a) simply supported beam {b) fixed beam
(c) cantilever beam (dl continuous beam
99. A beam supported on more than two supports is called
(al simply supported bea.m (b) fixed beam
(c) overhanging beam (d) cantilever beam
(e) continuous beam (f) none of the above
100. A cantilever beam is one which is
(a) fixed at both .ends
(b; fixed at one end and free at the other and
(cl supported at its ends
(d) supported on more than two supports

101. .A simply suppPrted beam is one which is supported on more

than two supports.
True Faist· 0
102. An overhanging beam must ·OJ.-erhang on both sides.
Right Wrong
103. A .fixed beam i'> one wh:ch is fixed <l.t ........• of its ends.
(a) one (b) both
4-:ll. E.
 50 Strength of .Matericii:::

104. A continuous beam is onP which is

(a) fi:x:erl at both ends
{b) nxr>rlnt- one end and frPe at the other end
(cl ~upp• ·rted on more tiwn two suprorts
(dl · e::tt.ending ht•yonJ the supports
105. A eonPPntratt•d load is one which
(a) a<>ts at a point on a beam
{h) 1--.preatl:> non-uniformly OYer the whole length. of a beam
(e) spreads uniformly o.-er the whole length of a 'beam
{dl varit'-' uniformly o\·et• the whole length of a beam
100. .·\ k.-ad whieh af't' at a point on a bt•ani is not caHE>d uniformly
dist:ribut(>(i !oat!. -

0 Disagree 0
107. .-\ uniforml~· rlistributPrl load mo.v b., assumed to behave like a
point load at thf> eentrt" of gravity of ·the load for all sorts of calcula-
tions.
Right Wrong 0
100. A io;~tl which is sprt•atl O\ er ·~ b{•a.m in such a manner that 'it
V&rit>S uniformh• ov-er the whole lenc:th of a beam is called uniforo1Jv
•.....•. .load. · · •

109. Tht> shear force at. a point- on a b<>a.m is t hP a Iaebraic ......... of

aU the forcf's on either sitlt: of t ht' point. -
(a) sum (ol difference
UO. The bem·Hng moment. a.t. a point on a beam ig rhe algebraic ..... ,
of all the moments on eith~r sidt' of the point.
{a) sum (h) diff<'rf'nce
!U. The bending m0ment on a sPct-ion i:> ma:cimum where shear
force is
!G) ZPrO 10) minimum (c) ma:rimum
(d) changing sign (e) none of the above
112. The shear force at a. certain point on a beam changes sign from
+ve value to a-ve value or vice vel"S&. The bending moment at
that point will be zero.
True O. False 0
US. When a load on the free end· of a ~entilene:r beam :.S increased,
failure will OCt'Ul'
(a/ at the free end (b) at the iU:ed end
(cl' in the middle ofthe beam
at a d.WtaDoo 2lf3 from free end
~
1
~
Stre'i'&gtl£ of Material8 :n
-"-l--~u.4.-·The bending moment at the free en<l of a cantilever beam is
(a) zero (b) minimum (c) ml'Uimum
115. A cantilever beam of length l and carrying a point load W a!
the free end is shown in Fig. 2·1. Which of the following i:; correoct !
vv

}-------' ---~·-~

{A)
r: . . . ..
....

I
(B) w~ J •
I I

{C) WI~~
I

(D) .
J~·
I' i
I

I
1
Cu~ve\
,
...
~·:.::,Jw.1
Q
! --:;:-.~· . . .':·.:.: :1
(E)
Fig. :?·1

(a) A is the- bending momE:'nt diagram and 0 is the shear force

diagram - -
(b) A is the shear force diagram and 0 is the bending momenL
diagram
(o) B is the bending moment diagram and B is the shear force
diagram
(d) B is the shear force dia!rram and Iff is the bending mcment
diagram ~ ~

(e) 0 is the bending moment diagram and D is the shear force

diagram .
{/) () is the shear force diagram and ]) is the bending momeut
diagram
 52 Strength of Materials

116. 'When a. beam is loaded with concentrated loads, the bending

moment diagram w:iU qe a.
(a) horizontal ~traight.lint' ;b) vertical straight line
(c) inclined straight line tdi parabolic cur;-e
U'i. The b~n~g moment diagram for a beam loaded with uniformly
distributed load will be a ......... straight line.
{a) hotizonal ~b) vertical
(c) inclined (d} none of the above
118. The bending moment at the ends of a simply supported 'beam
will be zero.
Yes 0 No 0
119. The ma:timum bending moment of a cantile>·er beam as shown
in Fig. 2·1, lies at
(a) the free end (o) the fixed end
(c} l/4 from free end (d) l/4 from fixed end
(e) middle of its length (f) none of the above
120. The shear force of a cantilever beam as shown in Fig. 2·1, is
(a) zero at the free end and W at the fu:ed end
(b) W at free end and zero at the fixed end
(c) W throughout its length
{d) Wl throughout its length
(e) none of the above
121. Tne shear force of a cantilever beam of length Z carrying a
m:Pformly distributed load of w per unit length is ......... at the free
end.
{a) zero {b) wl/4 (CJ wl/2 (d) wl
122. The shear force of a cantilever beam of length l earrying a
mriformly distributed load of w per unit length is . . . . . . . . . at the :fixed
end.
(a) zero (b) wl/4 (c) wl/2 (d) wl
123. The shear force diagram of a cantilever beam of length Z
and carrying a uniformly distributed load of w per unit length
will be
(~) a right angled triangle (b) an issoscles triangle
(c) . an equilatral triangle (d) a rectangle
(e) none of the above
124. The bending moment of a cantiliever beam of length l a.nd
ca:rryi..ng a uniformly ciistributed load of w per unit length is •........
.at .the free end.
(a) zero (h) wl/4 (c) u.Z./2 (d) wl
 -----------
·;·

· -~e-bendmg moment of a. cantilever beam of length l and

earry:ing a uniformly distributed load of w per unit length is ....•....
at the fixed end.
{a) zero (b) wl/4 (c) wl/2 (d) wZ
120. The maximum bending moment of a cantilever bea.m of length
t and carrying a. uniformly distributed load of w per unit length lies
at the middle of its length.
True 0 False 0
m. The shear force diagram for a cantilever beam of length l
and carrying a. gradually varying load from zero at free end and w
per unit length at the ib:ed end is a. .
(a} horizontal straight line (b) vertical straight line
(c) inclined line (d) parabolic curve
{e) none of the above

128. The bending moment diagra.m for a cantilever beam of length l

and careyfug a. grad:ua.liy varying load from zero at the free end and
w per unit length at the :fixed end is a. parabolic CtL."'Ve.

0 Disagree 0
~. The shear force of a, Cil.ntilever beam of length l aud Cii.ITyiDg
a gradually varying load from zero at the free end and w per unit
length at the fu:ed end is ......... at the fixed end.
(a} zero (b) wlf4 (c) wlf2
(d) wl fe) wl''/2 (f) wl2/6
130. T'ne bending moment of a cantilever beam of length l and
c.arryi..ng a gradually varying load £..'"Om zero a.t free end and w per
unit length at the fixed end is ..•.....•at the fixed end.
{a) zero (b) wl/4 (c) wlf2
(d) wl wl2/2 (f) wl2j6
131. T".!le maximum bending moment of a. simply supported beam
of span Zand carrying a point load W at the centre of beam, is
ta) Wl/4 (b) Wl/2 (c) WZ
{d) WZ~/4 (e) WlR/2 (/J Wl'A
m. 'flle bending moment diagram for a. simply support-ed beam
loaded in its centre is
(a} a right angled triangle {b) an issoscles triangle
{c) an eqmlat<>....ml triangle (d) a rectangle
133. The :maximum bendi'lg moment of a simply supported beam
with centra! point load Hes at the point of loading.
True fJ False 0
 134. Tht> shear force of a simply supported beam careying a central
point loart changes sign a.t its mid point.
Correct 0 Incorrect 0
]35. Th£' shear force in the ct>ntrc of a simply supported beam
l'..a.rrying a. uniformly distributed load of w pPr unit length, is
(a) zero (b) wl/2 {c) wll-/2
(e) wZ2/8
236. The bending moment in the centre of a simply supported
beam carrying a uniformly distributed load of w per unit length
}::;

(a) zero (b) wl/2 (c) wF/2

(d) wl2/4 (e) w'f!J/8
137. The shear force at the ends of a simply :mpported beam
carryirig a. uniformly distributed load of w per unit length is
(a) ZE'ro at its both ends
(b) wl at one end_a.nd-wl at the ot.her end "
(c) wl/2 a.t one end a.nd - wZf2 at the other <·nd
{d) tvl!/2 at one end and-wl2/2 a.t the other <>ncl
(e) nont· of the above

138. The shear force diagram for a. simply supported 'P..eam ca.rrying
a nnifnrmly distribuU!d load of u.• per unit length, consists of
(r.:.) onP right angled triangle (b) two right angled triangles
(G) one equilateral triangle (d) two equilateral t.ris.ng!es
(e) onf' rect-angle (j) two rectangles

139. The bending moment diagram for a simply supported beam

<"arr:dng a uniformly distributed load of w per unit length, will be
(a) a horizontal line (b) a vertical line
(r:) an inclint~d line {d) a parabolic curve
(el an ellipsl' (j) none of the above
140. Th<' sh~ar force at the centre of a simply supported beam with
a gradually varying load from zero at both ends tow per metra at
t lw t·t•nt.re, L'~

(a) wl/4 (b) wl/2 (e) zero

(a) tcZ:/2 (e) w~/4

141. Th£' bending moment at the centre of a simply suppor..ed beam

with. a gradually varying !oa.d from zero at both ends to w per
metre at: the centr-e is wl/4.
Yes 0 No 0
 Strength of Materials 55

i~. The ~aximuin ~t'tl<ling moment for a simply supported beam

w1th a gradually varymg load from zero a.t both ends and w per
metr•· a,t the centre, lies at the centre of a bea.m.
Agree 0 Disagree [J
~43. For the beam shown in Fig. 2·2, the shear forct' a.t B is equal
to
(a) wl/6 (b) wl/3
(c) wl (d) 2wl/3
(e) 2wl
i-M For the beam shown in
Fig 2·2, the shear force at A
is equal to
Fig. 2·:!
(a) wl/6 (b) u:Z/3 (c) wl
(dl 2wlj3 (e) 2 u-l.
-
145. For the beam shown in Fig. •).')~. the shear force diagram
between A and B is
(a\ a horizontal line (b) a vertical line
(c) an inclinetl li1w (d) a parabolic curv(·
{e) an ellipst, (f) none of the above
14fi. The maximum bending moment for the beam shown in Fig. 2·:.!
]S

wl 2 !: ·wl: 4wj2
(a)
125
(b) (cj
-125
125
g wl 2 16 wl2
(d) (e) .. 125-
""1:25
'Hi. The maximum bending moment for the beam shown in Fig. 2·2.
lies at a. distance of.. ....... from the end B.
(a) l/2 (b) l/3
(d) ~/v3 (•; 2l/,j3
148. The point of contrafiexure is a point where
(a) shear force changes sign
(b) bending moment changes sign
(c) shear force is maximum
(d) bending moment is maximum
(e) none of the above
149. When shear force at a. point is zero, then bending moment .is
.....•..• at that point.
(a} zero {b) minimum (c) maximum (d) infinity
 56 Strength oj :JIaterials

150. In a simply supported beam carrying a uniformly distributed

load w per unit length, the point of contrafic>xure
(a) lies in the cen-tre of the beam
(b} lies at the ends of the beam
(c) depends upon the length of beam
{d) doc>s not exist
151. "\-Vhen thC're is a sudden increase or decrease jn shear force'
tliagram between any two points, it indicatt's t11at. there is a
(a) point load at the two points
(b) no loading between the two points
(c) uniformly distribut-ed load between the two points
(d) uniformly varying load between the> two points
(e) none of the above

152. "When the shear foroe diagram between any two points is an
inclined straight line, it indicates that there is a uniformly >arying
load between the two points.
Yes c :No n
153. When the shear force diagrnm is u. parabolic cun·e b<>tween two
points, it. indicates that there is a
(a) point load at the two poinbi
(b) no lor.ding between the two points
(c) uniformly distributed load between thl' two points
(d) uniformly varying load hetwel'n thf' tv;o points
(e) none of the abo>e
154. When there is no increase or decrease in shear fore<> betwern
two points. it indicates that there is no cha.ngr in the bending
moment between these points.
Trut' 0
155. \Yhich of the following ;;tat.enwnt i-< L'IHTect

(a) A continuous beam has only two supports at the Pnds.

(b) A uniformly distributed load ;,prearls wJfonnly over the
whole length of a beam.
/{c) ThP bending moment is maximum wherc shear force is
ma:rimum.
(d) The maximum bending moment of a simply support,ecl
beam of length l with a central point load W is WljS.
{e} At the point of contrafl.e.xurt'. the bending moment is
maximum.
 Strer>.gth of 11ateriaJB 57
f

156. Match the correct answer from Group B for the given st-ate-
ment!nn-Groupi!.

Group A

The shear force at the free

end of n. cantilever beam is
{b) The bending moment at the
fi.wd end of a beam ia
(c) T'ne maximum bending
moment of a simply sup-
ported beam carrying a (DJ zero
uniformlv distributed of u•
per unit icngth is
(E} maximum
(d) The bending moment at thP
centre of a ~imply supported
beam with a gradua.ily
varying ioad from zero at
both ends to w per metr" at
the centre is

157. In a beam wherP shpar force is maximum, tht· b1!ndi:1g moment

will be
(a) zero (b) mmmlllm lc) maximum
(d) infinity (e) non!' oft lw ahov,.

158. The point of contrafiexurc occur,; in

(a) cantilever beam~> (b) ~imply Huppc;rted lwnms
(C) overhanging beams (d) lixcd lwu.rm1
(e) continuous beams (j) all of the ahon·
I5S. The assu:m:otion. genereJlv, made in the theory of simph·
bending is that Q • ,_ •

(a} the beam material is perfectly homogenous and isotropi('

(b} the beam material i~ stres:;ed wit.hjn its daHtic limit
(c) the plane sections before b.:nding remain plan!' a.ftt·r
bending
(d) each layer of the beam is free to ex:pund or coni act,
independentiy, of the lsyPr, above or l.wlow it.
(e) the modulus of elasticity of the beam materia 1 is :-;a lilt' in
tension !!.nd compresaion
(f) all of the above
_(g) none of the above
 StrPngth of .Materiau

160. The bending. momE'n~o at a sE'ction t<>nrls to bend or deflect

---'the·bea.m and the internal stresses resist its bending. The resistance
offert>d by thE' internal stresses, to the bending, is called
{a:) comprt>ssivP stl"E'ss {b) shear stress
(c) b<>nding str<>ss (d·l elastic moduius

161. In a simple bending theory, one of thr assumption is that the

plane sE'ctions before bending remain plane afteT bending. This
as:<umption means that
(a) stress is uniform throughout the beam
{b) strain is uniform throughout the beam
(c) stress is proportional to the distance from the nPutra!
axis
(rl) st.ra.in is proportional tn the distant·r- from the llC'utrai
axis
(e) stre~;; ts prupurtinna! to strain at all section;; of tht•
heam
16'2. A t't•ctangular beam subjected to a bending moment as shown

JiM___· --·
Fig. 2·3
in Fig. 2·3. The upper layer of the beam will be in tension.
TruE' 0 Faist' 0
163. The lower Ia.yer of the beam a1 shown in Fi~. 2-:~. will be
(tl} in te.nsion (b) in compression
(c) neither i11 tension nor i.e compression
164. The layer at the centre• of gravity of the beam as sho,vn in
Fig. 2·3, will be
(a.} in tension (b) in compression
(c) neither in tension nor in compressiou.
165. When a beam is subjected to a bending moment the strain
in a layer is .••...•..... the distance from the neutral axis.
(a) equal to (b) directly propotiona! to
{c) inversely proportional to (d) independent of

166. The bending equation is

!!,=j_ E T I CB
(a) I y -R (b) -:r==;=
T f, (·e j
(c) (d) -'J- =-
r I I
I
I

I
i
!61. 'When a bea.m is subjected ·to bending moment, the stress at
any pomt is. ~~-:::::the d!sta.nce of"the point from the neutral axis.
{G) equal to (b) directly proportional to
{e) invel'Se!y proportional t.<> {d') indept•ndent of
168. 'l"ne line of :inte?sw>.Jon of the neutral layer with s.ny norma!
cross-section of the besm is called neutral a.m.
True 0 False 0
169. The neutral axis does not pass through the centroid of the
'-dymmetrical beam.
Agree 0 Disagre<> 0
lif». The section modulus (Z} is given by
(a) 1/y (ol 1. y (c) yfl (d) ;.Ifl (e) EJI
1'11. The Rection modulus of n. I'C('tangular section about an axi...
through its C.G_., is
(a) b/~ (b) il/2 (c) biJ"l/2 (rl) bd"j6 (ej bd3/12

172. The bending strc~s in a beam is ......... section modulus.

(a) ('qual to (b) less than (c) more !han
(d) directly proportional to (e) inversely proportional to
113. Th" section modulus of a circular sect ion about an axis through
its C.G., is
1cz) dfi. (b) -:cdZ/4 (c) -:cd'l.flt\
(d) -::rfS/16 (e) -::cJS/32 {j) -::d4/64
174. If the section modulus of a beam is increased, the bt·nding
stress in the beam wm
(n) :not ch.a.nge (b) mcrcasc (r) decrease

11.75. For a given stress, the ratio of momt•nt of resistance of a

beam of square cross-section when placed with its two sides
horizontal to thE> moment of resistance witb its diagonal horizontal,
lS

(a) 1/2 {b) l · (c) lfv'2 {e) 2-y'2

176. A square beam and n. circular beam have the same length,
same allowable stress and the same bending moment. The ratio of
weights of the square beam to the circular beam is
(a) l/2 (b) l (c} 1/1-12
(d) lfv'2 (e) lf\1:~

1i7. In a beam of uniform strength, the bending stress developed

.is constant and is equal to thf.' allowable stress at. every section of
t-he beam.
True 0 0
_ __..178._-!_be&m of uniform strength may be obtained by
(a) keeping the width un.ifon:1 and varying the depth
(b) keeping the depth nnifonn and v~.ng the width
(c) vaeying the width and depth.bot.h
{dJ any one ofthe above
(e) none of the above
179. If the depth is kept constant for a beam of uniform strength,
then its width will vary in proportional to
(a) H (b) if .M (c} .MZ (dJ .JF (e) 1/M
(j) none of the above
where M = Bending moment.
188. A beam of uniform strength has
(al same cross.,section throughout the beam
{b) sa.me bending stress at every section
(c) same bending moment at every section
{d) same shear stress at every section
(e) none of the above
181. The bending stress in a. beam is ............. bendi."lg moment.
(a) equal to {b) leas than (c) more than
(d) directly proportional t-o (e) inversely proponional to
182. At the neutra-l a:rls of a beam
(a) the layers are subjected to maximum oending mess
{bj the layers az.--e subjected to mi:o.imum bending stress
(cl the layers are subjected to tension
(d) the layers are subjected to compression
(e) the layers do not undergo any strain
none of the above
183. The neutral axis of a beam is subjected to ........• stress.
(a) zero {b) ma::rimu.m tensile
{c) minimum tensile (d) :ma.:rimum comnreasive
{e) minimum compressive
184. The neutral axis of s transverse section of a beam passes.
through thtl centre of gravity of the sec+..J.on and is
(G) m the V&.--tical pl&ne
(o) in the horizontal plane
(e) in the same p.!a.ne in which the beam bends
(d) . 3t right angle to the pla-n~ in which the beam bends
(e) none .of the a:OOV~"
l
t
 11.~. Onone side of a neutral s.:ris of a beam, there is a tensile
stress and on the otlier-sideo1thebeam-there is a. compressive
stress.
Agree 0 Disagree 0
1~. In a beam subjected to pure bending, the intensity of mess in
any fibre is ......... the distance of the fibre from the neutral ~.
(a) equal to (b) less thsm (e) more than
(d) directly proportional to (e) U:.versely proportional to

1S7. ~e rectan~ar beam •A.' has. length l, width b and depth d.

Another beam 'B' has the same length and width but depth is
double that of 'A'. The elastic strength of beam B 'Will be •••....••
as compared to beam A.
(a) sa.n::.e (b) double (c) fo':!r times
(d) six times (e) eight timt>s

188. The rectangular beam 'A' has length l width b and depth d.
Another beam •B' has the same length and depth but width is
double that of •A.'. The elastic strength of beam 'B' will be ........ .
as compared to beam •A'. -
(a) same (~) double (c) fo'W." tUnes
(d) six times (e) eight times

189. The rectangular bC'am 'A· has length l width b and depth d.
Another beam •B' has width and depth but length is double that
of •A'. The elastic strength of beam •B' will be ........ as compared to
to beam •A '.
(a) same (b) one-haJ'' (c) one-fourth
(d) one·eighth (e) double
190. When. a. rectangular beam is loaded trans\·ersely;the maximum
tensile stress is develop<>d on the
{ai top layer (b) bottom layer
.(c.) neut.ml a:ris (dJ every cross-section
191. When a rect'a.ngular beam is loaded tra.ns.-ersely, the :ma.Dmum
compressive stress is developed on the
(a:) top layer (b) bottom layer
(c) neutral axis (d) every cross-section

192. Wnen a rectangular beam is loaded transversely, the zero stress

is de>eloped on the neutral axis.
True O False D
193. VVhen a rec+uangular beam is loaded longitudinally, the sheBT
force develops on the top layer.
Agree 0 Disagree 0
 - Strength of lflaterials

194. At the neutral axis of a=Beam, the shear stress is

{al zero (b) minimum {c) maximum
(di infi.<1.ity (e) none of the above
195. The maximum sh<'ar stress developed in a beam of rectangular
section is ......... the aYera.ge shear stress.
(a) equal to (bl 4/3 times (c) 1·5 times
(dJ 1·75 times (e) twice
196. The maximum ~hear stress developed in a beam of circular
section is ••••.•... the average shear stress.
{al equal to (b) 4/3 times (c} 1·5 times
(d) l-'i5 times (e) twice
197. \\"hich of the following staternent is wrong ?
(a I In tht' theory of Rimp!e bending, the assumption is that the
plane sections before bending remains plane a ft1'lr bending.
(b) In a beam :<ubjected to bending moment, the strain is
directly proportional to the distance from the neutral axis.
(c) At the neutral a:ds of a beam, the bending stress is
maximum.
(dl The bending stress in a beam is inversely proportional
t.o the section modulus.
(e) A beam is said to be of uniform strength, if the bending
stress at every section is same.
1~. A rectangular beam of length l supported a.t its two ends
carries :1. central point load W. The maximum deflection occurs

(a) at the ends (b) at l/3 frt_;m both ends

{c) at the centre (dj none of the above
199. A simply supported beam ot length l carries a point load W

r a
,
w
-,i=-c-- b
A r----....;;.;:::..---------. S
t
Fig.:i:·4
at a, point (} a.s shown in Fig. 2·4.
The ma::;dmum deflection lies at
{a} point A (b) point B (c) point 0
(d) between points A. and B (e) between points B and 0
200. For a be~m, as shown in Fig. 2·4, the ~um deflection is
Wallb3 .

3lilll
True 0 0
 .Strer.gth of .M aterial.s

201. For a beam as shown .in Fig. 2·4, the Je.flectio.u u t C is

WP --------.-Ira*-·
(a) 48ET' (b) 3Ell

(c)
Wa z· ., ~·0
{ --ao )"'"
-~::-=--:-:
5Wl3
ay3Ell 384 El
where E= Young's modulus for the beam material, und
I= )foment of inertia of the beam sPctiun.
202. For a beam a:,; sho\\-'11 in Fig. 2·4, the maximum defieetiun lie>'
at ....
1
l
(a) :
;)
from B :b) 3' from A

~-
l2-a2 ~
(c)

[2-a:
-- :tromB
3
(if)
~
i2-bZ
from A

(e)
..... from B {jl - ;-
3
from A

203. For a beam, as shown in Fi::. :::!·4, when the load W is a.pplied in
the centre of the beam, the maximum deflection .is
WP 5WP
(a) ,b)
4.'0El :18-!.EJ
Wl3 TflJ
(c) trlJ 384.EI
l92EI
204. A simpiy supported beam of len~rth l is loaded with u
uniformly distributed 1oad of w per unit len,uth. The maximum
.. . 5wl3
deflection 1S
384
El and lies at the centre of the beam.

True 0 False 0
205. The s.imply supported beam 'A· of length l carries a central
point load W. Another beam •B' is loaderl with a uniformly distri-
buted load such that the tot.al load on the beam is W. The ratio of
maximum deflections between beams A. and B is
(a) 5/8 (0) 8/5 (CI 54 (d) 4/5
200. The maximum deflection of a. cantileYer beam of length l with
a point load W at the free end is
WP Wi3 WJ3 WZS
(a) 3EI (b) 8El iCJ l6El (cl) 4:8El
207. The maximum deflection of a cantilever beam of length l with
a uniformly distributed load of w per un.it length is
wza wzs
WP i TZTl}J
'd)'·~
(a) 3El (b) 8El (cl l6El \ 4SEI
where W = wl
 Strength oi Materiala.

. _z.oo..:_In__JLJ_lantil~ver__beam of length l subjected a uniformly

dist..-ributed load of w per unit length, the maximum deflection lies at
the fixed end.
Yes 0 No LJ
209. Two cantiliver beam:; are ~hown in Fig. 2·5. The ratio of

,~[ w/Un•t length

!'YVV'-:'YX)Cl

:±--! ___j
(a) Beam A (b) Beam B
Fig. 2·5
ma.:rimum deflection of beam A to beam B is
(a) 4/7 (b) '6/1 (c) 16;'1'
(d) 32/7 (e) 45/1 (j) 96:7
210. Two ca.ntileYer beams are shown in Fig. 2·6. The ratio of
w \Total load W

b~-,"'9
1
r-- -·--1
ta; Beam A t&} Beam B
Fig. 2·6
maximum deflection of beam A to the beam B i.,<;

~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~~
trll 6/15 {e\ 25/6 (j) 6/'!fi
211. A c:mti!c>t>r beam of length l carries a gradually varying load
from zero at free Pnd and u· per unit iength at the fi.1:ed end. The
maximum deflection lies at
(a) frt>e t>nd (b) fi.1:ed end (c)
(d) l/3 from fixed end {e) l/3 from free end
212. The value of the maximum deflection for a beam given in
question 211 is
wll' wll' w£·!
(a.) (b) (c)
8El 16El 30El
wzq, 5wl4
{d) 48ET (e)
38.4El
213. The maximum deflection of a. fixed beam carrying a central
point load lies at
(a) fixed ends tb) centre of beam
(c) l/3 from the fixed ends (d) none of the above
 214. The ma.::dmum dafiection of _a. ~ed beam of le~_!__ canying
a. central point loa.d W is
wz= WZ3
(a) 4:8ET (o} 96ET
(c) (il}

:US. The maximum deflection of a. fi:tad beam of length l can:y.ing

a. total load W uniformly distributed over the whole length is
w~ '"" ~
(a) '48i.i (b) 961iJI
WP WP.
(c) 192.El \G) :J84ET
216. Two fixed beams arc shown in Fig. 2·7. The ratio of ~um

Total locd .W

}=~
:1 l

(a) Beam A (b) Bee.m B

Fig. 2·7

deiiectron of beam 'A' to ma:rimum de.Bection of beam 113' is

(a) 2 (b' 3 (c) 4 (dl 6 (e) 8
!
!
217. The product of Young's modulus (E) and mo!llent o:f inertia (l)
:is known as

I {a) modulus of rigidity

{c) fiexura.I rigidity
(b)
(d)
bulk m&'duhxs
torsional rigidity
218. A simply 5"-.lpport..ed bea.m 'A' of length l, breadth b and

I det~th d carries a. central Ioa.d W. Another beam •B' of the same

rumen.sions carries a central load equal to 2W. Th., defiection of
beam •.B' wili be ......... as that of beam •.s:.

., (a)
(G)
one-eighth
double
(bl
{e)
one-fourth
four times
{e)
(f)
one.bal!
eight~
l
I 219. A simply supported beam •.A' of length Z, breadth b, 111M
depth a carries a central point load w.
Another beam ~ ·:u· -
1 the same length and depth. but its breadth is doubled.. T'ne defiec-
tion of beam •B' will be~ ........ a.i compared to beam •:&.'.

I (a} one~ighth
(d) double
M:.E.-5
(b) one-fourth
(e) four times
(c) one-half
(fj eight"tim~

I
 Strength of Materials

220. Match the correct form_:z_!~- ~ven in 0-oup B for the beams
given-in.-Gfottp A.

Group A GroupB

w
_J
t (Al
wr
(a) sEI
Wl 3
{B)
30ET
a~
~=~::J
WP
(0)
{b) l92El
, w I

(c) E t?. 4
(D)
wr
3FT
5WP
(E)

~
384El
(d} Wl 3
. l /*'
\~I
48ET
w
wz:;
i __ j
!
tG}
le) 384-..lill

WTJ·
{HJ 96.El

~
. {f)

221. A simply supported baam 'A.' of length l, breadth b and

depth d ~-ries a.. centra.! point load W. .Another brea.m •B' bas
the a&me len~nd breadth but its depth is doubled. The deflection
ofbea.m •B' Will be double as compared to beam •A'.

0 Wrong 0
 ------------------
67

222. Two simply Sllpported beams •A' and ~B'- of !ame breadth and
depth carries a central load Was shown·inFig;-2·8-._ _ c ___ ._

w
w
I
I
!
L 4.
t.
l
r----- 2! -l
(a) Beam A (b) BeamB
..... Fig. 2·8

The defl.ection of beam 'B' will be ..•...... as that of beam 'A!

(al one-eighth (b) one-:fon:.--th (c) one-half
(al double (e) four times (j) eight times

223. Two beams 'A.' and •B' carrying a central point load W :J.l'e
shown in F...g. 2·9.

w
l •• I
!

l
l
l' (a)
.!
---·------1--
:j _ __

EeamA
'

1b) Beam B

l Fig. 2-9

The deflection of beam •A' will be ......... as compared to beam

I 'B'.
\~) (b) une-fourth (c) one-half

I
one-eighth
(d) double· ( e} four times {f) eight times

I 224. The product of the tangential force acting on the sbft and its
distance from th!il a:ris of the shaft (i.e., radius bf shaft) is known as

t ~
(a)
(C)
bending moment
torsional r_,gidity
(b)
(d)
twisting. moment
Jlexural rigidity
I Z!S. When a shaft is subjected to a tw!sti!'..g moment, e"\"'ery cross-

I
seetion of t.he shaft will be under
ta) tensile stress \b) compressive stress
(c) shear stress (d) bending stress
(e) neue cf t~ove.
I
!
j
 ·" -~i.r:o:;~~..,...~~~;;..::~:-"'-.:-:...:....-.-
226.' When a ~iS- ;:aubjeCted to to~~h~ the ~r stress indtroed
in the ah&ft--v&~ · ---- · · --
(a) minimum at the centre to maximum at tlli3 circumference
{b) muimnm at the centre to minimum <'!.t the circumference
,(e) zero-a-t the.centreto ma-ximum at the eircumferenee
(d) maximum a-t the centre to zero at the circumference
_te) none of t.he above

W. The torsional rigidity of e. shaft is expreased- by the torque

... required to produce e. twist of one radian per unit length of s. shaft.
True 0 False 0
Zl8. For e. shaft, the shea: stress at a point is ...•..... the di&tanee
from the axis of the shaft.
(a) equa.l to (b) directly proportional to
(e) inversely proportional to
229. The polar moment of inertia of a. solid circular shaft of diameter
(a) is·
-rcd3 <trel3
{a)
·r6- . (b)
32
r.d' 'f:g·•
(c) (d) -64-
32
a. The polar moment of inertia of a hollow ;:;;heft of out...er ~ia~~
{D) a.nd inner dia.metei· (d) is

(a)
.. (.LfS-d3) (b) r. 'JY ·- <0"
16 \

(c) .!... (D4-d«) (dl ~ (.lr'-d4)

32 64

lSI. Whlch oithe following is the correct torsion equation 1

(a} ~ = _f_ = E (b) T _ f., _ CfJ
1 '!J .R :r--:r -T
M P oe T _ Is _ r
(cl 1f - 7 -= -l- (a) -r· - -J- - lJi
m. The torque transmitted by a solid abaft of diameter {d) is
(a)
- xf,xa!i>
r.
4
(b) ...:.::.. v
16 "'·
l ~-- t]3 .
v'

~e)
r.
32 xf/!Jx,a_:JJ (!if) -..
64, ~ aXI
J Jl

=Maximum st.~.
 233. Two oolid shafts •.4' and •B' are J:IlMe of the ·, a&lbe m~t.terial;
The shaft •.4.' is of 50 mm dia.me"'"..er and shaft 'B' · is of 100 mm.
dia~. ·T.he strength of aha.ft B is .......... as that shaft A. ----of
(a) one-eighth (b} one-fourth {c) one-half
(d) double (e) four times (f) eight times
T fe OfJ -
234. In the torsion equation T = 7 = -z-. the term JfR is
c:tlled
(a) shear modulm~ (b) section modulus
\c) polar modulus '"' idl none of the above
235. The polar modulus for a. solid shaft of di~m:ter (d) is

(e) -·-· d3
32
2:56. The pola.r modulus for a bellow sha.ft cf outer diameter (D) and
inner diamett>r (d) is

(a) ...!... (~-<il'} (b) ~;:_(V-d3;

4
~
{c)
32 (~-dS) (d) ~.....• ·D"-dI
4'

'lSi. The torq".le transmitted by a. holiow sha.ft of outer diameter (V)

and inner di&meter {d) is
~ f ( JYA;;dS \ b} .. • ( V-d3 \
(a} 4- XJ< } ( 16 :<J, ~ }
I
• -:r • f U-ri," ) ~ . ( Da-d' \
J (c) 16 X }s \ D (d) 32 XJ, \ j) )
i
I 2:38. A shaft ~..ng s.t N r.p.m. transmits torque (PJ in kg m.
I The power ~pad m
i 1tNT .,_ · r.N'J' h.
j (a} ~ u..p. (b) 450if P·

2r~T 2~T
\C) -,,"'f:- (tt) ~ h.p.

239. A shaft revolving at w ra.d.jsec transmits torque (P) in Nm..

The power developed is·
(a) T.w wa.t.ts (b) 2-r.Pw wa.t:-..s

(c} {d)
240. Two ~f¥J ....!' s.ud 'B' tranaim.t the aa.me power. The speed of I
shaft •A: is 200 r.p.m. •nd that of shaft 'E is 300 r.p.m. The wit I
•!
•B' h&a the greater diameter. ·l
'!
True 0 Falee 0 i
I
i
l
 70

241. Two shafts. 'A' and' i B• ha.ve ·the: same 'material. The shift '.d.'
is solid .. of diameter 100 mm Tb.e_sba.ft · •B' is· hollow with outer
<liameter 100 mm and inner diameter 50 The torque transmitted mm.
by shaft •B' is ........•as that of shaft 'A'. -
(a) l/6 (b} !/8 "1)4
1ct.l 15/16 ···-·-- .(eJ 15/32

242. The strength of the shaft is judged by the torque tra.nsmitted

b:t the shaft.
Yes 0 No 0
~ ·----~-~ ... ---·~-·····- ... _.~
. - ··--·--·--
243. Two shafts 'A' and •B' are made of same material. The shaft
'A' is solid and has' di11meter D.. T'ne shaft 'B' is hollow with outer
diameter D and inner diameter D/2. The strength of hoHow shaft in
•orsion is ............ as that of solid shaft.
In;) 1/lfi (b) l/8 (c) 1/4
(tll I5/1o (e) 15/3~

244. ·Two shafts 'A' and •B' are made of same matc·rial. Tht·
shaft 'A' is of diameter D and shaft 'B' is of diameter Tr':2. Tlw
stJ·Pn!!th of shaft ·B' is ............ as that of shaft •A '.
(a) one.eighth (b} one-fourth (r.) one-half
(d) four times (e) eight. times

245. The strain energy stored in a solid circular ~;haft subjeetcd to

shr-ar stress ( /:) is

(nl !~ ·< \?olume of shaft. I'}

\o.
f/
'2G \T j"
X •o ume of sh an
..

(c) ·£-:-;Volume of shaft (d) ~~ :--:Volume of shaft

where (.' = ;\lodulus of rigidity for the shaft material.

246. The strain energy stored in a hollow circular shaft of outer

diameter (D) and inner diameter (a) subjected to shear stress ; f,) is

(a) ·;c ( D1-aa,

r~
D } x Volume of shaft

r . D2+iJ2) x Volume of shaft

-·-1 - -- ·
2C \ D . .
2
t 2 ( V-cl \
(c) ~G --rJ J X Volume of shaft

{d) f : ( D2..J...d:
-·- D \
l x Volum.e of shaft
4C \ t j
 24i. In spring balances, the spring is used
(al to apply forces (b) to measure forces
(c) to store strain energy (a) to absorb shocks
(e) ali of the above (j) none of the above
248. In watches, the sp~.ng is used to absorb shocks and vibrations.
Yes D No 0
249. The sp..-ings in cars are used to stQ.re strain energy.

j Correct 0 Incorrect.
250. T"he springs in brakes a.nd clutches are used to
0

l (a\ to apply forces (b) to measure forces

(c) to store strain energy (d) to absorb shocks
I (e) all of the above (f) none of the a.bovt>
251. A spring, when loaded, is permanentiy distorted and recover

I its original shape when the load is removed ..

Agree D Disagree 0

l 252. In a watch. the spring is used to store strain energy. This energy
is rel<>ased
(a) to .stop the watch
[c) to change the time
{b) to run the watch
{d) all of the above
253. A spring used to absorb shocks and vibrations ia
(a) closely-coiled helical spring (b) open-coiled helical spring
(c) conical sprwg (d) torsion spring
(e) leaf spring {f) disc spring
254. The load reQuired to produce a. unit deflection in a spring is
called -
(a) flexu:ra.I rigidity (b) torsional rigidity
(c) spring stiffil.ess (d) Young's modulus
(e) none of the above
255. In leaf springs, the :maximum bending stress developed in the
j plat-as is
2Wl
! (a) (b) (c)
n/)t:J
(d)
I
I
I W = Load acting on the spring,
!: l = Span_ofthe spring,
n =Number ofpls.tes,
b = Width of pls.tea, a.nd
t = Thickness of pls.tea.
 72 Btrengfh of Materials

256. In a leaf spring, the deflection at the centl:'e is

Tfl3 wzs 3Wfl
(ti!) SID~ (b) 41il7il)i3 . (c)

W1S
(d) zlilnbt3 (e) none of the above

257. When.. a closely-coiled helical spring is subjected to an ax:ia.l

load, it is said to be under
(a)" bending (b) shear {e) torsion
(tl) cmehing (e) none of the above

258. When a closely-coiled helical spring of me&D diameter (.D) is

subjected .to an ami los.d (W), the defiection of the BpriDg (()} i"l given
by i
l
2WJ)3n i
{a) {b) (j(i4- (c) J
j
16WUn !

{e)
Oct/"
where d = Diameter of spring wire,
n = No. of :turruf of the spring, and
0 = Moduiill!l of rigidity for the spring material.
259. When a closely-coiled helical spring of~ diameter (D) is
subjected to &D a:ri&l load (W), the stiffueas of the spring is given by

(a)
OU."'
~ (6} 2Un
oaf.
(c)
oa4
3lJ3n II
(d) (e) l

26@. Two closely-coiled helice.l springs 'A' and •13' of the same
material, same nmnber of turns and made from same 'WL.-a are subjec-
ted to aR ax:iaJ. loe.d W. The m.sa.n diameter of spr.mg •A' is double
I
I
I'!I
the mean diameter of spr~ •B'. The mtio of defteetiona in spri:og
'B' to spri:ng •A' will be j
(a) 1/16 (b) 1/8 (c) l/4 !
(d) 2
261. In the a.bove question, the r&tio
(e) 4 (f) 8·
I
spring •A' will be
(a)
(d)
1/16
2
(b) 1/8
{e) 4
II
n

I~
 Strength of lifaterial8 .. 78

· 262. The closely ooiled helical springs •A' and 'B' are eqnalin all
resDects but the nUm.ber of turns of spring •A' :is half thst of -sprln~------ -··
'B'~ The ratio of defie<r..ions in spring •A' to spring •B' is
{a) l/8 {b) 1/4 {c) l/2
{a) 2 (e) 4 !/} g
263. The stiffness of a. closely-coiled helical spnng is ..•..•proportiona.l
to number of turns.
(a) directly (b) inversely
264. Two closely coiled helical springs 'A' ..._a.nd ~B' are equal in all
respects hut the diameter of wire of spring 'A' is doUble that of
spring •B'. The stiffness of spring •B' will be .........tha.t of spring
'A'.
(a) one-!!i:::teenth (b) one-eighth (c) one-fourth
(d) one-half (e) double (j) four times
265. Two closely-coiled helical springs 'A' and •]3' are equal in all
respects but the r.umber of tnrn.s of spring '_4.' is double tha.t of spri,ng
•B'. The stiffness of' spring •A' will be .........that of spring •JJ'.
(a) one-sixteenth (b) one-eigh:;h (c) ODe-four..h
(d) one-half (e) double Ui fom times
266. A closely-coiled heiical spring is cut into two halves. T'ne
stiffness of the resulting spring will be
(a) same (b) double (c) half
(d) one-fourth (e) none of t.he above-
267. A composite shaft consisting of two stepped portiqns having
spring constants k1 and ~ is held between two ri;;id supports at the
ends. It-s equivalent !;pring constant is
kt+~ kt+k~
(<7-.l ~ (b) klk; (c)

268. If the composite shaft in the above question is fixed at one end
a.nd the other end is subjected to a torque, then its equivalent spring
constant is
i.
(u) (b) (c)
.l
(e)

269. A closely-coiled helical spring of stiffness k is cut into (n; eyual

parts. The stiffness iil ea.c.b. .part of the spring will be
(a) k..jn (b) nvlc (c) nlc
(d) n~ {e/ len&
 74

279. In a. leaf spring, the length of

all Je~ves is equal.
True - ---0----:FS.lae-----
D
271. The rivets are made from ductile material.
Yes 0 No 0
2'12. For rh-etina. the size of hole ili-illed in plates is ............shank
diameter of rh·et~-
(a) equal to (b) less than {c) greater than
273. For a 2Q. mm hole drilled. in plates, the diametell' of rivet shank
should b~
{a) 23 mm (b) 26 mm (c) 24·5 mm
(d) :'!5 mm (e) none of the above
274. .:\ccordin<; to Unwin's fonzrcla., the relation between diameter
of rivet hole (d) and thickness of plate (t) is given by
(a) d = t (b}_ d = l'~h/T (c) d = 2t
(e-) n?ne of the above
where d and t arc in mm.
275. The riYets are used for ........... fasteni..tlgs.
(a) permanent (b) temporary

276. When one plate overlaps the other and the two plates arc
riveted together with two rows of rivets, the joint is'known as
(a~ single riveted lap joint.
(bl double riveted lap joint.
(c) double riveted single cover butt joint
(d) double ri'\""eted double cover butt joint

277. When two main plates are kept in alignment butting each other
and riveted with cover plate on both sides of the main plates with
two rows of rivets in ea.ch main plat<., the joint :is known as ..•.........
i!oubie cover butt joint.
(a) single riveted (b) double riveted
27&. In a. riveterl joint, when the rivets in the various r-ows are
opposite to each other, the joint is said to be
(a) chain riveted (b) zig-zag riveted
(c) diamond riveted (d) none of the above
279. In a- riveted joint, when the rivets in the adjacent rows are
s""...aggered in such a way that every rivet is in the middle of the two
rivets of the opposite row, the joint is said to be diamond ri:veted.
Yes 0 No 0
Strength of l1:laterials 75

200. In a riveted joint, when the number of rivets decreases from

t-he inner most row to outer most row, the joint is said to be
(a) chain riveted (b) zig zag riveted
(c) diamond riveted (d) none of the above

281. The centra to centre distance. between two consecutive rivets

in a. :row, is cslled
(a} margin (b) pitch
(c) back pitch (d) diagonal pitch "'
282. The distance between the centre of a rivet hole to the nearest
edge of plate, is called
(al margin {b} pitch
(c) hack pitch diagonal pitch
283. The distance between the centres of rivets in adjacent rows of
zig-zag riveted joint, is csiled back pitch.
True 0 Fa.:ise 0
284. The perpendicular distance between the centre lines of the
successive rows. is called pitch.
_-\gree O Disagree 0
285. Rivets are genemlly specified by
{a} thickness of plates to be joined (b} overall length
(c) shank diameter (d) diameter of head
286. A riveted joint may fa.il by
(a) t€&'ing of the plate a.t an edge
(b) tearing· of the plate a.croo.s a. row ~f rivets
(c) shearing of ri>ets
(d) crushing of rivets
{ej any one oithe above
28i. In order to avoid tea.rings off the plate at a.n edge, the distance
from the centre of the rivet hole to the nearest edge of the plate
(i.e. margin) should be
(a) d {b) l·5d (c} 2d (d) 2·5d
where ·d = D.ia.meter of rivet hole in mm.
288. The pull required to tear off the plate per pitch length is
(t.z.) (p-2d} txfc (b) {p-d.) txfs
(c) (p-d.) txft (d) \2P-d) txft
where p = Pitch of rivets,
-t = Thickness of plates, and
f,, f:, fe = Pe:.=mli;sible tensile, shearing and
stresses respectively.
76

m. The pull required to shear oft' a rivet, in double shear, per pitch
length is

(a)
'It
xd~x!t (0)
... xd 2 xje
-:.~
'"""-:~: ';!:

(c) ; xdsxJ, (d'J •• d""'X f s

;r><

290. The pall required tv crush tha rivet per pitch length is
(a) ]J.t.J; "" (bJ d.t.Je

291. The ~ngth of a. riveted joint is equal to the

(a) pull required to ~r off th~ -~ per pitch length (Pt)
(b) pnll reqci!'ed to she&r off the rivet per pitch length (Pz~
(cl p;:ill required to c~ the rivet per pitch length (P,)
(d) maximum value of Pt;P., or Po
(el minimum value of Ptt·Ps., l)l" P0 •
292. Th: strength of the un-riveted or solid pla.te per pitch iength is
{a) d.t.Jc (b) p.t.f, (c) {p-d) t.f,

(d)

293. The effi~iency of a. riveted joint i.e the ratio of the strength of
the joint to the strength of the solid plate.
0 False
294 In calcula.ting the strength of a riveted joint in tearing, shearing
0
I
I
a.nd crushing, the
(a) actual dis,meter of is ~
~b; a.ctual diameter of hole d.....med for rivet is used
{c) mean diameter of hole drilled a.nd rivet is used
{d} sma.ller of the rivet die. meter a.nd hole di&meter is used

295. T'!'&nsve:rse fillet wel.ds are design~d for

(a) tensile strength (b} comprelmive strength
(c) shear strength (d) bending strength !

296.
(e) none of the above

Parallel fillet welds are designed for bendi.ng

Agree 0 Disagree
~w-engi·h. I
o I
r
 'W!. The te:n.mle Fitrength of the welded joint for double fillet is
{a) U./J2 tb) tJ.f, (c) .f 2 t.l.ft {a) 2 eJ.j,
where t =- Thickness of the plate or size of tile weld,
l = Length of weld, and
/t = Allowable tensile stress for weld metal.,
~. She&r strength ofthe welded joint forp&r&llel double fi1let is
(a) t.l.f,/2 (b) t.l.Ja (c) .f 2 t.l.J, (ci) 2 &.Z.fs
where fs = Allowable shear stl."ea! for weld metal. ....,
299. Which of the following statement is cor:rect ¥
(a). 'I'he .size of hole drilled in riveting p!a.tes is leas tha.n the
w:aal size of rivet.
(b} A riveted joint made in overl&pping plates is called butt
joint.
(c) The cemre to centre distance between two oon.secmtive
riveta in a. row is called margin.
1d) Rivets are generally specified by f'..a shank di&meter.
~ .;;) Tearing of plates ca.n be avoided by ~ the pitch of
rivets equal to 1·5 times the diameter of rivet hole.
(.{) Parallel fillet welds are designed fo3." te:r.sile strength.
300. A pressure vessel is a&id i.o be a thin shall when it is made of
thin sheets.
Agree 0 Disa.gree 0
3@1. A pressme vessel is said to be a thick shell, when
(a) it is made of thick sheets
(b) the interna.l presaUl'e is very high
(c) the mtio of wall thickness of the vessel to its diameter is
less than 1/16. '
{d) the ratio of wa.H thickness of the vessel to its diameter i&
,.,..,..=·"' .,,,.,. than l/10.
(e) none of the above
302. A pressure vessel is said to be a. thin shell when the ratio of
ws.ll thickness. of the vessel to its diameter is ............ 1/10.
(a) equal to {b; less tha.n (c) greater than
~3. A thick preB<~ure vessel is always used for the genera.Hon of
ateam, as it can withstand high pressmes.
True 0 False 0
3f'A. ;If the diameter of pressure vessel is 15 times t.h(' w:J.U t.hickm·ss,
tbe vessel is said to be a thick shell.
0 []
'78

305. A thin cylindrical shell of diameter (d). Iengtli (Z} ana . tmclme.ss
(t) is subjected to an internal pressure (pj. The hoop st..~ in the
shell is
{al pil/C (b) pdf?.£ (c) p.Z/4: (G) prl/61
~. A thin cylindrical .shell of die.meta:r (ell, length (f) and thickness
(t) is subjeeted an internal prsssure (pl. The longitudinal stress in
the shell is
(o) pdl/6t
(ell none of the a.bovA '"'
'Jfft. In a. thin cylindrical shell, the mtio of longitudinal :>t~ to
the hoop stress is
(a) 1/2 (o) . 3j4 (c) 1 (ti) 1·5
~. The design of thin cylindrical shells is baaed on
(a) hoop ~ (b) Jongitudiri.al stress
(~} aritheina.tie mean of the hoop and me longitudinal stress
(d) geomet..."i<l mean of the hoop and
longitudinal stress
~. The hoop stress in a t!.i.m eylindri<lSJ shell is
(a) longitudlnal ~ (b) compressive stress
(c} radial stl'eoo {d) ci:rot!mferential tensile ~

31®. A thin cylindrical ah;;;ll of diamete;: (ti), length (lf and tihi~s
m. is subjected to an mt-el'.ll.S.l ~e (pj. The circumferential or
hoop S'i;ram is

(a) ~~ ( 1- ~) ....E._{ 1-_!__I

4t.E \ 2~ i
prl,(l 1\ prJ, fl l\
(a} W1l T~m} 4t.E\2-m}
where . 1/m = Poisson's mtio.
311: A thin cylindrical shell o! diameter (rl,.), length (t) and tlll~Imess
{t) is subjected to an internsJ pressurs {p). The longitudinal strs.m
is

(a)
• (
.1!!!...
2iJJl \-
i --=- i
1 '
~~
(b) ~E ( 1--k)
pa ( a) 11<t ( 1 _h \
4&JiJ \ r- m J
(c) l l )
2t.E\T--m ( .
312. When a. thiil cyiindrica.l shell is subjected to an intel."llal p:.-=e·
ssure, the volumetric strnin is
(a) "2e1 -~ (b) 2e1 -!-e:~
where e1 = Hoop s~. and
~ = Longitudinal strom.
 Strength of M ateriala 79
313. A thin cylindrical shell of dia.meter (d), length (l) and thickness
(t) is subjected to an internal pressure (p). The ratio of longitudinal
stram to hoop strain is
m-2 2m-1 m-2
ia) (b) (c)
2m l m-2 2m t-1
2m+l m·+2 2m+2
(d)
m-2
(e)
2m+:!
(/) m+2
314. When a. thin cylindrical shell is subjected to an internal
pressure, there will be '"'
(a} a decree.se in diameter and Iengtl::. of the shell
(b) an increase in diameter and decrease in length of the
shell ~
(c) a. decrease in diameter and increase in length of the shell
(d) a.n increase in diameter ll.nd length of the shell
{e) none of the above
315. The hoop stress in a. riveted cylindrice.l shell of diameter (d),
thickness (t) and subjected to an internal pressure \P) is
pd pd pd pdt
(a) t;j" (b) :.!tr, (c) 4t'1) 2r)"
where ·r, = Efficiency of the riveted joint.
316. The longitudinal stress in a riveted cylindrical shell of diameter
{dl, thickness (ll and subjected to an mternal pressure (pJ is

(a.) (0\ (c)

(d) none of the above.

317. A thin spheri.ca.l shell of diameter (d) and thickness (t) is

subjected to an internal pressure tPi· The stress in the shell
material is
pd pd
{a) (b)
t 2f
pt
(d) 2d
(e\

318. A thin spherical shell of diameter (d) and thickness (t) is sub-
jected to an internal pressure (p). The volumetric strain is

~)
I
J'!:._ ( pd (
I
l
(a)
4tE
1- \b) 2tE 1--ml )
i
2..)
I

••
1 (e) 3pd ( 1- (d) pd ( 1- .2:_)
4tE m 7J!J m

I
 319 A thin cylindrical shell of diameter -(d) -and tb.ici:nesa ~),_.is...__·_··
wbjeoted-to an internal pressure (p). The volmnetrio strain is

(a) :: ( 2- !) (b) : ; ( 3- !)
(c) .2!..(4-
3tE
!...)
m
(a) ~(5-~)
320. A thin cylindrical shell of !llimeter (d) and thickness (t) is
subjected to an internal pre&rare (p). The ratio Qf longitudinal
stram. to volnmet.ric stmin is "'
m-1 .2m-l m-.2
{a} (b) (c)
.2m-l m-l :lm-4

(d)
3m-4
m-2
(e)
m-2
5m-4
(f)
--.2m-l
5m-4
321. The thickness of a .thm, cylindrical shell with he~herical
ends is..•...••••..ths.t of spherical ends.
(a) equeJ to (O) more than (c) less ths.n
322. The hoop stress in a thick cylindrical shell is l!lBJimum st the
inner radillS.
0 False 0
323. Lame's theory is associated with
(a} t]Jin cylindrical shells
(b) thick cylindrical shells
(c) direct and bending stresses
(d) none of the above

324. If the magnitude of direct stress and bending stress is equaL

then there will be ze.."' S"'..ress at one of the extreme ends of a.
column.
Agree 0 0
325. For no tensicn condition in the ba86 of a short <.:oh.!m.n of eircuk!"'
section, the line of action of the load <'hould be within e ci.rclt of
diameter equal to ............of the main circle.
(a} one-half (bj one-tilirrl
(oi one-fourth (d, one-~hth
325. Limit of eccentricity is based for no tenaion Ct>P.ditior•.
Trut' 0 Fa1st: 0
327. The- loa.d at which the column just buc·kl~s, is kncw-'1 r,:;
(a) buckling load (h) critit•al loa.d (c) crippling l(>ad
(JJ any one of the above (e) nooe of tbe above
, .. .· .,;·~,r :::{:~:;~~~,.:··· ..
·- · &re'Agti of J!l.~ 81

328. For loog columns, the value of bucklil;tg load is ......... crushing ,
lo&d.
(a) equal to (b) less than (r} more than
329. Compression members always tend to buckle in the direction of
the
axis of load
(a}
(b) perpendicular to the a:ris of lead
(c) minimum cross section
(d} least ra.dius of gyration
(e) none of the above
330. The direct stress induced in a. long column is .....•..• a:: compared
to bending stress.
(a) same (bl more (c) less
{d) negligible (e) none of thr: above
~1. A column that fails due to dil'eet stress, is called
(a) short column (b) long column (c) weak column
cd} medium column (e) none of the above

332. The assumption made in Euler's column theory is that

{a) the failure of column occurs due to buckling alone
(b) the length of column is very hn·ge as compared to its
cross-sectional dimensions
(c) the column material ob~ys Hooke's htw
{d) the shortening of column dut• to direct compression is
neglected
(e) a.ll,of the above
(f) none of the above
m. According to Euler's <:>oiumn theory, tht- <:>rippling load for a
column length tl) hinged at both ends, is
"F.'tl!J[. -:: 2El
(a) -l»- (b)

(c}

334. According to Euler's column theory, the crippling load for a

columnoflength tl) fixed a.t both end!' is ......... the cripplin)! load for
a. similar column hinged at both !•nd!'l.
{a.) equal to (b; two tim<'s
{c) fotl!' times~ (tiJ t·ight time>'
6-M. E.
82 Strength of M ateriak

. 335. According to Euler's column theory, the crippling load for- a··-· -
column of length (l) with one end fued and the other end free
is ......•.. the crippJirg load for a similar colurr.n hinged at both the
ends. -
(a) equal to (b) less than (r; mere than

336. Accordintr to Euler's column thecrv. the cri~di.r:e- load for a

column Of length (l) Wlth One end .fixed • and 1:he Oth('i"-end hinged,
is
:-:Z£] -::2EJ .._ 4-::!!EJ
(al - '"
(•
(b) 4l_2
·c)
l2
6-::2£]
(d) z~
(e) :r:.one of the ;•bovc

337. According to Euler's co:umn tl::.ecry. the cr:_Fp;i.ng load of s

column is giwn bv P = -r:2El !Cl2. In tLis ec.uatwn. thf value of C
for a column with both ends hin~ed, :is -
(a) l/4 (b) ~ c; l

338. In the Euler's formula. the v:;lue c.f C fer ;:. cdmrm \riih cne
end fi..xed and tl:e other end b:r:.f"•:d. is l/5::..
True False
339. In the Ewer's formula. the Yaiue of c fe-r a cc;lunm with ooth
ends fixed is 4.
-~gree D!sagr!:e
340. In the Euler's formula, the ""nlue d C f, r a ·~dumn wirh •-ne
end fixed and the other end free, :s
(a) l/4 (b) 1!~ I C)
(e) nont: of the above
341. .A column cf length (/) with both encs- f:s:,·d muy be consid(;rl'd
as equivalent t-o a column oflength ......... wi; h bo~h e.nO.s
(a) Z/8 lbl l/4 'n ie) :?.l
342. A. column of lengt-h (l) with tc.tl:. :::nds fixed ~a.y h ronsidtred
as equivalent to a column of ic-ngth. . ..... with one .:nd nxe>d and the
other end free.
(a) lf8 (0) l/4 (c· 11;; (d; ,e) 2l
343. The equivalt·nt length, of a d'l-·en column with given end
conditions, is the length of an ec:ui>:aient column of the- ~ame mate-
rial and cross-section with hi11ged ends. and hav.ing the value of
crippling load equal to that of the £riVf·n ~olumn.
True C Faise 0
j Btreng:A of .MateriaLB 83
I
~ 34!4. The buckling load for a. given column depends upon
(a) area. of cross-section of the column
(b) length of the column
(c) lea5t radius of gyration
(dl modulus of elasticity for th•• material of the column
(e) all of the above
(j) none of the above
~- The values of equivalent length (Ll and actual length (l) of a
eo!umn for both ends hinged is the same.
Yes D No 0
346. Th.e relation between equiva.ient !tmgth (L} and actual length (l)
of a column for both ends fixed is
(a) L = ~/2 (bl L = lj..,/2 (c) L = l
{d1 L - 2l (e) L = .;t

347. The relation between equivalent length (L: and a.ctua.llength

·.t (') of a column for one end ii:ted and the other end :tinged is
(a.l L = Z/2 (b) L = l (r.) L = l
(d) L = 4l (e) none of the above
348. The value of eauivalent length. is taken to be half of the actual
length of a. colum..11 with one end fixed and the other end free.
A,.~ LJ Disagree 0
34.9. A vertical column ha.~ tw.J momenta of inertia (i.e. lr:r and 111 ,).
The column will tend to buckle in the cijrection of the
(a) axis ofload
(b) peEpendicnla.r to the axis of load
(c) ~mum moment of inertia.
{d) minimum moment of i.."le.rtia.
(e) none of the above

i
350. The slenderness ratio is the ratio of
l (a) area of column to least radius of gyration
r (b) length of oolumn to least radius of gyration
('c) leas.t radius of g-_rration to area. of column

l (a) Ies.st radius of gyration to length of column

(e) none of the above

351. The columns whose slenderness ratio is less than 80, are known

!
1
l
(a} short columns
(c) weak columns
(b)
(dJ
long columns
medium column"
.f
 352. In order to know whether ~~ column is long or i!hort, ie mUst
know its slenclernesA ratio.
True 0 Fa.lse 0
353. A· column with maximum eq uiva.lent length has
(a) both Pnds hinged
{ti) both ('nrls !!xed
{c) one end :fixed a.nd the other end hlnged
(d) one end fixed and the other end frea
(e) none of the above
35!. Euler's formula holds good only for
(a} short eolumns (b) lcug columns
{c) both short and long columns (di weak rolum!!s
(e) medium columns
355. A eoiumn is said to be a short roiumn, when
{a) its length is very sma.ll
{bl its cross.sectiona.l area. is sme.ll
~c) the ratio ofits length to the least rsdius of gyretion iii less
tha.n 80.
(d) the ratio of its length to the least radius of gyration is more
than 80.
{e) nont> of till' above
356. If the siendern~s ratio for a column is 100, then it is said to he
a. ••••••••.•.• colun1n.
(b) medium
35'i. The Rankine's formula fm:- t-oiumns is

A = Crosa~n&l ares of the coln>m1,

a = &nkine's coristant, ·
L = Equivalent 1ength oi the column, and
k = Least r&dius of gyration.
358. Tht• Rankine's constl&m for a. mild st.et•i eo!umn with both ends
hul~l'(l i-.

(a1 1/750 (b) 1]1600 (r,j lf'i5()l)

 Strength of MateriaLs

359. ThP Rankine's formula holds good tor

{rz\ short columug 1h. long columns
{c) botll short and long columns (d) wt•ai .. eulumn,.;
(e} medium columns

360. In ca.s1~ of eecenrrica.lly load e.! ,;t rut;:. .. ...... i-< prefert•d
(a) solid ~wction th) hollow =-t·ction
(c) composite section 'rli r,·inforced ~Pction
(e) any one of the ·~h<nre
361. A masonary rla.m may fail due t.o
;a 1 tension in the ma50nary of the dam and its base
;b) ov~rturning of the dam
(c) sliding of the dam
(d) crushin!{ of masona.ry at the base of thl' da.m
(e) any one of the abovE'
362. In order to avoid ·sliding of rna.sona.ry dam. the force of friction
between the dam and soil should bt• at. lt>ast ............ the total water
p~esstu"'e per metre length.
(a) equal to (bi 1·5 times (cl rlouble
(d) 2·5 times (e) four times
363. In order to prevent crushing of ma...qouary a.t the base of th.,
dam, the ma:rimum stress should be ............ the p~rmissible stress of
the soil. ·
(a) equal to (b) less than (c) more than
~. The Pwr.nkine's theory for active earth pre;;sure i:! ba:>cd on t.hc
assumption that.
('-'} the r.~t:.~.in:~d ma.tc~ri~l is hornogen!ou;; and cohesionle~s
(b) the frictional resistance between the retaining wall ;Lnu thu
retained material is neglt>cted
(c) the failure of the rataineri material takes place along a.
plane called rupture plane ·
(d) all of the above
(e) none of the above
j
j ~. When the rete.ined materia.i is subje<:ted to some ,;uperirnposed
1
or surcharged loa.d, the total horizontal pressure clue to surcharged
1 load is
l•
!-sin rp l +sin cp
l.a) .., X (b) ·n X

ll
c l+sin p " 1-sin ¢
1-cos rp l +cos ¢
(c) 11 X (d) p X
l+cos <P 1-cos </>
where p = Inten<~ity of the super<;harged load.
 86 Strength of M ateriakl

366. 'The horizontal thrust offered by the retaining wail on thE' retai-
ned material is
wh2 ( l -c- s~ 6 ) wh 2 I 1 - sin <P 1
t,C.;
(a)
2 1- sm ¢> 2 \ l+sin ¢)
wh: ( 1-c.cos <f:) (d)
whll ( 1- cos <P \
:c)
2 . !-cos <P 2 l +cos <?}
where w = Specific weight of the retained material,
h = Height of retaining wall, and
6 = Angle of repose of the retained earth.

367. A reinforced cement concrete beam is considered to be made of

(a) homogeneous materia.! tb) hetrogeneous material
(c) composite material {dl isotropic material
~68. The steel bars in a. reinforced·l!ement concrete beam are embed-
ded ............ of the beam.
(a) in the centre (b) near the bottom
(c) near t-he top {d) at any position

369. The assumption made in the theory of the reil<forced cement

concrete beam is "that
(a) all the tensile stresses are taken up by the stee1 reinforce-
ment only
);j ~~ere )sa. sufficient bond between steel and concrete
(c) the steel and concrete are stressed within its elastic limit
(d) the Yo1mg's modulus for steel a.nd concrete are consta1.t
(e) all of the above
(/) none of the a.bove
370. The critical neut.ra.l axis of a. reinforced cement concret-e beam
.i8 based on the principle that the neutral axis is situated at the centre
of gra.vity of a given s~ction.
T:rne O False 0
371. The actual netura.I axis of a reinforced cement concrete beam is
based on the principle that the moment of areas of compression and
tension zones at the neutral axis are equaL
0 Disagree 0
372. In case of an under-reinforced beam, the depth of actual neut.."al
am is ...•...•.•••that of the critical neutral axis.
(aj same as {b) less than {c) greater than
I . Slreir.gth of M aterial8 . · . .
87
l __ _:____!!~. The moment of resistance of a. reinforced section is
I

~·I
(a) bnfc
2
(!!...-a)
3
(b) bnf~ ( d-
2 \
n. l
3}
(c) bnfe (U-n) (d) b~1e (n.-3d)
2
where b = Width of beam.
rJ = Effective depth of beam,
b = Depth of nentra.i axis from top of the beam, and
fe = Allowable stress in concrete.
3i4. In case of an over-reinforced beam, the depth of actual neutral
axis is the same as that of the critical nentra.l a.m.
True 0 0
3i5. The moment of resistance of a. balanced reinforced concrete
beam is based on the stresses in
(al steel only 1b) concrete only
(c) st-eel and concrete both (d) none of the above
316. In a stress-strain diagram D
for mild steel, as shown in
Fig. !HO, the point A repre-
sents •
I
I

(a) elastic limit

{b) upper yield point Stress :
I I
(cl lower yield point
(d) breaking point
317. In Fig. 2·10, the point C
iI
represent-a
(a) elastic limit - Strcin---==-

l (b) upper yield point

(c) lower y:ield point (rli
Fig· !!·!0
breaking pcmt

I 378.. In Fig. 2·10, the point B represents upper yield pcil:t.

Right 0 Wrong 0
3i9. In Fig. 2·10, the point lB represents the maximum stress.
True 0 False 0
_i 380. In Fig. 2·10, the streSs corresponding to point Dis
{a) yield point stress (b) breaking stress
(c) ultimate stress (d) elastic limit
381. In Fig. ~·10, stress is proportional to strain, for the portion
(a) from 0 to ..4. {b} from A to C (c) from ..4. to D
 00.
00

:382. In Fig. 2·10, Hook's law holds good, for the. porhlon from 0 tO d.
-------
Agree 0 Disagree U
383. In Fig. 2·10, the plastic ra:y.ge occurs
(a) before point A (b) beyond point A
(c) between points A antl D (d) between points J) and E
(e) beyond pointE
384, In a tensile test, when t.he mat-erial is stressed beyond elastic
limit, the tensile strain ............ as compared 'to the stress.
(a) decreases slowly (b) increases s]owly
(b) decreases more quickly (d) increases more quickly
385. The stress at which the extension of the mater-al takes nla.ce
more quickly as compared to the increase in load, is called -
(a) elastic limit. ;b) yield point
(c) ultimate point 1d) breaking point

.
386. The breaking stress i;: ............ the ultimate stress.
""
(a) equal to ib) less than (c) greater than
387. The stress developed in the material without any permanent set
is called
(a) elastic- limit (b) yield stress (c) ultimate stresf'
(d) breaking stress (dj none of the above
383. Wheu a material is loaded within elastic limit, the material
will regain its shape and sizt> when the load is removed.
_'igret· O Disagree u
389. The ratio of the largest load in a test to the original cross-sec-
tional area of t.he test piece is called
1a) elastic limit (b) yield str-ess
(c) ultimate stress (d) brea..king stress
390. The t<>nsile test. is carried on ...••....... materials.
(a) ductile (b) brittle (c) malleable (d) plastic
391. The compression test is carried on ............ materials.
(a) ductile (b) brittle (c) malleable (d) plastic
392 The tensile strengt-h of ductile materials :is •••• ~ •••• its compressive
strength.
(a) equal to (b) Jess than lc) greater than
 393. The compressive strength of brittle materials is ........ . .its tensil<>
strength.
t a) equal to (b} less than (c) g:r<>at<>r than

394. A tensile test is ~'":formed on a mild steel round bar. h-.:

diamet-er after fracture wm
(a) remain same (b) increase
(c) dec:t'ease {a) depend upon rat-e of loading
395 A tensile ""test in performed on a round bar. After fracture it
has been found tha.~ .the diameter remains appro:rima:tely same at
f:rat!ture. The m.atena1 under test was
(a) mild Steel (01 es,st iron {c) glass
396. If percentage reduction in area of a certain specimen made of
material.' A' under tpm::ile test is 60 % and the percentage :reduction
in area of a specimen with ss.me dimensioDE made of material •.B' is
40%, then
Ia) the material A :is more ductile than material B
ibl the material B is more ductile than material _4
(c) 'the ductility of material A and B is equal
:.dl the material A is brittle and materiaJ B is ductile
397. The percentage reductio:n in a.rea of cs.st iron is
(a) 0 % (b) 10 % (c) 15% (d) 20 %
398. If percentage elongation of a certain specimen made of a
material 'A' under tensile test is 30 % and the percentage elongation
of a. specimen with same dimensions made of another materia.! 'B'
is 40 %, then material •JJ' is more ductile than material 'A'.
Right 0 Wrong U
399. In a stress-strain diagram as shown in !i':ig. 2·il, the curve A
represent-s
(a) mild steel
(b) soft brass
{c) glass
Stress
(d) cold rolled steel
(e) low ca.rbon st...eel
(/} none of the sbove I
1100. InFig. 2·11, ........... .
represents glass
{a) cmve A
{b} ct!l'Ve .B --Strain----
(C) Ctil"Ve (J Fig. Nl
{a) cm:ve D (e) mL-ve E
 401!.. In Fig. 2·11, curve C, represents soft brasa.
True [] Fa~e 0
402. In Fig. .2·11, cu...-ve D represeats
(a) mild steel (b) soft brass (c) glass
(d) low carbon steel (e) none of the above

403. In Fig. .2·11, curve E represents mild lrteeL

Yes 0 Nc 0
404. The ductility of s material ...•••..... :with the increase in percen-
tage reduction in area. of a specimen under tensile test:
(a) increases (b) decreases (c) remains same
4@5. The ductility of the material.. •••....... with the decre<!88 in per-
centage elongation of a. specimen under tensile test.
(a) incre~ (b) decreases (cJ remains sam<>

466. Factor of safety is defined as the ratio of

(a) ultimate st~ to working mesa
(O}• working stress to ultimate mess
(c) breaking stress to ultimate stress
(d) ultimate stress to breaking~
(e) noneo of the a.bave

m. '!'he factor of safety is always mo!'a than unity.

Coftect 0 IncOHeet 0
-tOO. In compression test, the fracture in cast iron specimen would
ocoor aloog
(a) the axis of le&d (b) . an oblique plane
(e) at right angles to the <pris o~ specimen ;

(4) would not occm' (p) none of the above

4@9. Imp&ct teat is carried out by fatigue testing meehine.
Ye&
410. l!'&ti3ue t~ is camed out for
QNo

(a) ~ vaeying lletween two limits of equal value, but of

· tb}
opposite~
~ va.rying between two limits of unequal value, but
of opposite sip
0

Ij
~
{~) ~ v~ between two limits ofunequa.! value but of
same .sign
~ci) s.ll of the above
 91

l. (b) 2. {c) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (e)

6. (b) 7. True 8. (c) 9. (dL 1.0. (b)
11. fb} 12. {b) 13. (a} 14. (b) 15. (d)
16. {c)
,.
:. 1. True 18. (b) 19. (OJ 20. {d)
9~
""'"'· (c)
26'-"• {a)
·-·
"" {a)
27. {a)
23. (c)
28. (b)
24. (d)
29. Fa.Is£-
q-
-<>. (d)
30. ,d)
31. {a) 32. (bl 33. rd)
36. (a} 37. (b)
-- 38. (C)
34. ~a)
39. (c)
35. (c)
40. (d)
41. (e) 42. (f) 43. {a) 44. {c) 45. (b)
46. (b) 47. Fa.l!'>t• 48. r; 49. (a] 5fl. (aj
51. (a) ~2. (a) 53. (d) 54. ~ ..... 55. (d)
56. (d) .57. (( '}, t.D), ~1~ . rll 5H. True 60. {b}
(B), tAl, t.F)
61. Yes 6::. (d) 63. ( (l) 64. Agre<· &~-
vt:>. !tl)
66. (b} ti-
__I..,. (a.) 68. :b: 69. '.e) 70. {a).
_., ..,...
71. I !"U(· '-· (!J; J ..:i. l!"Ut• 74. (c) I;;, td)
76. (c) J -!. (b) iS. tbl 79. Correct St1. (c)
81. (al ~·)
I-· Yes S".:;. T.ut· 8-L (u) Sii. (d)
86. (d) bi. Dis;•gr•·t• 8i'i. C•rrrect (i9. (dJ 9V. {cj
91. (b) 9:!. (b) 93. (el ~)4-. (cJ 95. td)
96. False 97. (r.) 98. (f,) 9~.(e) 100. {b)
IUL Faist> !If::. Right. 103. I'
.fi.J 104. (c) !05. (al
i06. Agret' H!i. \Vronl! lOS. .bl lOfJ. (a I 110. (a)
HL (d) 11:!. False 113. I b) 114. (c) 115. (b)
no. (c) '·-
! l. J. (d)
i ."l.) {d)
118. } ...PS ll\1. {b) 1:!0. (cl
• I
i ·)l {II) 123. (a) 1.24. (a) 125. (e)
-~·
126. False 1:2i. (dj l:!B. Ag"ret• 129. (c) l3U. {f)
131. (a) l c.J-.
.,., (b) 1~3. True l34. Correct 135. (a)
136. \f) 137. (c) 138. (&) !39. {d) 140. (cl
141. No 14..2. Agree 143. (a) 144. (bj 145. (d)
146. d) '·-
.1.'21. (d} 14~. {l.tj 149. (c) 100. {d)
151.
156.
(a)
{D),
..,_. l'io
1:;"
(E;, l;:;i. {e)
153. ,d)
151:-. (c)
154. True
159. Ji
.!.55. {bi
160. (C}
'.
(iJ), (Cj
HH. (d) Ht!. False 163. (a) 164. {c) 165. (b)
166. (a) ~-
1LOI. (b) 168. True 169. Disagree liO. (a)
171. (J) l"'·")
(e)
:..J-. 173. \e) 174. (c) 175. {d)
176. {c) 177. Tz-tie 178. (d} l7tl. (a} 180. (b)
 ...

--~ Bln~(l·lli~'':~ ·'•·

4
181. (tl) -182.-(tr---183,.::.-{e}--- . 184. {d) 185.~
186. (tl) 187. lC) 188. (d) 189,. (o) 190. (a)
191. (b) 192•. True 193. Disagree 194. fc) 195. {c)
196. {b) 197. (c) 198. (~) 199. {e) 200. Fs.lse
201. I b) 202. (c) 203. (a) 204. True 205. (b)
206. (a) 207. (b) 208. No 209. {e) 210. (a)
211. (a) 212. (c) 213. lb) 214. (C) 215. !d)
~16. {a) 217. (c:) 218. (d) 219. (c) .220. (D), (A),
(.F), (E), (0), (G)

:2::?u. (c)
---·
221. Wrong ')''" {f)
\
227. True
223. (b}
228. {b)
224. (b)
229. (c)
225. (e)
230. (c)
231. (b) 232. (b) 233. !f) 234. (c) 235. {bl
2~. (b) 237. (c) 238. !d) 239. Ia} 240. (d)
241. True 242. Yes 243. (d) 2i-4. (a) 245. {dl
246. (dl 247. (b) 248. No 249. Incorrect 250. (a)
251. Agree 252. (b) 253. (e) 254. (c) 255. (b)
256. (c) 257. (c) · 25S. (d) 259. let) 260. (b)
261. (j) 262. (c; 263. (b) 264. (a; 265. {a)
:'!66. {b) 267. (d) 268. (c} 269. (c) 270. False
271. Yes 272. (c) 273. {a) 274. (b! 275. (a)
276.. {b) 277. (b) 278. (al 279. No 280. (<:)
:.!Sl. (b) 282. (a) 283. False 284. Disa.!!ree 285. (c)
286. (e) 287. (b) 288. {c) 289. {d) 200. (b)
291. (e) 292. {I,) 293. True :?94. (b) 295. {a)
:!96. Agree 297. (c) 298. (c) :?9~}. (ll) 300. Disagree
:301. (d) 302. {b) 303. False 304. Agret> 305. (b)
306.· (aJ 307. (a) 308. (a) 309. (d) 310. (a}
311. (d) 312. (b) 313. (a) 314. (d) 315. (b)
316. (d) 317. (c) 318. (c) 319. (d) 320. {e)
321 .. (b) 3:22. True 323. (bt :t24. .Agree 325. (c)
326._Trne 327. {cl) 328. (b) 329. (d) 330. (d}
33L (a) 332. (el 333. <a1 334. (c) 335. (b)
~(e) 337. (c) 388. True 339. Disagree 340. {e)
3~1. (c) 3~. ll>) 3~. True 344. (e) 345. Yes
346. (a} 347. (e) 348. Disagree 349. (d) 350. (b)
351. (a) 352. True 353. \d) 35-!. (bi 355. (c)
3,56., lG} 357. (b) 358. (c) 359. (c) 360. lC)
:>61. (e) 362. (b) 36~. (b) 364. (d) 365. (G)
:)00. (b) 36i. (b) 368. (bl 369. (e} 370. Trne
1 &re·'J?.gii'f, r;f ifftz.ter.al$
~4
~ ~n. -1\.gree ~72~ (b)
373. (b) 3i4:·Fa.18t>--3'i5. (c) -·-
l' ~76. tai 3"'"" {c)
278. Right
'\' 4 '. 37!!. False 380. {c)
381. {a) :~82. Agree 3g3. (b) ;~g.j., (rf) 385. (b)
38-5. (b) 387. ;a) 388. Ag~et• 389. Ito) 324). (a)
391. (b) 392. {c) 393. {c} 394. {c) 395. (b)
300. {!3} 397. (rl) 398. 399. (b) 400. {c)
.W11 Fa]st>
""" (e)
"':'?:\)'-. 403. Yes .W4. (a) J:05 . (b)
403. (a} 407. Corre:ct 40"8. r·
~OJ 409. No 41D. {d)
 3
Hvdraulics
"'
a:sd Fluid l\t1ecbanics

JL The mas~ pre unit. volumP. d' a. :;,iuid at ,, standard temp~ra.ture

and pres.o::;urt> is ca!l<:"d
Ia) specific weight. J;i ma:;s denstty
{cl specifi.; gravity ;dl ;:one of the ahove

2. The wei!!ht per unit V<:,lum·· ,,fa liquid at .L stan•imd tt:mpera-

turc and pre!";m.·e-is called.
'tt)• Spt!cific w·~ight J;. mass dt·nsity
(r) specifit: gr;n-ity

3. The spe•·if.c wc-ight of watt>r in JL K.S. umt~ is takPn a:<

(a! !. gn!/cm~ :b) O·•IOl kg/cmJ ,., llli}O kg/m~

4. The spPcitic \1'•-·ight of water in ~.f ;mits ,,.. tak.-11 :t"'

(ttl !P·Sl kX/m3 ,b; 0·~'1 v I••' x:m;: !!'} !)·Si :-: w "N/mm 3
I
(d) a.n,v ont' of the ab,,,.,. •·J

5. The rat-io d "-T•Pcific w<:i::!:.t ·~f <1.

non" cf tlv· abovt·
li< 1nid t" th.· .;;pectfit· weight. of
I
I

pure wate;· at ;t ~tandtirc! temper::::n.:;r:- is caH,·ri I

:a) density of liquid 'hl -<peLific ;rrn.dty of liquid
(c·l eornpr<·s~ibility of :iqt:-•i (d) snrfa<·e tpr:sion tlf liquid
6. Th~ spt•cife grnvity of watu i,- ta.kcn a:;
{a\ O·tllll 1b1 0·01 (•·· !)·! . (d) l I
7. The specifit' Wt·igh• of -<ea. '.l-'&t.er is ......... that of pure water. i
I
(al samP as (bl less than · (t') more than
8. T.lw den,.:ity of. a liqui<l in gmicm3 is numerically equal to its
I
~p<>cific gradt y.
Trw· ·· Fal~e 0 j
94

·I
Hydraul.v__.a and J!tuid Mechanics 95
------·
9. The variation in the volnm(:' of a. liquid with the variation of
prt>ssure is called its
(al surface tension (b) compressibility
1cl capillarity (d J viscosity

10. The property of a. liqui l whi;;~ enables it to re.si,;t tensile stress

is ca.lled its surfice tension.

:._j Disagree 0
'"'
H. When a tub~ of sms.Jler ::b.m.·ter i'> dipped in wa.ter, the water
rise..; in the tuhc d::w t.o vis~s1:y ,)t wat~r.
Tr1w L..! F J.}se 0
lZ Wh:>n a ttl'>: ot sma'!er -l.iJ.m·:;.:- i'l din?"'d ::1 w:lter, the wa.t-er
ri8·.'~ in
the tub,.~ "'"pit:l :1n upwl-!r:i ....... .'iurfa.ce.
(a) conc.tvc:

13 A :::la.as t•1b" of 'Jl!laE,.r di.;.:n:>u:- l.iil used wnw~ performing an

-~:-;:?,!rim;:1t fur th•- "apilla.ry rise of water beca.use
(a} it i_, ~J...si~r :.o 3;·.. ~ r.b:.J:..::~ L!je glass tub~
rb) ;!.J..s::: ·;~2J., is cbea.per <:n.m a metallic tubt!
.(: i:. ~s nJ:- ::~Jq-4ib~e t0 . . p.~n Lz~t t!liE~ ·~Xpt~rimPnt with any other
tube

:H. The m, r;.;ur;· a,)eS not Wt•f, ::::·w ;?lass. Thi;; i:> Jue to tile property
of the Hqni.l kno~\pn a:" --
io· a,,ii!csion l~l viscosity

'" .:;;:npi'e:l.Sibi!ity
15. Wirh :J.:1 b-:.:- :-<S: in s:z,· ,}f :-..!J., ta:· rist: or ·i:~p!'::ssion of liquid
in r he tube dut:~ to suria.;:e tenswn will
1b· increase (C)

16. A glass tube of small diam!:!ter {d) is dipped in fluid. The

height of ri..se or fail in tile tube u given by
crco~:x:

'7C05 :0. ~
\>!lere w= s~~i.£.;:: w~i;.ht of iiquid,
:l:. = A.:1gle of co:1ta~·. of the liquid surface, and
-r =- S;.;.rf.J.ce tension.
17. In the rn.e.mlfa.ct:Iri:l!! of le:~.J shots, th:: pr:>perty of surface
t-£>nsion is ~ili.sed. -
Agree n Di.sagree 0
 96

18. The sur:face tension of mercury at normal tempemture is ....... ..

that of wat-er.
(a) same as (b) lower than (c) higher than
19. The unit of surface tension is
(a) kg/m2 (b) kgjcm3 (c} kg/m {d) kgm
20. The viscosity of a. liquid is due to coh~ion of its particles.
Corree_t 0 Incorrect 0
21. The viscosity of a liquid ......... its rate of iiow through a. hole
in a. vessel.
(a) effects (b) · .does not eii'ect
22. The viscosity of water is ......... th.an that of mercu.-y.
(a) higher J>) lower
23. Falling drops of water become spheres due to the properly of
(a) Rurface tension of water (b) compressibility of watel'
(c) capillarity of water {t.i) viscosity of watar
(e) both surface tension and compressibility of water
24. The intensity of pressure at any point, in a liquid, is
(a} directly proportional to the area of the vessel contalni!:lg
liquid
(b) directly proportional to the depth of liqUid from the
sm:face ·
(c) directly proportional to the length of the- vessel containing
liquid
(tl} inversely proportional to the depth of liquid from the
surface
(e) none of the above
The pressure int.ensity in kg/cml at any point in a liquid is
(a) w (o) fiJk {c) w/h
where w = Specific weight of liquid, and
it, = Depth of liquid :frOm the smface.

26. According to Pascal's law, the intemity of p..~ at any p:>mt

in a fiuid at rest is the same in all dilections.
0
'¥1. Water is ......... liquid.
{a) a compreS&"ble (b) sn mcom~"b!e
22. The pl'eSS'W.'e measured '~ ith the help of a ~
called
(a} atmospheric pressure (O) gauge~
(c) absolute preealll'e (flJ mean~
 Hydraulics and .Fluid M eckanics

29. The atmospheric pressure at sea level is

{al 1·03 kg/cm 2 (b) 10·3 m of water
{c) 760 mm of mercury (d) all of the above
30. The density of air is same at d:i:fferent heights.
Correct 0 Incorrect O
Sl. "\Then the pressure intensity at a point is more than the local
a-tmospheric pressure, then the difference of these two pressures is
called
(a) gauge pressure (b) absolute pressure
(c) positive gauge pressure (d) '"acuuin pressure
32. When the pressure intensity at a point is less than the local
atmospheric pressure, then the difference of these two pressures is
called vacuum pressure.
Agree 0 Disagree 0
33. The vacuum pressure is always the negative gauge pressure.
Yes 0 No 0
34 The absolute pressure is equal to
(a·J gauge pressure+atmospheric pressure
(b) g::.uge pressure--atmospheric pressure
(c) atmospheric pressure-gauge pressure
(d) gauge pressEre-vacuum pressure
35. The pressure of a. liquid measured with the help of a piezometer
tube is
(e.) atmospheric press'.ll"e (b) gauge pressure
(cl absolute pressure (d) vacuum pressure
36. The vacuum pressure can be measured with the help of a
piezometer tube.
True 0 False 0
!r7. The pressure measured with the help of a piezometer tube is in
(a) kgjcmi (b) kg/m2 (c) N/mm 2
(d) Njma (e) head '>f liquid
~. A piezometer tube is used only for measu.."ing
\~) lowp..~ (b) high pressure
(c) moderate pressure (d) vacuum pressure
J!
39. 'l'he liquid used in manometers should have
(a) low density (b) high density
(c) low surface tension (d) high surface tension :i
(e) none of' the above q
7-M.E.
I
~!
I
 H11t!rau:tiia and Fluid Meehan~
,,"

40. Manometer is·uood to mea&:.re

(a) velocity of liquid (b) atmospheric preBS'!ll'e
(cj pressure in pipes and channels
(d') pressure in ventnrimeter
(e) difference of pressures between two points in a pipe
41. A manometer is used to measure
(a) low pressure (b) moderate pxessure
(c) hlghp~e (d) atmospheric pressure
.£1!. A manometer ca.n be used to measure 7acuum presaures.
0 Disagree 0
43. A differential manometer is used to measure
(a) velocity of liquid (b) atmospheric pressure
(c) pressure in pipes and channels
"(d) pressure in venturimeter
(e) difference of pressures between two points in a. p!pe

~- The total pressure on a hor..zontally immersed su....face is

(a) w.A (b) 'WX (c) wAx
wA wx
(d')
-r (e) T
where w = Specific weight of the liqnia,
A = Area of the immersed-surface, and
x = Depth of the centre of gravity of the immersed
stclace from the liquid surface.
45. The totai pressure on an immersed surface inclined at a,r>, angle .
() with the liquid Slll'face is
(a) wA (bi wx IV {c) wAJ:
w.A1 wAx
(e)
SiiiT COOT
46. The intensitY of pressure on an immersed surface ...•.. with the
increase in depth~
(a) does not change (b} increases (c) decreases

4.7. The point at which the resultant pressure on an immersed

surface acts, is known as
(c) centre of gravity {b) centre of depth
{c) centre oi pressure (dl centre of immersed~---·-"
 4.8. The oenke of pressure aoia the centre of gravity-of
immersed surface.
(a) &t (b) above (c) below

~-
I
The depth of centre of pressure (1") for a vertically immersed
surf<We from the liquid surla:ce is given by -t-
1
I •
t \
r\a)_ lo -z (bJ .!2.-A;! i 1

A~ Z
A;;,..,.
{c) - (d)
lo -r-x
wne:re A = A.."ea of immersed surfa.ce, and
1! = .Deoth of cent:i:"e of g:rn,vit"V of t.he immersed mrrace
from the liquid ::mxfsce. ·
3\). T2e car:lil"; of 'tlreSSU!"e fer J. 7er:;icaih· immer.:ed _,uz-:~e lies Sot
1- di.«tanee equal to: ........
tbe centre of g;a7ity .
.,.
-<o
(a) bdow ,,;)
A.:E
d~
(c) beiow: \d)
L;
3J.. A v~cally im:ners'=C 3'-lA···~:face .:.S sho,,vn in F:g. 3·1_ The
d.Lttance ofits centre of prssanre .tl"om .Lr·r:~er sur 1cc 2
the --;::-ate;:: is :..- .. .!.·- . : __ :....-_· =-- -·
• -o -,
a;-
C!Jr"'
(a) (b) 1:5 +73
(c)
1!! -:-
lJS
+:l
t

(d)
..
(t-
---!-£
I:; 1:: '
52. Tile deuth of centr-e of -oresaur0 :·or
an imme~ 'surface inclined ·at a.n angle
a with. the liquid :mrfa.ce lies at a, dia-cance Fig. 3-l
equal to . .. .. .. .... . . .. the centre of g!'3 vity.

(a)
10 ainz d
Ax below
,
ib}
la am• g abo-ve
..d::

{c)
10 sin 8
--,-=- b 1
e.ow (d)
Iu sin a above
.o;.Z Az
53. .A vertical wall is subjected to a pressure due to one kind of
liquid, on one of it<; sides. The t-otal pressure on the wall per unit
iength is
fa) wli (b) wllj2 (c) wF--/2

whers w = Specific we;g~t of liquid, and

H = Heignt of liquid.
100

54. A vertical wall is subjected to ·a.-pressure-due to-one kind of

liquid, on one of its sides. The tota.l· pressme on the wall acts a.t a
distance ......... from the liquid fimface.
(a) H/3 (b) H/2 (c) 2H/3 (ct) 3H/4

~~. A vertical wall is subjected to a pressme due to one kind of

liquid, on one of its sides. Which of the following statement is
correct?
(a) The pressm~ on the wall at the liquid level is minimum.
(b) The pressme on the bottom of the wall is maximum.
(c) The pressure on the wall at the liquid level is zero, and on
the bottom of the wall is maximum.
(d) The pressme on the bottom of the wall is zero.
(e) none of the above
56. When a vertical wall is subjected tO pressures due to liquid on
both sides, the resultant pressure is the ...... of the two pressures.
(a) sum (b) di.ti"erence (c) arithmatic mean
(d) geometric mean· (e) none of the above
57. In a lockgate, the reaction between two gates is
p 2P ...p
_<)_ _ _
(a) (b) (c)
Sil17 sin IX ~ Slfi a.
p 2P
(d) {e)
sin IX/2 sin IX/2

where P = Resultant prei'sure on the lock gate, and

IX = Inclination of the ga,te "ith the riorma.l to the side
of the lock. -

·58. Match the corre.(j; answer from Groop B for the statements
given in Groop A

Group .A

(a) The weight per unit volume of a (.4) N/m

liquid is (B) wh
(b) The unit of surface tension is (0) specific weight
(c) The unit of pressure is (D) -viscosity
(d) The pressure intensity at any (E) N/m 2
point in a liquid is

--
 101

59. The w ~tar Ot'd':lsura per m3~er len ;th on a vertioa.I m lso:1orj
wall of dam is L -

(a) . wH/2 (bl wE (c) wEZ/2 (d) wEZ/4

when w = Specific weight of the liquid, and
H = Height of the liquid.
~. The stability of a. dam is checked for
(a) tension a,t the base
(b) overtu.rn.ing of the wail or dam
(c) sHding of the wall or dam
I d) all of the above
(e) n 1ne of the a.bo..-e
61. W'nE'n a body is placed o-.;oer ;1 liq•Iid, it is subjected to g:·avita-
tiona.l force and upthrust of the liquid.
True D. False O
62. When a body is placed over a. liquid, it will sink down if
(a) gravitational force is equal to the upthrusc of the liquid
(b) gra.vita.tio:1al force is less than the upthrust of the liquid
\C) gravitational force is more than the upthrust of the liquid
(d) none of the above
63. Whe·l n. qody is placed over a. liquid, it will :ffo:1t if
(a) gravitational force is equa.l to the upthrust of the liqu!d
\b) gravit1.tional force is less tha.n the upthru:;t of the liquid
(c) gr:1vitati m11l force is more than be nothrust of the liquid
(d) none of the above
64. When a body i~ immersed wholly or poJ.rth!ly in a liquid, it is
lifted top by ·~ force equal to t·he weignt of liquid displaced by the
body. This statement is called
(al Pa:>r:-a.I'.s la.w (o! A.rchimede's principle
(e) principle of flotation Bernoulli':> theorem
65. The tendency of a liquid to uplift .::1 subme':'ged body, beca.us :P
of the upward th.ru it of the liquid, is known as buoyancy.
Agree 0 Disagree 0
00 . The force of buoyancy is ...... the weigh.t of the liquid displaced
by the body.
(a) ecqual to (b) less than (c) more tha.n
67. The body will float if the force of buoyancy is ........• the
weight of the liquid displaced.
(a) equal to (b) less than (c) mora than
68. Tlle body wili sink down if the force of buoyancy is ... :...... the
weight of the liquid displaced.
(a) equal to (b) less th.s,n t....) more th&r>
 102

69. The centre of gravity of the volume of the-liquid-dispmued-is- ·---

called
(a) centre of pressure (b) centre of buoyancy
(c) met&centre (a) none of the above ·

19. The centre of buoyancy is the centre of area. of the immersed

body.
0 Incorrect
11. The buoyancy depends npe:o. the
(a) pressme with which the liquid is displaced
(b) weight of the liquid displaced
(c) viscosity of lihe liquid
(a) compressibility of the liquid
(e) none of the above

12: When a. body, floating in a liquid, is given a small angular

displacement, it starts oscillating about a. point known as
(a} centre of pressure {b) centre of gravity
(c) centre of buoyancy (d) metacentre
(e) none of the above

i3. The meta.centrio height is the d:ist&nce between the

(a} centre of gravity of the floating body &ild the centre of
buoyan<Jy
{b) centre of gravity ofthe floating body and the metacentre
(c) metacentre and centre of buoyancy
(d') original centre of buoyancy and new centre of buoyancy

i<!.. The line of action of the force of bouya.noy acts through the
centre of gravity of the volume of the liquid displaced.
True O False 0
75. The metacentric heights of two floating bodies A. and B are l m
and H> m respectively. Select the correct statement.
The bodies A and B hs.ve equal stability
{tz)
(b)The body A is more stable than body B
(c) The body B is more stable ths.n body A
(d) The bodies A and Bare unstable
76. If a body floating in a. liquid returns bsok. to 'its· or.iginal
position, when given a small angalar displacement, the body is said
tobein
(aj neutral equilibrium (b) stable equilibrinm
(c) ·cmstable equilibrium (d) none cftha a:r--
 103

11. If a body floating in a liquid does not return ba.ck to ita orlg:inal
position, and heels farther a.way when given a BD.1all angnle.r
displacement, the body is said to be in neutral equilihrisn.
Yes 0 No O
iS. If a. body iioa.tiP.g in a liquid occupies s. new position and
remains at rest in this new ·position, when given a small angulal'
displacement. '.l'b.e bcdy is aa.id to be in ......... eq:illibrium.
(a) neu.t;;al (b) stable {c} unstable
i'J;. .A bod"?' :5.fJn.ti.ng in a lie: aid is s'>id to be in nem;<:J.l equilihriu!'n,
i1 its meta.c;n:tre - •
(a) coincides with ;ta ceutre of g:rnv:ity
(b) lies a.bove its centre M g:;:'37ity
(c) lies below its centre of grsvity
(a) lies between the centr~ of buoyancy a.nd .;entre of g:ra.vit:y

~- A bcdv floating in a liatrid !s said to be in a Jta.oie eauilibriun::..

if ira :::neta,cent<e coiiicides with its centl"e of grsvit:.;. •
~ue

81. A bod., doa,t:ing in a liouid is said to be noc in equiiibrium if

ita meta-cent~~ lies below its Cent4e of gr-atity.
~e O Disagree [j
82. A submerged body is said t.o he ill .~ stable ~ qui.librium, if ita
centre oi gi':l.7ity ......... the cen1n:e of buo:yancy.
(a) coincides with (b) lies below (c) lies a.oove
~. The time of oscilla.tion (T) of a. fl.oa.ting q_ody is gi-ven. by

(a) (b) .,_ Ir-,--

a.g
~··\!IT

~----
' ~----

v
I
~ l .i:~ (d) _._ J h.q
::~
(c)
,},g 2:-: " -v
where .1: = Ra;dius of gyr:1tion uf the floating body about ita
centre of g:ra7ity, a.nd
};, = Meta.cei.'.tric height of the floating bcdy.
~ A movinz fluid mass may be brought to a st.a.tic equilibrium
position, by ippl?..ng an ima.g'..:a.a,zy inertia force oi the same
magnitude aa tbat of the accele..eating fcrce but in the o:p~s:ite
dixeetion. T.his statement i8 called
(a) Pat~ca.l'a
Ia.w (b) ..d.zcb.imede'.s principle
{c) DcAlemhert';s pri..nciple (dj none of the above
 ;""'
·"-.

104 Hydraulics and .Fluid .Mechaniea

85. The quantity of a liquid flowing per second through . a section

of a pipe or a channel is called discharge and is mea.surad·1n: cumeus-·
(ms/sec).
True 0 False 0
86. One cubic metre of wa.ter weighs
(a) 100 litres (b) 250 litres (c) 500 litres
(d) 1000 litres (e) 1500 litres

87. One litre of water occupies a volume of

(a) 100 cm3 (b) 250 cm3 (c} 500 ems
(d) 1000 cm 3 (e) 1500 ems

38. \Vhen a. liquid is flowing t"h ..............h. a p1oe, the velocity of +.he
liquid is -~we. -
(a) ma.::rimum at the centre and minimum near the walls
(b) minimum at the centre s.nd ma::rimum near the walls
(c) zero at the centre and ma::rimum near the walls
(d) ma.::rimum--at the centr<: and zero near the walls
(e) none of the above

89. If an incompressible liquid is continuously £.owing through a

pipe, the> quantity of liquid passing per second is different s.t different
sections.
Tme False 0
90. The flow in a pipe or chan::~el is said to be uniform when
(al the liquid particles at all sections have the same velocities
(b) the liquid particles at different sections have different
velocities
(c) the quantity of liquid flowing per second is constant
(d) each liquid particle has a. definite path

91. The flow in a pipe or channel is said vo be non-uniform when

(a) the liquid particles at all sections have the same velocities
(b) the liquid particles at different sections have cllii'erent
velocities
{c) the quantity of liquid flowing per second is constant
(d) each liquid particle has a defini:te path

92. .A. now in which each liquid particle has a definite path, and the
paths of individual particles do not cross each other, is called.
\a) steady flow (b) uniform flow {c) streamline now
(a) turbulent flow (e) none of the ~bove
 Hydraulics and Fluid .Mechanics 105

93. A flow in which each liquid particle do not have a definite na.th
and the paths of individual particles also cross each other, is called
unsteady flow.
Agree 0 Disagree 0
94. A flow in which the aua.ntitv of liquid flowing per ·second is
cons'"...a.nt, is called •........ flow. •
(a) steady (b) stream line (c) turbulent

95. A.flow in which the quantity of liquid flowing per second is not '"'
constant, is called
(a) stream line flow (b) turbulent flow (c) steady flow
(d) none of $e .above
96. ~ich of the following statement is correct ?
(a) In a compressible flow, the >olume of the flowing liquid
changes during the flow.
(b) A flow in which the volume of the flowing liquid does not
change, is called incompressible flow.
\c) Wnen the pa.r'"Jcles rotate about their own a:x:es ,,.hil3
flowing, the flow is said to be rotational flow.
(d! In an irrotationai flow, the liquid particles do not rotate
~ about their own a:x:es and retain their original orientations.
~ (e) all of the above
!~ 9i . .Accoriling to equation of contir _jty,
(a) w1 ~ = wa, (b) W1!11 = WzVz
(c) ~v1 = a,t~z (a) aJv1 = advz
98. A flow through a. long pipe at constant rate is called
(a) steady uniform flow (b) stead~non.-uniform flow
(c) unsteady uniform flow (d) unsteady non-uniform flow
00 A flow through a. long pipe at decreasing rate is called ....... .
uniform flow.
(a) steady (b) unsteady
100. A flow through an e:x:p'1nding tube at constant rate is called
(a) steady uniform flow (b) steady non-uniform flow
(c) unsteady uniform flow (d) unsteady non-uniform flow

lOll.. A flow through an expanding tube at increasing rate is called

unsteady non-uniform flow.
Yes 0 No 0
102. A flow whose stream line is represented by a curve, is called
(a:) one-dimen.aional flow (b) two-dimensional flow
(c) three-dimensional flow (d) four-dimensional flow
 100
163. A now whose streamline is
called . . . . . . . . • dime:oaional now.
(a) one (b) tvro (c) three
104. In oru; dimensionalllow, the fiow
(~) is uniform (b) is steady and un.iform
(c) ta.Zes place in straight line
(d1 ta.Zes place in aurre (e) takes pisce in one direction

.Jl.~. In two dimexwional flow, the ilow does ngt take place in a Cti!"Ve.

Trne 0 False 0
1~. Tbe ~1 energy of a. liquid particle fu. motion is equal to
(a' pl"e£!8m'e energy+ kinetic energy+ potential ene~
I b) ~energy- rkinetk.ene:rgy+potential energy)·
(c) potential energy- (p.."'essu.re energy+kinetic e:nel"gY
(d) ld:o.etilii energy- {presanre ene:rgy+potentia! enex-gy)
(e) none of the aoova

1~. '!'he t-otal head of a liquid particle in motion is equal to

{a) pressu.."'e head +kinetic head +
potential head
(b) ·pressure head - tkmetic head + potential head)
(c) p::tcntia.l head - (pressure head + kinetic head)
(d) ki:::letic head - (preesUl"e head 1- potential head)
100. For a, nerfecil inoonmresbible liouid, iiowing in a, continuous
8tl'Sa.m. tb.e total energy of
3 pa;:r,ide. remains the s~me, while the
pa.""'ticle l!lOYes from one point to another. This statement ia called
(a) coutincity equation (b) Bernoulli's equation
(c) P:1acal'a la.w (d) .Axc.himede'.s pr..nciple
100. .!coording to Bernoulli's equation
p_ ..J.. -vz
(a) .17
t : . f' -
w
I
g- constant
p tr
(b) z- Ul 2g - cons;;a.nt
p v:
(C) z Ul
'
I -g = constant
p v•
(d) Z- w 2g
=constant
:U~. Ei:Uer';s equation in the d:liferer;;if.al form for the motion <Jf liquids
in given by

(a) dp + g.dz + v.dv = 0 (b) dp - g.dz +- v.dv = 0

F if!
(c) p.d:p + g.d:; + v.dv = 0 (d) p.dp - g.tiz + v.dv = 0
 107
:Ul. Euler's equation is based on the assumption that
(a) the fluid is non-viscous
(b) the fluid is homogenous and incompressible
(c) the flow is continuous, steady and along the streamline
(d) the velocity of flow is unifoFm over the section
(e) all of the above

112. Bernoulli's equation is a.pplied to

(a) venturlmeter (b) orifice meter (c) pitot tube
(b) a.ll of the a.bove (e) none of the above

U3. .Barometer is used to measure

{a) velocity of liquid
(b) atmospheric pressure
(c) preSSllr~ in pipes a.nd channels
(d) difi"erence of pressures betwe~n two points in a pipe

114. Venturimeter is used to

(al measure the velocity of a flowing liquid
~ {b) measure the prei!Sllre of a. flowing liquid
~ (c) measure the discharge of liquid flowing in a pipe
(d) measure the pressure difference of liquid flowing between
two points in a. pipe line
115. The length of the divergent cone in a veutu."i.meter is ........... .
ths.t of the convergent cone.
(a) equal to (b) dou9Je
(c) three to four times (a) five to si.:: times

116. In a venturimeter the velocity of liquid a.t throat is ........... .

than at inlet.
(a) higher (b) lower

Ui'. The pressure of liquid a.t throat ir: a. venturimeter is.............. .

.~ that a.t inlet.
(bJ lower

118. The velocity of the liquid fiowing through the divergent portion
of a ventm:imeter
(a) reme.ins oonste.nt (b) increases
(c) d~ {a) depends upon Iila:!!S of liqmd
'(e) none of the above
108

119. In order to avoid tendency of sep!l.ratioo a.t throat in a. ventu."'i.--

.
meter, the ratio of the dra.mster at throat to the diameter of nioo
should be ~ ~

l l 1 l 1 I
(a) - -.-to (b) -to- (c) to
1
~t> 8 8 4 4 3
1 1 . 4
(dl to (e) J. to -
3 2 2 5
120. The pressure of the liquid flowing through the divergent portion
(a) reiJ:lains constant (b) increases '"'
(c) decreases (dJ depends upon mass of liquid
(d) none of the above

121. The divergent porticn of a venturimeter is ma-de longer than

convergent portion in order to
(a) avoid the tendency of breaking away the stream of liquid
(b) to minimise frictional losses
(c) both {a) and (b)
(d) none of the above

122. The discharge through a venturimeter is given by

(a) (b)

(d)

where C, = Co.afficient of rHscharge,

a1 = .Area at inlet,
a~ = Area at threat, and
h, = Venturi-head.
123. In order to measure the now with a venturimeter, it is installed
in a
(a) horizontalline (b) verticalline
(c) inclined line with flow upwards
(d) inclined line with flow downwards
(~:) in any direction and in any location

124. A pitot tube is used to measure the

(a) velocity of fiow at the reqnirad point in a pipe
tb) pressure_ difference between two points in a pipe
{c) total pressure of liquid flow'mg in s, pipe
(d) discharge through s, pipe
 109

125. When the ventu.rimeter is inclined, then for a given flow it will
shew .....•....••reading.
(a) same (b) more (c) less
126. If a pitot tube :is placed with its nose upstream, downstream or
sideways, the reading will be the same in every case.
Tme 0 False O
127. Coefficient of contraction :is the ratio vf
(a) actual velocity of jet at vena. contracta to the theoretical
velocity
(b) loss of head in the orifice to the head of water available at
the e:::rit of the orffice
(c) actual discharge through an orifice to the theoretical dis-
charge
(d) none of the al'>ove
128. Coefficient of velocity is the ratio of
(a) actual velocity of jet at >ena contracta to the theoretical
veiocity
(b) area. of jet at vena con~ncta to the area. of orifice
{c) loss of head in the orifice to the head of water ava.ilable
at the exit of the orifice
(d) actual" discha.rge through an orifice to the theoretical dis-
charge
129. A jet of water discharging from a 40 mm diameter orifice has
a diameter of 40 mm at its v~ccntrd.cta. The coefficient of contrac·
tion is .
(a) 0·46 (b) 0·64 (c) 0·78 (d) 0·87 (e) 0·93

130. The coefficient of discha.~e is the ratio of theoretical discharge

to the actual discharge througn. an orifice.
True 0 False 0
13!. Coefficient of resistance is defined as the ratio of
(a) actual velocity of jet at vena contracte. to the theoretical
velocity-
(b) a.rea. of jet at vena. contract& to the area of orifice
(c) actual discha.rge through an orifice to the theoretical dis-
chs.rge
(d) a.ny one of the a.bove
j (e) none ofthe above
I 132. The theoretical velocity of jet a.t vena. contracts. is

Il
I
(a) 2gEl 2gy1f"
(e)
where II = Head Qf-w-&ter at veil@.. contra.~.
(d) v2gB

'
 133. Coefficient of ~ Oa is equal to
{a} Oa X Or (b) Oc X ()?
{d) Oo/Cr (e) Os/Op
,, where Or. = Coefficient of oontlacticn.,
' Or = Coefficient of velocity, aDd
C~ = Coefficient of resista:llce.

1~. An. ave.."':lge value of coefficient of velocity is

(a) 0·92 {b) 0·78
(a) 0·97 (e) none ofthe a-bove
135. The value of coefficient of d.iscila:rge is .••• :.the va.lne of eceflc!ent
oi velocity.
(a) less than (O) same ~ (c) more ~

~- T.l:la ooem~nr; of
using the relation

(a) C~ = /r y•
• '~ .t:.: EI
,.. 4qE
(c) (d) c~ = __
\/ z'l
!37.. "Which: of the following stat-ement iB 'W'!"Ong t
(a) A fiow whose ~..a,m. line is represented by a cur.e, is
called two dimensional now.
(b) The total enerl!:?" of a liauid ~-ticle is the sum of oot.s!ltial
energy, kinetic~~nergy and pr"esstll'e ener-gy. -
{c) The length of divergent portion in a ventu:cimeter is equal
t-o the convergent portion.
(d) A piiot tube is used to measure t.b.e velodty of flow at the
required point in a pipe.
(e) The ratio of actual velocity of jet at vena contl'S.cta. to the
theoretical velocity is called cooffident of velocity.

1'33. An ori..fice is said to be large, if

(a) the size of orifice is large
(b) the velocity -<>i fi~w is large
(a) the a,vailable head of liquid is more tha;n 5 times the height
of orr..fice I
(d) the available hea~ of liauid isJess than 5 times the height l
of orifice -

139. The velocity of liquid flowing through an orifice va..-ies with the
available head of the liqttid.
~e 0
 Hydro'Uliea aftd .FW.iil Meeha$$e.~ 111
,- --1to:-The-dische.rge (Q) through a rectangular orlftce is given by
.~ (a) Q = .f Oa; . b.J" 2g (Ea - H,J

( b). ,{'\, = 1J~ i.Jd

r,;; ,., • 1~ 'V
- (H!! *-·
.r 2g • -
'M"f)
.t::f..6.·

{e) Q ::: ! Oa . by'2g (H2$i 2 - B."i'31 s)

(d) Q= -i Oa; . by'2g {H2~ - Hid)
where H: = Height of the liquid above the top of tl::.e
orifice,
E g = Height of liquid above the bottom of the
orifice,
b = Breadth of the orifice, and
Crt = Coefficient of discharge.
141. T'ne discharge through a wholly drowned ori..fice is given by
(a) Q = Oa;. b Hx..,/2gH (b) Q = ad . b H1.v2g11
(c) Q = Ca . b (11, - Btlv 2qE (d) Q = Ca;. b H...; 2gE
w!lere H 1 = Hej.ght of water (on the upstream side) above
the top of the orifice,
!12 = Height of the water (on the downstream side)
above the bottom of the orifice, and
E = Difference between two water levels on either
side of the orifice.
142. A tank of uniform cross-sectional area (A) containing liquid
upto height (E1 ) bas a.n orifice of cl"'88-sectiona.1 area (al a.t ita bottom.
The time required to bring the liquid level from B 1 to Bz will be
2dv/H1 2A.YH2
{a..l (b)
0,;. a·./2g Crt. ::rv'2g
2A (.fB.l- .fH:) 2A iH1sf:z - H 23 ' 2)
(c) (d)
Ca. tz.f:Jg Oa;. a.f2g

143. A tank of uniform cross-sectional a:rea. (AJ containing liquid

upto height {B1) has a.n orifice of crOSB-sectiona.l area. (a) at ita
bot+.,om. The time required to empty the ta.nk completely will be
(a} 2A.YB1 (b) 2AB;
Ca. • a..;2g Ca • av'2g
2AH1312 .;:;) 22l·
(c) 1t>-
Cu. . ay'2g Oa. a.f2g

1~. If the value of coefficient of discharge increa.ses, the discharge

through the orifice decreases.
0 False n
 112 Hydraulics and Fluid Meckani€J8

145. A hemispherical tank of radius (R) containing liquid upto he4!ht

(H1l bas an oriiice of cross-sectional area (al at its bottom. The time
required to lower the le vel of liquid from (H1) to (Ed will be

(a)

(b)
.,_ I..,
"'·· --. L tPt tH 3t2
t'l -
H1':J:t:) -
'Oa.av2g-L3 · •

(c) .....
Ca.a..ftg
9-
Li
r ')
-
R2 (Ht3f: - H:3fZ) -
-
'
~ (Hls;~ -
::1
fl:5/l) "'_j
.
none of the above
(d)
146. A hemispherical tank of radius (R) has an orillce of cross-sectional
area (a) at its bottom and is fuil of liquid. The time required to empty
the tank completely is
l4~Rrr2 l4-:-:R312
(a) (b)
15 Ca. av/2g 15 Ca. a.f2g
14-:-:,RS/2 14-:-:.R'I/!l
(c) (d)
15 cd. a..f2g 15 C'. a•./"!.g
141. A pioe of lenath more thc:.n double the diameter of orifice fitted
e::cternally·or internally to the orifice is called a
(a) notch (b) weir (c) mouthpiece (d) nozzle
148. In a short cylindrical external mouthpiece, the vena contracta
occu..T'S at a distance ............ the rliametc:r of the orifice from the out-
let of orifice.
(a) equal to (O) one-fourth (c) one-third
(d) one-ha!f (e) two-third
149. The length AB of a pipe A.BC in which the liquid is flowing has
diameter(~) and L'~ suddenly enlarged to diameter {d:!l at B which is
constant for the lenath BC. The loss of head due to !".:~dC.en enlarge-
ment is ~ ~

(a)
g
(b)
g
(vt - v~)2 'Vr~
"
- 4
v~-
(G) 2g
{ii)
2g
150. The length AB of" a, pipe ABf_} in which the liquid is: flowing has
diameter(~) and is suddenly contracted to diameter(~) at B which
is con.stant for the length BO. The loss of head due t"> st:dden con-
t:ra.ction, assuming coefficient of contraction as 0·62, is
Vj_i Vz~
(ii) (e)
2g 2i
0·5 v1~ 0·375 v~~
{c) (d)
2g 2g
 Hydraulics and Fluid .Jiechanics 113

-lsL-Thelossof heact at entrance in a pipe is

v:~ 0·:) t·~ t}373 !!~
(rt) (b)
'2Ll
0·75 L'~
(d:
'2g
wherP c = V el<leiry <lf liquid in the pip•.·.
152. The lo;:s of heaJ due to an obstruction in a pipP is twice tht>
lo;:s of hear! a.r its Pntmnce.
Disagree
153. The loss of head at exit of a pipe i"
·r:! O·:i t•Z 0·375t 2
(rt. (b) :C:
'2!7 2!1 :!.q
'
~: ~ 0·7;) r 2
~j (d) {e) none of the above
! 2g
1 154. The discharge through an external monthpiece is g!Ten by
j (•t) 0·8;35av'2gH (b) 1·855aH·,i':fg
l (c) 1·.'585 av?.gH (d) 5·85 a E v ~fi
''
l
where a =
Cross-sectional area of the moutnptece, ami
l H =Height of liquid a.boYe the mouthpiece.
{· 155. The coefficient of discharge for a.n external mouthpiece dapends
1 upon
(a) velocity of liquid (b) pressure of liquid
(c) area of mouthpiecE' (d) iength of mouthpiece
(d) all of the above (J) none of the above
156. Borda's mouthpiece is an ........... mouthpiece.
(a) Llit-ernal (b) external
157. In an interna-l mouthpiece, if the jet after contraction does not
touch the sides of the mouthpiece, then the mou-rhp!.ece is said to be
(a) running full (b) running free
(c} partially running full (d) partially running free
15ft In an inte...-nal mouthpiece, if the jet aftEr contraction expands
and fills up the whole mouthpiece, then the mouthpiece is said to be
runniz1g free.
True O False 0
159. An internal mouthpiece is said to be running ............ if the
length of tl·e mouthpiece is more than thre3 times the diameter ·of the
orifice. -
(a) free {b) partially full (c) full
M.E.--8
 114 Hydraulics and .Fluid .Mechanies

160. An internal mouthpiece is said to be running free if the length

of the mouthpiece is ............ the diameter of the orifice.
(a) equal to (b) less than twice
(c) more than twice (di less than three times
(e) more than three times

161. When an internal mouthpiece is running free, the disch3.r"ge

through the mouthpiece is
(a) 0·5 av2gH (b) tYi07 a.f'J.gH
(c) 0·855 a.f'2gH (d) a'l"l.gH
'vhere a = Area of mouthpiece, and
H = Hei~ht of liquid abon• the mou1.hpiece.
162. When an internal mout hnit~t·~~ i~ runn.in£ full. the dischn.r~e
through the mouthoiece is "twiee ~b.e riischa:-:..:t• ·.>hen it is ;-unnin~r free.
..... .&. ._ .....

Ri~ht "' \Vron~ 0

163. The disc!1arcre throu!!h a con"t"r>rut·nt mnuthniece is .......... .. the
discharge throug{ an intt-r:1ai mou:hpie<·e of tht:; same diameter and
head of water.
(a) equal to (bl <me-half (~. ti:lree fourth
(d) double (e) fonr time,;

164. In an external mouthoif·ce. the absolute nnssure head at \"'ena

rontmct.a. is ......... the atmospheric pressure head by an amount equal
to 0·89 timt>s t;he height of the :iquid. above th.e >ena contracts..
(a) less than (b) more than

Hi5. In an external or intern,d mouthpiPct>. the ahsolm:e pressure

head at vena contracta is zero.
CorreC't C Incorrect 0
i
166. In a.n in'ernal mnuthpiect>. rhe absolme nressure head at vena
contracta is ............ the atinos'Oheric nressure ·head b> an amount
equal t.o heig-ht of tht• liquid a h~'e the \·ena contra eta. •
I
(a) · less than (h) more than

167. In a. convergent mouthpiece, the absolute pressure head at vena

j
contracta. is the same it!': that of the ar.mosphere.
True n Fa !se 0 f
168. The discharge over a rectangular notch i::;
r".
I
(a) 5

{d
b.f'2gE (c) . 5 Cti. b.f:s;}. H

i o~~ . b .fii. JP1 (d) g

2 c" b.f 2g . sz l
where b = \Vidth of notch, and 1
H = Height of liquid, aOO\'t' the sill of the notch.

i
 . -----------. -·------------.,-------~.

uo

..
I
3!69. -The discharge over a right angled notch is

(a) 8 Ca .,'2g
<-::"
- .E (o') 8 C<t v2g
-I-· - . E 312
1~ D
8 '9 F- 8 C·I \. ,q-
(c) -1_ C··
.; v~g. (d) 15 -(J •
Est•
•
• D

where H = Height of liquid above tht• apex of notch.

170. The discharge over a rectangular noteh is
t_a) inversely proportional to H3 '~
(b) ciirectly proportional to JF1 2
(!:) inve:rsly proportional to H 5;z
('i' directly proportional to H5 -~
( e; none of the above
171. The discharge over a triangular notch is
(ai inversly proportional to H 213
(bi directly proportional to F- 3
(c: inversly proportion<:.! to H3 ·~
(d·; dirPct-ly proportion:J.i to £3' 2
(ei none of the abon'
172. A ..;tructure u~ed to dam up a ;;tream or river on•r which the
w:t.ter tlows is called
In\ orificP (b\ nntci1
(ri' <huu (d) none of th•· abm·e

.173. Th·· l<·ngth of a liquid stream while flowing •wer <L >n·ir. ......... .
a.t the ends of t-he sill.
(a: expands (bj does not changp
174. According to Francis formula, the discharge over a re"tangular
weir is
al ~- Ca (L - nH;·./2gH (b: i Cd (.L - 0·1 nH \ ':!.g H 3 Z
(c) *Gtl (.L - nEh/2g HZ (dj i C.t (.L - 0•2 nli) ..j2g li5i 2
where n = Number of end contractions.
175. A weir is said to be narrow-crested weir. if the width of the
crest of the weir is ............... half the hPight ofwater above the weir
crest.
(a) equal to (b) less than (c} more than
176. A weir is said to be broad crested. weir. if the width of the crest
of the weir is ..................half the height of water above the weir
crest.
(a) equal t<l · (b) less than (c) more than
116 HydraUlics and J!luid .Mechanics·

177 In a broad-crested weir, the -discharge is maximum if the head

of' water on the downstream side of weir is ............ the head of water
on the upstream side of weir.
(a) equal to (b) one-third (c) two-third
(d) three-fourth (e) one-he.lf
178. The maximum discharge over a broad crested weir is
(a) 0·384 Cu . L . H 112 (b_: 0·384 Cd . L . H 3 ! 2
(c) 1·71 Or~. L. Hm (d) 1·71 Cd. L. H 3t2
(e) none of the above

179. In a sharp-crested ,,·eir, the thickness of the weir is kept less

than half of the height of water above the crest of the weir.
True U False 0
180. A weir, generally, used as a spillway of a dam is
(a} narrow-crested weir ;b) broad crested weir
(c) Ogee weir (d) submerged wdr
(e) Cippoletti weir
181. When the water le':el on the downstream side of a weir is above
the top B'IU'face of a weir, the weir is known as
;a) narrow-crested W·.'ir {b) broad-crested weir
(c) Ogee weir (d) submerged weir
(e) Cippoletti \\"ei=
.182. In a free nappe, ·
(tJ.) the pressure below the nappe is atmospheric
(b) the pres:-ure below the !lappe is negative
(c) the pressure above the nappe is atmospheric
(d) the pressure above the nappe is negat-ive

183. In a depressed nappe

{a) the prtssure below the nappe is atmospheric
(b) the pressure below the nappe is negative
(c) the pres~'ure above the nappe is atmospheric
(d) the pressure above the nappe is- negative
184. The discharge through a siphon spillway is
(a) Ca . av'2iii (b) Cd. a,.j 2g . HJI2
(c) Ca. a v2g. H2 (d) Ca. a.f2j/. H5f:
185. The frictional resistance of a pipe varies appro::rimately with
......... of the liquid.
(tt) pre.ssure tb) velocity
(c) square of velocity (d) cube of velocity
fe) none of the a.bovt'
 - -------·---·------·
~-

Hydraulic.s and Fluid Mer.hanica lli

-- ~ - ·-· .

186. According to-Darcv's formula, the loss of ht•ad due to friction

in the pipe is ~ •
j l v~ (b) 3j l v~
(al ---gd
2gd
(c)
4-f l va
2,gd (d)

where f = Darcy's coefficient,

l = Length of pipe,
·v = velocity of liquid in pipe·, :tnd
d = Diameter of pipe.
187. The hydraulic mean depth for a circular- pipe of di:lm··t1·r ,d) i.
(,z) d/6 (b) d/4 (r) d/'2 (d; d
188. The hvdraulic g"adient line is alwa.Jll parallel to the c.•ntr.~
line of the pipe
Correct 0 Incorrect n
189. The hvdr:tulie gradient- line may be abo•·e or b.:low the centre
line of the pipt•. -
True 0 Fa.lse []
190. The t-otal energy line lies over the hydraulic gradient line by an
amount equal to the
(a) pressure head (b) velocity head
(c; pressure head -!- velocity head
(d) pre~sure head -- vt>locity head
191. The power transmitted through the pipe is maximum when the
head lost duE' to friction is equal to
(a; one-fo-ll.r1ih of the total supply head
(b) •me-third of the total supply head
(c) nne-half of the total :;upply head
(d) two-third of the t-otal supply head
(e) none of the abnve

192. The maximum efficiency of transmission through a. pipe is

(a: 50 % (.b) 56·7 % (c) 66·6i %
(d) 76·66% (e) 86·7% {j) 90%
193. A compound pipe is requir:!d to be replaced by a. new pipe. The
rwo pipes art: said to .be equivalent, if
(a) length of both the pipes is same
(by diameter of both the pipes is same
(c) loss of head o.p.d discharge of both the pipes is same
(d) loss ofhead and velocity of flow in both the pipes is same
(e) discharge and length of both the pipes is same
 118

. 194. Select the wrong statement

(a) An equivalent pipe is treated as an ordinary pipe for all
calculations.
(b) The diameter of an equivalent pipe is uniform throughout.
(c) The length of an equivalent pipe is equal to that uf com-
p,..,und pipe.
(d) The dist.:ha.rge thrvugh an equi>a.lent pipe is rqua.l to that
of a compound pipe.
(e) The diameter of an equivalent pipe i.B equal to that uf com·
pound pipe.
195. When the pipes are in series, the total head loss is equal to the
sum of the hL"ad iuss in each pipe.
Yes 0 No 0
196. A compound pipe of diameters dh c4. and iJ,.J having lengths l1 , 4,
and la is to be replacer! by an equivalent pipe of uniform diameter ii
nud of the same length (l} as that of the compound pipe. The size of
tht· equivalent pipe iR given by
l ll l2 la
(a) ~; - ··- ' -;-
u;- dt 2 ri.,.2 d3~

~ p
(b) '
ri.,.3 ' ~3

lt ~ l,j
(c)
d4 = dl4
'
~4 ' d34

l,. ' ~ I
'3
(d)
d" d,_5 ~5 ' dJ5

197. In case of now through parallel pipes

;a)
the head loss for all the pipes is ssme
the t•;ta.l disch:.1rge is equal to the sum of discharges in the
tb'
various pipes
{c) the total hea.ri loss is the sum of head losses in the various
pipes
(d; both {a) u.nd (b)
(e} both (b) and (c)

198. The siphon will work satisfa.ctoril.v, if the mi.ni:mum pressure in

the pi~ is ............... vapour pressure of liquid.
(a; equal to (b) c.:_ Jess than (c) :more than

199.. ~ we.tet.:
ha.n;m~ in pipes occurs due to sudden change in the
velocity of fioWlllg liqmd. ·
.Agree 0 Disagree 0
 119

200. The purpose of a surge tank is

(a) to control the pressure V"a.riations due to rapid changes in
the pipe line fl.ow
(b) to eliminate water hammer possibilities
(c) to regulate flow of water to turbines by pro>iding necessary
retarding head of water
(d) aU of the above
(e) none of the above
291. An air ve~sel is provided at the summit in a syphon to
{a) avoid interruption in the flow
(b) increase discharge
(c) increase velocity
(d) maintain pressu..'"€: difference.
(e) none of the above

2{)2. A sinhon is used to connec: two resen·oirs at different levels

intervened by a. high ridge.
True False 0
~. The pressure of fluid due :;o hammt>r blow is
1a) directly proportional to density of fiuiri
(b) inverseiy proportional to dt•ns.ty oh'l.uid
(c) directly proportional to (d<:nsity)li 2 of fluid
(d) inversely proportiona.l tr, (density)LZ of fluid
(e) none of the above

204. The hammer blow in pipes occurs when

(al the pipt:> is hit with hammer
(b) there is excessi\'e lea.ka.ge in the pipe
(c) the pipe bursts under high pressure of fluid
(d) the :tlow of fluid through the pipe is suddenly brought to
rest by dosing of the valve
(e) the flow of fluid through the pipe is gradu:llly brought io
rest. by closing of the valve

295. The magnitude of water hammer depends upon thP

(a) length of pipe line
(b) elastic proporties of the pipe material
(c) elastic proporties of the liquid flowing through the pipe
(d) speed at which the valve is closed
(e) all of the above
(j) none of the above
. ____.120 ..

206. .A nozzl.e is generally made of

(a) cylindrical shape {b) convergent shape
- ( c ) divergent shape (a) convergent-divergent shape
207. A nozzle placed at the end of a water pipe line discharges water
at a
(a) low pressure (b) high pressure
(c) low velocity (ci) high velocity
208. The power transmitted through the nozzle is ma::rimum when
the head lost due to friction in the pipe is
(a) equal to the total supply head
(b) one-third of the total supply head
(c) one-half of the total supply head
(d) two-third of the total supply head
{e) none of the above ·
209. The diameter of the nozzle {a) for maximum transmission of
power is given by

Sfl )!
])5 ·.~
1a) d= (~- (b) d= (. 8fl _:
. Ds 1
(c) d= (
\
j4
Sfl• I '. (d)
ci =
( ])5
8fl J\t
\vhere D = Diameter of pipe,
f = Darcy's coefficient of friction for pipe, and
l = Length of pipe.
210. The velocity of flow is same at all points in the cross-s'C'ction of
a channel.
True 0 False 0
211. According to Chezy's formula, t.he discharge through an open
channel is
(a} A '1/mxi (b) 0 vmxi (c) .AG

(d) mivAxG (e) none of the above

where A = Ares:
of flow,
0 = Chezy's constant,
m = Hydraulic mean depth, and
i = Uniform slope in bed.
212. According to Manning's fcrmula, the discharge through an open
channel is
(a) A M ml/2 i 2i3 (b) A .M m213 i 11~
(c) Alfll Jf2/3 m i (d) ..4.213 J1flf3 m i
where .M -Manning's constant.
 Hydraulics and Fluid MJ chan ice 121

213. When the fiow in 'an open channel is_gradually varied, the flow
is said to be ~
(al steady uniform flow (b} steady non-uniform flow
(ci unsteady uniform flow (d) UilSteady non-unif• lrDl flow

A channel is sa.id to be of most economical cross-section, if

(a) it gives ma::cimum d?scharge for a given cross-sectional area
and bed slope
(b) jt has minimum wetted perimeter
(c) it involves lesser excavat;on for the designed amoun~ of
llischarge
(d) all of the above
{P) none of the above

215. The discharae throu:.!h a channel of rect<l.ngular sertion will be

ma..:dmum, if -
(a) its depth is twice the brearith
(bl its breadth is twiC'P the depth
(c) its depth is thrice the breadth
(d) its breadth is t-hricP. the depth

216 The most economir~al seciion of a rectangular channel is one

which has hydraulic radius equal to
(a) half the depth (b) half the breadth
(c) twice the depth (d) twice the breadth

217. The discharge through a. channel of trapezoidal section is

ma::rimum when
(a) width of channel at the top is equal to twice the width at
the bot'"...om
(b) depth of channel is equal to the width at the bottom
(c) the sloping side is equal to half the width at the top
(d) thE' sloping side is equal to the width a.t the bottom
{e) none of the above
218. The most eco:1omica.l section of a. trapezoidal channel is one
which has hydraulic mean depth equal to
(aJ t depth (OJ ! breadth
(c) i sloping side (d) :i (depth+ breadthJ
219. The discharge through a channel of circular section 'dll be
ma:rim.um when the depth of water is ......... the diameter uf the
circular channel.
(a) 0·18 times (b) U·34 times (c) 0·67 times
(a) 0·81 times (e) 0·95 times
 220: The velocity through a channel of circular section w'Jl be
-·--ms.-:.'timum wlien-thedepth of water is ......... the diameter of the
circn1sr channel.
(a) 0·18 times (b) 0·34 times (c) 0·67 times
{dJ 0·81 times (e) 0·95 times
221. The highest efficiency is obtained with a channel of ........ .
section.
(al · circular {b) souare (1;) rectaugul.&r
(d) trapezoidal (e) triangular

2"22. The depth of water in a ehanne! correspondiug to the minimum

spedfic energy is known as critical depth.
Agree ;::J Disagree 0
223. If.the £it·pth of water in "'n onen channel is great.er tha.'l the
critical dep' h. the fiu,,· is eallet.l
ta) critical rlow (I,) turbulent flow
(c) tranquii flow (d) torrential flow

224. If t-he d£·pth o! water in an open channel is less than the critical
dt:pth, the flow is called
(tt) critical .flow (b) turbulent flow
(c) tranquil fim?; (d) torrential flow
225. The flow at critical depth in an open channei is called torrential
flow.
Yes 0 No 0
225. The dischar;.re in an open channel corresponding to critical
depth is -
(a) zero {b) :c.inimum (C) ma:dmum

2:27. The most c:.llicient section of a. channel is

(a} triangular (b) rectangular (Cj square
(d) trapezoidal (e) cireulsr
2:28. The .r'..se, in water lev-el, which occurs during the transformation
of the unstable shooting flow to the stable streaming flow is called
h.yd.rau.!..ic jump.
Yes 0 No 0
m. The cr.iticsl depth meter is used to measure
(a) velocity of ftow in an open channel
(b) depth of flow in an op.en channel
(c) hydraulic jw:np (d) depth of channel
(e) none of the above
 HyilrauUcs and Fluid .Meckanice 123

230. In a vent'lll'ifiume, the fl~w ta.kes-pliice at:-·-·.-

(a) atmospheric pressure (b) gauge pressure
(c) absolute pressure (d) none of the above
23lL .A venturiilnme is a. iiumed structure constructed across a.
channt>l by restricting its -width.
'l'rue O False O
A venturiiiume ia used to measare
(a) pressure of ~quid (b) discharge of liquid
(c) pressure diff~rence between two points in a channel
(d J pressure difference between two points in a. pipe
(e) none of the above
233. When a cylindrical vessel. conta.mmg some liouid, i:> rotated
about its vertical a.:::::is, the liquid surface is depressed down at the
a..ris of ita :rotation and rises uu near the walls of the 7essel on a.Il
sides. This type of now is k.no;.,.n a.s
{a) steady iiow (b) turbuieont flow (c) vort-ex flow
(d) uniform now (e) non-uniform flow
:!.-":4. The rise of liquid along the walls of a. :revolving cyli::1der about
the icitis.l level is ......... the depression of the liquid at the axis of
rotation.
(a) same a.s (b) less than (c) more ths.n
Z!S. When a. cy!.indrica.l vessel conta.ming liquid is revolved a.bout its
vertical axis at a constant angular velocity, the pressure
(a) varies as the square of the radial distance
{b) increases linearly as its radial dista.nce
(cJ increases a.s the square of the radial dista.nc~·
(d) dec:-ea.ses as the square of the radial Ji:>tance
236. When a cvlindrica] vessel cont.ainio.r liquid is re,-oh·ed, the
su.."face of the li~p.1id takes the shape of -
(c.) a tri:mgie (b) a paraboloid tc) an dlip:se

Zi. The total pressure on the top of a closed cylindrical vessel

competely filled up with a liquid is
(aj directly proportional to 1radius) 2
(b) inversely proportional to (radillil) 2
(c) directly proportional t-o (radius)~
(d) inversely proportional to (radius)~
~- The total pressure on the bottom of a closed cylindrica.l vessel
competely filled up with a. liquid is the sum of the total centrifugal
pre!> sure and the weight of the liquid in the >esseI.
Coi'l'ect O bcorrect II
LJ
 124 Bygraulics and J!luid_ Mechanics

239..Theflow-of__wa.ter-through the hole in the bottom of a wash

basin is an example of
(a) steady flow (b) unsteady flow !c) uniform flow
(d) free vortex (e) forced vortex
240. The total pressure on the top of a closed cylindrical vessel of
radius (rl completely filled up with liquid of specific w-eight (w) and
rotating at (w) r.1d/sec about its vertical axis, is

(a)
-::ww-r·
.. (b)
-::ww~-fl
'-. 4g 4g
-::ww~ 7:U1w2r2
(c)
4g (d) ·-2g

241. The increase in pressure at the outer edge of a drum of radius

(r) completely filled up with liquid of density (?) a.nd rotating at (w)
rad/sec is
(a)
..
pw-r 6
(b) 2pw 2r 2
pw·r- • 0

pcu¥
(c) (dl
•""I
~
242. The tangential velocity of the water element having a free
vortex is
(a) dire~tly proportional to its distance from the centre
(b) inversely proportional t-o its distance from the centre
(':: directly proportional to its (distance)z from the centre
(d) inversely proportional to it3 (distance):: from the centre
(e) none of the above
213. A ideal fluid is frictionless and incompressible.
True O FaJse 0
244 A rotameter is used to measure
(a:) velocity of fluids (b) velocity of gases
(c) flow of fluids (d) specific gravity of liquid!"

24.5. A hydrometer is used to measure

(a) velocity of fluids {b) velocity of gases
(c) flow of fluids (d) specific gravity of liquids

24:6. A hot wire anemometer is used to measure velocity of gases.

Yes 0 No 0
247. According to Newton'.s law of viscosity, the shear stress ones
layer of a fluid is directly proportional to the rate of shear w...rain.
True 0 False 0
Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics 125

248. .A thick liquid like a syrup has a ..... :.:: viscosity than a light ,
li'-Jnid like water.
(a) lesser {b) greate~
249. The shear stress between the two liquid layers is ......... propor-
tional to the distance between two layers.
(a) directly (b) indirectly

250. Newton's la.'v of viscosity is a relationship between

(a) pressure, velocity a.pd temperature
(b) shear stress and rate of shear strain
(c) shear stress and velocity
(d) rate of shear strain and temperature

251. The unit of absolute dscosity in C.G.S. units is

(a) kg-sec/m2 {b) Newton-sec/m2 (c) p::>ise
(d) stoke (e) m 2/sec

252. The unit of dymanic viscosity in M.K.S. units is

{a) kg-secfm 2 (b) Newton-sec/m2 (c) poise
(d) stoke (e) m 2isec
253. The unit of dynamic· viscosity in M. K. S. and S. I. units is
same.
Yes n
Xo u
254. One poise is equal to
(a) 1 dyne-sec/cm2 (b) 0·0102 kg·sec/m 2
(c) O·l Newton-sec/m2 (dj all of the above
255. The kinematic viscosity is the
(al :ratio of absolute viscosity to the density of the liquid
(b) ratio of density of the liquid to the absolute viscosity
{c) product of absolute viscosity and density of the liquid
{d) product of absolute viscosity and mass of the liquid
(e) none of the above

Stoke is the unit of

(u:) absolute viscosity in C.G.S. units
(b) kinematic viscosity in C.G.S. units
(c) kinematic viscosity in M.K.S. units
(d) d,ynamic viscosity in M.K.S. units
(e) dynamic viscosity in S.I. units
257. One st-oke is equal to
(a) l mm2 /sec (c) l mijaec
 1:26

, 258. The dyna.mie-vi.scosity-Of the.-liquid .••...••• with rise in tempera.

ture.
(a) remain unaffected (bl inc:::-eases (c) decreases

259. A fluid ha \·ing no viscosity is bown a~

(a) real fluid (b) ideal fluid (c) newtonhn ficid
rrl) non-newtonian fluid (e) none of the .1.bova

ZfiV. .-\·fluid whose viscos:tv doe:; not .:h,1n\.:•' ,,.-it.h tee r-ate of
def•>rmation or she:ir strnin is known as .
'"' ( cL) real fluid (b) ideal fluid v 1 newtonian fluid
('ll non-newtonian tluid (el none of the abo.-e
2iil. A fluid wh.,.::e ,·iscositv cbnges w!:h the '"::tte of defor:rntion
n~ :-;ilear :'itrain i.~ known a!-; rlcn-ntwtonia.n tluid.
Tr:.te c False
262. Thr• sh··:tr ;;tress-sorain :;raph for a newi:{)ni.a;a fluiri i-< a.
't) str ti~ht line ;b) par:1bo lie em"Yt:
,. : hyperbolit' eu.r7e (d) elliptical

253. Thr' 3tlt'tr :;t:t>:>s-:;train graph for a non-new::.vnia.n fluid is a

curve.
Correct LJ IncciTect n
2M. The dynamic viscosity of gase:> ........• with rise in tern:_:Jerature.
(al remain una.if.;cted (bi increas;>s it:) dt:creases

253. A flow in which the visco:;itv of fluid is domiruti:n'-' over the

inertia force is called · ·
(a) steady flow (b) unsteady flow (r.: laminar flow
(dl turbuient flow (e) none of the a.bove

200. A flow in which ......... force is dominating over the viscosity

is called turbulent flow.
(a) elastic (b) surface tension
fc) viscous (d) inertia

267. Lamina.r flow ......... pJ.ace at very low velocities.

:a;) takes {b) does not take
268. Turbulent flow t3lws place at high velocities.

0 Disagree
The velocity at which the iamp!sr flow stops, known as w
(a) velocity of approach (b) !ower critical velocity
(c) higher cr.itics1 'lelocity (d) none ofthe above
 Hydraulics and Fluid .Meck'lni!}8 127

270. The velocitv at which the turbulent flow starts--is-known-as--

higher critical veiocit.y.
Yes U Ko 0
Reynold's number is the ratio of the inertia force to the
(a) surface tension f.)rce (b) viscous force
(c) gravity foree (d) "?la..stic force
(e) preO!surc force
The flow in a pipe is h n:rinar. when Reynold number is less
than 2000. "'
True False 0
273. The tlow in a pip•' is turbule11t when Pveynold number is
(ai le:>!i than ::?!_H)O •Dl betweea 2000 and :!800
!C) IDOl"" rh·:n :!SOn , d) none of the above

274. I'h·~ ·luw in e, p:pe l" nei:lt-·r l.1minar nor turbulent when
Rt'ynold numb-•r is
(a) les::l than ::!O•J•} 10~ b,:tween 2000 and 2800
'c~ mnrP than ~~(Hi : :i) none of the above
275. The vdocit,· co::-resno~.iin.: t-o Reynold number of :::!000 is
called · ·
(a) sub-sonic ve!ocin- ;u) ,;uper-::;onic ve:iocit.y
(") lower critical velocity (d) higher critical velocity
{e) non~:uf t-he abovt-

2i6. The vdoci1_y •~nt·respondsn-;: 'o .R-::ynold number of 2800, is

calieti
: b': .mper-sonic velocity
~·d1 ::.one of the above

277. The io~s uf head. due to viscosity for laminar flow in pipes is
calit>•l

Diameter of pi:J:-·.
Lengt;~ of pip"'.
·r = \-~~loci~.'-· o:' ti:l~ Lquid ir. the pipe.
,u = Viscosit:: of t::J,. rquic',, and
u: = Speci:fr~· w~i.~n~ r~f the flowing liquid.
Zi8. The loss of head due to friction m a. pipe of uniform diameter
in which a. \·iscous now is taking piace. is - -
(a) ljR_._ (b) 4/1?.,, (c) 16/P.N d) 64:/EN
Reynolci n-:~mbe!'.
 - ' ~ . •·
- . / :··
128 Hydraulics and Fluid .Mechanic.s ·

279. The torque required to overcome viscous resistance of a foot·

step ben.ring is -------- ------ ---- · · .
-:-:2.a.:.VR ,.~fi.NR~
(al (b)
60t 60t
-:-:z,;;._NR3
I (. ~ . (d)
BOt
-:-::.:t_YR5
: ~) (jl nont> o:· the above
60t
where ,u. = Viscosity of the oii,
N = Speed of the shaft,
R = Radius of the shaft, and
t = Thiclmess of the oil film.
280. The torque required to overcome viscous resistance of a collar
bearing" is
(a) {bl
I
(d)
where R 1 and R_z = utL'!1lal and internal .radius of collar
I
l
281. In a foot-step bearing, if the speed of the shaft is doubled,
then the torque required ro overcome the viscous resi--tance will I
be
(a) dnuble \·~) four times (c} eight times I
(d) sixteen rimes (e) none of the above I
Z82. L11 a. foot-step bearing, if the radius of the shaft is doubletl, then i
the torque reqdred to overcome the viscous resistance will be
(a) double (b) four times {c) eight times
(d) sixteen times (e) none of the above
The coefficient of \'isco::;ity may be determined
(bl capillary tube method (b) orifice type viscometer
(r) rotating cylintler method (d) falling sphere meth< d
(e) all of the above (f) none of the above

,
~- The coefficient of viscosity (in poises) is given b.v lt
J::
{ 1·8 \
P.= ! 0·0022 t - -.- 1 x sp. gr. of liquid gL
\ t I ~-

This equation is mwd to detennine the viscosity of liqmds

by
(&) capillary tube method l b) orifice type viscometer :~~::_·1
,.l~.·
(G) rotat-ing cylinder method (d) falling sphere method
~:~5~~~
 285. Bulk modulus of a fluid is the ratio of
(a) shear stress to shear strain
(b) increase in volume to the viscosity of fluid
( cl increase in pressure to the volumetric strain
(d) critics! velocity to the ·velocity of fluid
(e) none of the above

236. Bulk modulus of a. tl.uid ......... as the pressure increases.

(a) remains same (b) dt>creases (Cl inc.re~s

257. T'.ne volume of a fluid ...... .. az the pressure increasE's.

(a) remains same ib) decrc·:;-<es (c) increases

283. The specific weight of compressiblt: fluids does not remain

const~"'lt .

True u False u
289 The pressur<' of air ........ with the increase of height from the
surface of the earth.
(al does not ehange ; ,. ) mcrPases

290. Tht' veiocity of :>ound in a rlu;rl is

r--
(a) 'Yr K ..= (b) V fi.. F. (r) v ~iK
(d) K.: (P) none of chi' abow
wh<>re K = Buik motlnlu,-, a.nd
.: = Dt•mity nf the ft:uhL

291 When the }fa.eh number is ks- than unity. the tlo"' is ,·ailed
('r) sub.sonic rlow (hl ::onic tlow ''') t<Upt·I . ''11ic rlow
\d) hyper-sonic tlow I e) nont· of tho: ~bo,·e

292. \\'hen the )fach number is eaua: to unity, the flow is l'a.lled
sonic ftow. '
True C False

293. \\"hen the liach number i:; between ......... the flow is called
super-sonic flow.
ta) land 2·5 (b) :?·;")and 4 (c) 4 and 6
(d) land 6 •e) none of the abo>"e

294. When the )iach number i" more than ·6, the flow- is called
(a~ sub·sonic flow (11) sonic flow 1c} super-sonic flow
(d) hyp!>r-sonic flow (e) none of the aiy1Ve
9-lLE.
295. The :ratio of velocity of fluid in a.n undisturbed stream to
the velocity of sound wave-ia-kriow:i:i&s-:J.~.Iacn-.:tinmber.
Yes 0 No 0
296. A :Bow is cJlled sub-sonic, if the Mach !lumber is
(a) less than unity (b) unity fc) between I and 6
(a) mor<~ than 6 {e) none of the above
297. A :Bow is called sonic, if the .Mach number is unity.
Agree.... 0 Disagree 0
298. .~ flow is c.a.lled super-sonic if the
(a) velocity of flow is very high
(b) di;cha.rge is difficult. to mea..-;ure
\C) ~Ia.rh number is between l and 6
(d) none of the above

~ .A flow is called hyper-sonic, if the Mach number is

(a) less than unity (b) u:1ity
(c) between ! and 6 1 d) none of the a bon:
300. A point, in a. compressibl·~ flow where th" velocity nf fluid is
zero, is called
(a) critical point ! b) vena contraeta
(c) stagna.tinn p··,int (d) none of the above
301. Whl'n a plate is immersed in a liyuid parallel t-o the :flow, it
will b<> subjel't.eu t.o a pressure ......... that if the sarre plate is immer-
sed perpendicular to the flow.
(a) less than (b) more than
302. The force exert-ed bY a. moving fluid on an immersed body is
directly pnportiona.l to the ratt> c,f change of momentum due t-o the
presencf" of the body. This statment is caUP-d
(a) Xe\1-ton's law of motion (b) Newton's law of cooling
(r; Xewton's law of dscosity (d) Xe\\ion's law of :resistance

303. \Vbe: .ever a pla.te is held immersed at some angle with the __
direction of flow of the liquid, it is subjected to some pressure. . ~e
Cl>mponent of this pressure, in the direction of flow of the liqmcl, lS
known as
(rz) lift (b) drag ( c} stagna-.;ion pres$ure
(rll bulk modulus (e) nnne of the above
304 Whene\·er a pl·tk is held immersed at some angle ·w:ith th~ -
directio:; of flow of the liquid, it is :;ubjected tD some
 131

The component.of this pressure, at right angles to the direction of

flow of the liquid is kn•>wn as lift.
True 0 False O
305. According to Prandtl-Blassius relation, the thicknes,; of
boundary layer in laminar flow is
5x 5·835x
(a) (b)
v1 R ... ,
0·3'77x
!C) (d)
(.R,..xllt5 (R.'<x) 1;s -...
where = Distmce between the leading edge of the bodv and
the section. where thickness of bounddrv laver is
required, and ~ •
R ,x Revnold's number at a. distance x f:-i,m the leading

300. Accor:ling to Prandtl-Bla.asius relation, the thick.'l.ess of boun-

dary hyer in a~ turbulent flow is
5x ;)·83.'5
(a) {b)
-IR..,.x -/ R ..,::.
0·377x ;j·377z
(c) (d) I w ..,..,. .;
(RNX) 115 -"'"~-·

307. The separation of now occurs when the hydrodyn·1 mic boundary
layer thickness is reduced t'l zero.
Agree 0 Disogret> 0
300. The force present in a moving liq•:id is
(a) inertia force (b' viscou,; force
(c) gravity force (d; surface tension force
(e) pressure force {.f) eia.stic force
(s7) all of tb.e a0o...-e {k) none of the abO\P
369. Viscous force is the ......... of she1rstress riue to -.·i=-cosit-.~· and
<'rosss-eectional area oi flow.
(a) sum (b) difference (':) product (·l) ra.tio
310. Rurlace tension force is the produr-t of surface tension per unit
length and cross-sectional area of flow.
Correct 0 IncorrPct
311. The ratio of the intertia force to •·he ,-iscous force i.,; ··alled
(a) Reynod's number (b) Fronde',; number
(c) Weber's number (d) Euler's number
\e) .Mach number
 132

312. The mtio of the inertia for~e_to the grai-ity_force is .caii~(r­

Froud's number.
Agree 0 Disagree 0
313. The ratic. of the inertia force to the ••.......•.is called Euler's
number.
(a) pressure force (b) elastic force
(c J surface tension force (d) viscous force
(e) fo!ravity force

314. The ratio of the inertia force to the surface tension force is
called Weber's number.
Correct 0 In"orrect 0
315. The ratio of the inertia force to the elastic force is called
(a) Reynold's number (b) Fronde's number
(c) Weber's number (d) Euler's number
(e) Mach number (j) none of the above
316. Fronde ·s number is the ratio of inertia force to
(a) pressure force ib) elastic force
(cJ gravity for<!e (d) surface tension force
(e) viscous force

317. Select the correct "ta.tement

(a.\ Weber's number is the ratio of in~rtia. force to da~tk
force.
(b) Weber's number is the ra.tio of gra.vxty force to surface ten-
sion force.
(c' Weber's number is the mtio of viscous fo-rce to pressure
force.
(d1 Weber's number is the ratio of inertia force to surface
tension forre.
318. Euler's number is the ratJ.o of.. .......force to pressure force.
(a) inertia (bl gravity (c) viscous

319. Reynold's number is the ratio of inertia force to

(a) pressure force (b) el&stic force (c) grd.vity force
(d) viscous force (e) surface tension force
320. Mach number ......... upon elastic force.
(al depends (b) does nut depend

I
1I l
Hydraulics and Fluid M echanic8

L (b) 2. (a)
ANSWERS

3. (e) 4. (d) 5. (b)

133

! 6. (d) 7. (c)
! 8. True \:1. (b) 10. Agree
1 ll. False 12. (al 13. (a) H. (d)
l 15. (a)
16. (c) li. Agree 18. (c) 19. (C' 20. Correct
21. (a) 22. (a) :23. (a) 0.
..;..":t. (b) :!5. (b)
26. Agree 27. lbl 28. (b) 29. d) 30. Incort"ect
31. (c) 32 . .Agree 33. Yes 34. (a} 3'5. tb)
36. False 37. (e) 38. (c) 39. (d) 40. (c)
i
j 41. (c) 42. Agree 4~. (e) 4-!. (c) 45. (c)
I
4:6. (b) .~
~~. (c) -l:l:i. (c) 49. (d; 50. (a)
.i
1'
H
51. (b) 52. (a: 53. (c) 54. (c) 55. (c)
d
J 56. (bi 57. r:) ;).'J. ;C), (A.), 59. (cl 60. (d)

l 61. True 62. (c)

0

H3.
(E), {B)
(b)
64. (b) 65. Agree
65. (tt) 67. (c) 68. (b) 69. (b) 70. Correct
f
71. (bl 72. (i, 73. (b) 74. True i5. (c}
1
76. {b) 77. No iS. (a) 79. (11) 80. False
8!. Agree
86. (d)
-·
8'' (b)
87. (d;
'"'
~0'. (a:
88. (aJ
8-l: (c)
89. False
85.
90.
True
(a)
91. (b) 92. (c) 93. Disagree 9-J:. (a) 95. \d)
96. (e) 97. {c) 98. (al 99. {b) 100. (b\
lOl. Yes 102. (b) 103. (a! 104. (c) 105. False
106. (a) 107. (a) 108. (bl 109. (a) 110. (a)
ill. {e) 112. (d) 113. (b) 114'. (c) U5. (c)
116. (a) 117. (h) llS. (c) 119. (d) 120. (c)
121. (c} 122. (b) 123. (e) 124. (a) 125. (a)
126. False 127. {d) l:!S. (a) 129. (b) 130. False
131. (el 132. (d) 133. (a) 134. (d) 135. (a)
136. (b) 137. (c) 1as. (d) 139. Agree 140. (c)
141. (c) H2. (c) i43. (a) 144. False 145. (c)
146. (c) 147. (cl 148. (b) 149. (c) 150. (d)
151. {b) 152. Agree 15:3. ,e) 154. (a) 155. (d)
156. {a} 157. (b) 158. False 159. (c) 160. (d)
161. (a) 162. Wrong 163. (d) 164. (a) 165. C-orrect
166. (a.) 167. Trne 168. (C) 169.' (It) 170. (b)
171. (e) 172. (c) 173. (c) 174. {b) 175. (b)
176. (c) 177. (c) 178. (d) 179. True 180. {c)
181. (d) 182. (a) 183. (b) 184. (a) 185. (c)
 134

186. (cj. 187. (b) 188. Incorrect 189. False--190;-(b)

191. (b) 19.2. (e) 193. (c) 194. (el 195. Yes
196. (d) 197. (d) 198. (c) 199. Agree 200. (d)
201. (a) 202. True 203. (c) 204. (d) 205. (e)
206. (b) .207. (d) 208. (b) 209. (c) 210. False
211. (c) 212. (b) 213. (b) 214. :d) .215. {b)
.216. (a) 217. (c) 218. (a) 219. (e) 220. (d)
2.21. (d) 222 . .Agree 223. (c) 224. {d) 225. No
226. (c) 227. (d) 228."'Yes 229. (c) 230. (G)
231. True 232. (b) 233. (c) 234. {a) 235. (a)
236. (b) 237. (c) 238. Co:rect. 239. (d) 240. (c)
241. {c) 242. (b) 243. Trne 244. (c} 245. {dl
246. Yes 247. True 248. (bl 249. (b) 250. (b)
251. (c) 252. (a) 253. No 254. (d) 255. (a)
256. lbl 257. (b) 258. (c) 259. f b) 260. tc)
261. ':frue 262. {al 263. CorrPct 264. (b) 265. (c)
266. (d) 267. (a) 268. Agt·ee 269. (b) 270. Yt-s
271. ib) 272. True 273. (c) 274. (b) 275. (cl
276. (d) 2i7. (d) 278. (cJ 279. (d) 200. (d)
28!. (a) 282. (d) 283. (e) 284. (b) 285. (c)
286. (c) 287. (b) 288. True 289. (c) 290. (b)
291. {a) 292. True 293.
(d) 294. (d) 295. Yes
296. (a) 297. Agree 298.(c) 299. (d} 300. (c)
301. (a) 302. (d) 303.
tb) 304. True 305. (a) !'
306. (c)
311. (a)
307. Agree 308. (g)
312. AgreP 313. (a)
309. (c) 3!0. Incorrect
314. Correct 315. (e)
l
J
316. (c) 317. (d) 3Hl. (a) 319. (d) 3:!0. (a} j
J

I
 4
H vdraulic 1\tlachines
"'

1. The force e.xerted by a jet of water impinging nor:nally

on a fixed plate is
waY waV wav~ tcaV~
' (a) {b) (C) (d)
l 2g g -2g-
']

wht>re w = Specific weight of water,

17, = Cross-sectionv.l area. of jet, and
J f = Velocity of jet.
Ii
I 2. The force es:erted by a jet of water impi..."lging on a fi.:.:::ed pia.te
inclined at an angle tJ with the j<>t is
waV . waV .
(a) - -X sm 1J (Ol - - :om 8
2g g
waV~ . <")
('i) --- x s:m:;8
g

3. The force es:erted by a. jet of wat-er impinging normally on a.

nlate which due to the imna.ct of jet, moves in the direction of jet
~th a velocity v iii •
we: tV -v) wa (V-t-')
{a) (b) -
2g g
wa (V-v1 2 wa (V-vP
{c) (d)
2g fJ
"
4. A jet of WRter enters and leaves a fi::!ed curved vane tanaen-
tially. The force of jet along perpendicular to the vane is zero. -
True 0 False

135
 136 llyilraulic Machines

5. .A jet of wa.ter enters a.'ld leaves a fixed~ed-va.ne--~

tangentially. The force of the jet along normal to the vane is
waV2 waV2
(a) - - I cos ct.-'- cos
g ' '
(3 1 (b) - - (COS 7.-COS
g S;
.

waV2 . . , . (3) waV2 • •

(c) --(smct.,.sm (d) - g - (sm 7.-sm ~)
g
where ct. and~ = Irlet and outlet angles of the jet ;:-espectively.
6. .A jet of water enters and leaves a moving curved vane. The
force of jet in the direction of motion--of the vane is

ia) gwaV (V.,.+V, 1) (b)

waV
--IJ-tf7 .,.-V, 1 )

waV2 • , waV~ __
(t! - -g1 J1 ,.·-:-~a!'
7
. \d) ---u
g
7 7
,-~• u:1l

where V, and V.:J = Velocities of whirl at inlet and outlet

respectively.
7. The ratio of the normal force of jet of W?-ter on a plate inclined
at an angle a as compared to that when the plate is normal to jet,
i.:;
(a) lf-v"2 (b) 1/2 (c) l t:l) v2
3. The under shot water wheels are those in which
.(a) the wheel runs entirely by the weight of water
(bl the wheel runs entirel.v by the impulse of water
(c) the wheel runs partly by the weight of water and partly
by the impul::;e of watt'r
(d) none of the above
9. The breast. water wheels are those in which the wheel runs
partly by the weight of water and partly by the implu.se of water.
True 0 False 0
10. The overshot water wheels are those in which the wheel runs
entirely by the ......... of water.
(a) weight (b) impulse
11. Braking jet in an impulse turbine is used
(a) to break the jet of water
(b) to bring the runner to rest in a short time
(c) to change the direction of runner e
(d) none of the above
12. Work done by a turbine ......... upon the weight of water
:flowing per second.
(a) depends (b) does not depend
 Hyi.ratilic .Machine8 137

13. A Pelton wheel is an

(a) axial flow impulse t"!ll'bine
(b) inward flow impulse turbine
(r:) outward flow impulse turbine
(d) inward flow reaction turbine
(e) outward flow reaction turbine

H. In an
impulse turbine, the jet of water impinges on the bucket
with a low velocity.
True 0 False
15. An impulse turbine is used for
(a) low head of water (bi high head of water
(I') medium hesd of water (·i: high dischargt'
i 16. In an impulse turbine, the pressure oi water both at entering
and lea.,·ing the vanes, is atmospheric.

l 17. The hydraulic

(al
~fficiency
fl Disagrc>e

of an impulse turbine is the

ratio of thP actual power pro·iuced by the turbine w the
energy actually supplied b_Y the turbine
J (In ratio of the actual work a.-aiiable at the turbine to the
f' energy imparted to the wheel
(··) ratio of the work done on the wheel to the energy of the
I jet
I
;
(d' none of the abovP

13. The mechr:.nica.l efficiency of an impuls~ turbine is

(a) ratio of the actual power produ;!ed by the turbine to the
energy actually supplied by the turbine
'b) ratio of the actual work available at the turbine w the
energy imparted to the whePl
(!') ratio of the work done on the wheel to the energy of the
jet
(d) none of the above
19. The overall efficiency of an impu~e turbine is the ratio of the
actual power produced by the turbine to the energy actually supplied
•by the turbine.
Yes 0 No
20. The hydra.ulic eqiciency of an impulse turbine is ma::timum
when velocity of wheel is ......... of tlle jet velochy.
1a) one-fou."th ;b) one-ha.-li
(c) three.f.,mth · (d) double
 138

21. The maximum hydraulic efficiency of an. impulse turbine-is-----

1 +c-os~ . 1-cos ¢
(a) 2 (b) 2

(c) (d)

where p= Angje of blade tip at outlet.

22. .A double overhung Pelton wheel hss

(a) two jets (b) two hmnel"3
(c) fou.r jeta {d) four rnnnei"i'l
23. The width of the buckst for a Pelton wheel is generally ........ .
the diameter of jet.
(a) double (h) three times (c) four times
(d) five times (el si::l: times

24. The depth of the bucket for a Pelton >:Theel is .generally ........ .
the diameter of jet.
{a) equal to (bl 1·2 times (cl !.·8 times
(dJ double (d) .:?-:'5 times

ZS. Which of the following is not an impulse turbine ?

{al Girsd tu.rbine (b) Turgo turbine (C) Bsn.ki turbine
(d) Pelton wheel {e) Kaplan turbine

26. T:he number of buckets on the periphery of a Pelton w-heei is

giYen by
D D ·o
(G) 2d +5 (b) :!d -i-1.
D ,_
(c; --...f-~o (d) ..E_-'-:!0
2d . :!d .

27. The ma:.rimum number of jeta,generaliy, employed in an impulse

turbine without jet interference are
(a) twv (b) four (c) si::l: (d) eight

28. In a reaction turbine, the water enters the wheel under

pressure and flows over the vanes.
Correct 0 Incorrect
29. In a. reaction turhine, the preseure head of water, while t:!.owinu
over the ya.m~s. is con-werted into• kinetic head before leaving th~·
wht;"!eL

Agree li Disagree
 30. In.a. reaction turbine, the draft tube is used
!a} to run the turbine full
(b l to. prevent air to en~ the turbine
(c) to increase the head of water by an amount equs.l to the
height of the nmner outlet. above the tail race
{d) to tra.nsport water to downstream
(e) none c.f'the above
31. Which of the following statement is correct ?
(a) In an impulse turbine, the water impinges on the buckets
with pl'eS'8Ul:'e energy.
{b) In a reaction turbine, the water glides over the moving
vanes with kinetic energy. -
(c) In an impulse turbine. the pressure of the flowing water
remains unchanged and is equal to atmospheric pressure.
(d) In a re&ction turbine, the presstrre of the flowing wa.ter
increases after gliding over tht> vanes.
(e} all of the above
(/; none of the above
32. In an inward flow rea.ction turbine
(a) the wa.ter flows parallel to the a.::ds of the wheel
(b) the water entera at the centre of the wheel a.nd then flows
towards the outer periphery of the wileel
(c) the water enters the wheel at the outer periphery and
then flews towards the centre of th.: wheel
\d) the flow of water is partly mdia.l a.nd partly az:ia.l
33. In an o•1twa.rd flow reaction turbine
(a) the water flow;~ !>ar&llel to the a.xis of the wheel
(b)the water entel.'li a.t 1he centre of the wheel and thl')n flows
towards the outer periphery of the wheel
(c) the water entets the wheel a.t the outer periphery and thf>n
flows towa.rds the centre of the wheel
(d) the flow of water is partly mdia.l and partly e.::d&i

34. In nn &Da.l flow reaction turbine, the water fiows ......... to the
axis of the wheel.
(aJ parallel (b) perpendicular

35. In a :m.i:.Ked flow reaction turbine, the now of water is pan..

radial and partly axial.
Correct 0 lncorrecr,
 36. T'ne hydraulic efficiency of a reaction turbine,· is the ra.tio of
(a) power produced by the turbine to the energy ·actual=-Iy_ __
supplied by the tm:bine
(b) actual work available at the turbine to energy impart-ed
w the wheel
(.c} workdone on the wheel to the energy (or head of water)
actually supplied to the turbine
(d) none of the above
3i. The ra.tio of actual work availabl! at the turbine to the energy
imparted t.o the wheel is known as ........• etficieney. '""
\a\ hydraulic (b} :mechaniC:J.l (cl overall
38. The over1ll efficiency of a reaction turbine is the mtw ot
(a) power produced by the turbine to the ene!'gy actually
supplied by the turbine
(b) actual work available at the turbine to the energy imparted
to the vineel
fc) workdone on the wheal to the energy {o:r head of water)
actually supplied to the tuzhin.,
(a/ none of ~he a.bo>e
39. A Francis turbine is an outward flow rea.c""...ion turbine.
True 0 False
40. A Kaplan turbine is an a:ria.l flow reaction turbine.
C-orrect Incon-ect
41. In & Francis turbine runner, the number of hladee are
generally between
{a} 2 to 4 (b) 4: 1o S {c) 8 to 16 1d) 16 to:!-!::
42. In. a Kapian.turbine runno=r, the number of blades are generally
between
tal 2 to 4 (b) 4 to g (Gl 8 to 16 (dl Hi to 24

43. Which of the followbg is not a reaction turbine ~

(a) Fumeyron turbi."'le (b) Jonval turbine
(c) Thomson's turbine 1dJ Kaplan turbine
(e) Pelton wheel (JJ none of the above
44,. The Fu:meyron turbine is .•..•.... reaction turbine.
(a) a.n a.:riaJ flow (b) an inward .flow
{c) an outwarQ. flow (d) a mixed flow
45. 'l'he Thomson's turbine is ........reaction turbine.
(a) an &.xial flow (C) an inward flo~
(c) an outward flow (d) a mixed flow
 141

___46_,__Tb.~ po_wer developed by a turbine is

(a) directly proportional to @IB
(b) i"lversely proportional to lJ.l 12
(C) directly proportional to SSiS
(dl inversely proportional to JPI~
(e) none of.the a.b0Y~'
where H = Head of \Vater under which the turbine 1s
working.
4.i. The un.it power developed by a. turbine is
p p
(a) (b) (c) (d)
H
wnere P =Power developed by the turbine under a. head of·
water (H).
48- The speed of a turbine runner is
{a) directly proportional to H 1i 2
(b) inversely proportional to H 1'2
(c) directly proportional to H3la
(d) inversely proportional to H::J::
(e) none of the above
4.9. T'.ne discharge through a turbine -is
{a) directly proportional to H 1 '~
(bl inverseiy proportional to H 1 '2
(c) directly proportional to lJS 12
(d) ~versely proportions,l to lP 12
(e) none of the above
50. T'ne uuit speed of the turbine runner is
N N N
{a) (b) (d)-
F IF
51. The unit disch,:;rge through the turbine ill
Q Q Q Q
(a) -/B. (b) H (c) H3;: (d} HZ

52. The specific speed of a. turbine is given by the equation

(a) N -/P- (b) N ,fP (c) N ..J P {t!l} N '>/P
fPJ'A H2 H"l' l:P
53. A Pelton wheel with one nozzle is preferred for a. suecific speed
between 35 to 60 r :p.m.
0 FeJse 0
14.2
54. Which of the following t'!ll'bine is prefel"l'ed for a specine speed
of 60 to 300 r.p.m. 1
(a) Pelton wheel (b) Franeis turbine
(c} Kaplan turbine (dl none of the above

55. A Kaplan t'!ll'bine is prefer.-ed for a specific speed of 300 to 1000

r. p~m.
Yes 0 No 0
56. Which of the following turbine is pre:terred for 0 to 25 m:. head
of wat-er!
re) Pelton wheel (b) Kaplan turbine
(c 1 :Fra.ncis turbine (d) none of the above

57. A F!':Ulcis tur~ine is user1 when tne available ht:s.d of water is

(a) 0 to .25m (b! 25m to 250m (-;J above 250m

58. For 450 m head of wat-er ......... sh&Ii be used.

(a) Pelton wheel (.0) Kaplan turbine
(c) Francis twbine (i1 none of the abov~

59. A turbine is required to develop !WOO h.p. at 300 r.p.:::n. under

a head of 150 m. Which of the following turbine should be used ·?
(a) Pelton wheel with one nozzle
(bl Pelton wheel with two or more nozzles
(c) Kaplan turbine (d} Fmncis turbi.."'lf'
(e) none of the above
60. A draft tube is used with impulse rnrbines.
Yes 0 No 0
61. -~ Pelton wheel working under a constant head and discharge,
has ma::rimurn eili.ciency when the .speed ratio is
(a) 0·26 (b) 0·36 (c) f}46
(d) 0·56 (e) 0·66
62. The efficiency of a Pelton wheel workm:z under oonstant head
......... with the increase in power. ~
'(a) remains same (l;j increases (c) decreases
63. The discharze through a reaction turbine ......... with the increase
in mrit speed. ~ -
(a) remains sam ... (b l increases (c) decreases
64. The cavitation in a hydraulic machine is mainly due to
.(a) low velocitv (bi high velocity (Cl ]ow pressure
(d) high pressure (e) none of the above
 143
__ 65...___The cavitation in a. hydraulic machine
(a} causes noise and vibration of various parts
(b) makes the surface rough
(c) reduces the: discharge of a. turbine
{d) causes sudden drop in power output and efficiency
{e) all of the above
{fl none of the above

66. The cavitation in reaction turbines is avoided, to a gres,t exten

by
(a) installing the turbine below the tail race level
{b) usi:-~g
stainless steel runner of the turbine
(c) providing highly polished blades to the run.'ller
(d) running the turbine runner at the designed speed
(e) all of tho above
tj) none of the &hove

67. The specific speed of a. hydraulic turbine depends upon

tal 8peed and power developed
(b)discharge and power dt>veloped
(clspeed and head of water
(d) speed, power developed and head of water
{e) none of the above

68. Which of the f0Uowing statement is wrong ?

(a) The reaction turbines sre used for low head and hign
discharge.
(b) The angle of ta.per on draft tube is less than 8".
(c) An impulse mt'binE' is generally fitted <Jlightly abo>e the
tailrace.
(d) A Fmncis turbine is a.n impulse r.urbine.
(e) all of the above
(-j) none of flhe a.bov~

69. The specific speed of a turbine is the spet·d of :1n imagin'll'Y

turbine, identical with the ghen turbit!e,wbich
(n) d<>liYPrs unit diseha.rtze under unit head
(b) d..:liver:>. umt diScharge under unit speed
(c) de\elopa uiJit horse power undt>r unit head
(cl} de\·elops unit. horse oower und"r 'lllit speed
{t) none of the above
 '10, Match the co:r.rect answe-r from Gro7tp B for the given state.
ments in Group A.

Group A GrmtpB

(a) Yelocity of ~ound in a. fluid i:S (.-! sub-sonic

(b) ·_When- }Inch number is 4. war:
the flow is (BI
'.!
(c) Thickness of boundary layer
in a laminar flow is
(C) v K/:;.
(d) Foree exert-ed by a jet of 5x
(.D)
W8;.ter impingi~g nerma !ly on ,.;_ R,,;r
a nxed p1ate IS
tE) super-sonic
IF, P,'..JH

'11. In a centrifugal pump casing the flow of wa.ter leaving the

impeHt>r is
(a) radial (bl rectilinear 1r) centrifug:i.l
(d) free vorte:!: (e) forced vortex if) none of the <tbove
12. The impeller of a cent..,.i.fugal pump may have
(€t) voiute casing ('Jl volute casing with guide blacies
(c:) vortex casing (d) any one of the above
/3. In the casing of a centrifugal pump, the kinetic er:ergy of the
wat-er is converted into pressure t>nergy before the water ieaves the
casing.
True n
.__
14. .ltanometri<' head. in case of a centrifugal pump, is equal to
(al Suction 11.-"t+L-oss of head in suction pipe due to friction
, +Delivery r~t+Loss of head in delivery pipe due to friction
+-Velocity head 1"1 the delivery pipe
(b) Workdone per kg of water-Losses within the impeller
(c) Energy per kg at outlet of impeiler-EnergJ per kg at
inlet of impeller
(d) all of the above (e) none of the abOVt!
i5 ln. a centrifugal pump. the liquid enters the pump
(a) 3-t the centre (b) at the bott.om
(c) · at the top (d) from sicit>&

16. Manometric head iH the actual head of water against which a

cent.rifi.t~a.L_pu fi'lP has to work.
0 Wrong 0
 145

-'i'l~Mechaniel!.l efficiency o! a centrifugal pump is the ratio of

ene:rgv available a,t the impeller to the energ:; supplied to
(a)
the pmnp by the prime mov-er
(b) aetus.l warkdone by the pump to the e:::1ergy ~mpplied to
the pump by the prime mover
(c) energy supplied to the pump to the energy s.-vai!able at
the impeller
{d) manometric head to the energy aupplied b;" the impeller
per kg of wat-er
78. Overall effi.ciency of a centrifugal pump is the ratio of
{a) energv available at the impeller to the ene:::gy aupplied- to
the pump by the prime mover
(b) actual workdone by the pump t{) the energy supplied tc
the pump by ti!.e pr.me move!-
(c) energy supplied to the pump t{) the e:::1er~· available at
the impeller
(dJ manometric head to the energy supplie-d by the impelier
per kg of water
r
I
79. Discharge (Q) of a centrifugal pump is g:ive:!l by
{a) Q = -::.D.Vt (b) Q = -::.b.V;
I
I {c) Q = r:.D.b.Vt (d) Q = D.b.Vj
where D = Diameter of impeller at inlet,
b ""' Width of impeller a.t inlet, and
Vt = Velocity offtow at; inlet.

I
I
80_ Power required to drive a centrifugal pump is
w.Q.llm w.Q.Hm
i 6o- (b)
75 XI;a
w.Q w.Q
(c) (d)
Hmx60 Emx75x·r;a
where Hm = Manometric head in mat:::es,
Q = Discharge of the pump in m3jsee, and
-r,() = Over;;r,ll of the pump.
81. The efficiency of a eentrifugai pump will be ma;dmum when
the blades are bent ba.ckw.;,rd.
~ 0 ~ D
32. Multi-stage centrifugal pumps are used to
(a) give high discha-rge (b} produce high heads
{c) pump viscou~ fluid~ (d) all of the above
(e) none of the a.bove
10-M.E.
146 Hydraulic Machine8

83. Which of the following statement is correct 1

(a) The centrifugal pump is suitable fur ia.rge discharge a.nd
smaller heads. '
(b) The centrifugal pump requires less floor area. and simple
foundation as compared to reciprocating pump.
{c) T'ne thrust on the crank shaft of a centrifugal pump is
u:1i:form.
(d) The efficiency of centrifugal pump is less as compared to
reciproca.tin)Z pump.
(e) all ofthe above fj) noneofthe above
84. A reciprocat-ing pump is suitable forless discharge and hlghe:r
heads. , ·
True 0 Fa.lBe 0
85. The discharge of a. double acting reciprocating pump ia
(a) L.A ..ZIJ ib) 2 L.A.N
L.A. .N 2L.A.N
\'c) (d)
50 tiO
where L = Length of stroke,
A = Cross·sertlnnal area of piston, and
X = Speed uf <·rank in r p.m.
86. Slip ••t a rt•ciprocating pump is de5.ned as the
{a} :ratio of a.~'tnal discharge to the theoretical discharge
(b) sum of aetna.! discharge and the thevretica.l discharge
(c} difference of theoretical discharge and the actual di-:cha.rge
{d) product of theoretical discharge and the actual discharge
(e) none of the above
81. Slip of a. reciprocating pump is negative, wh~"n
(al suction pipe is short a.nd pump is running a.t low speeds
{b) delivery pipe i-; long and pump j,; running at high speeds
~c) suction pipe is short and delivery pipe is long and the
pump is 1"Ullning at low speeds
(d) snction pipe is long a.nd deli.-ery pipe is short and the
pump is running at high speeds
{e) none of the above
88. Read developed by a. cent.::-ifm;al pump is
{a) proportional to dia._meter uf impeller
(b) proportions} to speed of i:llpP1!er
(c) proportional to diameter and spet:d of Jmpel!cr
(d) .:1one of the a.bove ·
I
'~
 !47

89. · Theoretie&rpower required to drive a. reciprocating pump

(a)
wQHs
&O h.p.
'b wQH,J .
\ ) ~ ll.p.
lc)
, --n
wQH, h
.p.

(d)
wQHd h (e)
75 .p.
where w = Specmc weight nf liquid to bt> pumpt.>d.
Q = Discharge of the pump in m 3 /sr-e,
B. = Suction in meters, and
H<l = Delivery head in ·mt>tres.
90. In Sc mired flow centrifugaJ pump. the flow throu!Zh the impP!ler
is a combination of radial and a.:rial tiuws.
Correct 0 Incorrec:-
91. The air v·essel, in a reciprocating pump. is a cast iron dosed
chamber ha.ving an opening at it-a base.
Agree 0 0
92. In a. recinrocsting pump. air vessels are fitted to the suction
pipe and. delivery pipe close to the cylinc:er of the pump.
Tr-..1e n False
93. In a reciprocating pump, air vessels are used to
(a) sm•>othen the fiow (bl reduce section head
(c) increase delivery head (d) reduc-e acceleration head
(e) none of the above
94. By fitting a.n air vessel to the reciproca.tinl! pump, there is
alway3 a saving of work none and subsequently saving of power.
This saving in case of a single a.-::ting reciprocating pump is
(a) 39·2% (b) 48·8% (c) 84·8% (d) 88·4%
95. Io. the above question, the sa.v'.ng in case of a double acting
reciprocating pump is
(a) 39·2% (b) 48·8% (c) 84:8%
96. Discharge of a. centrifugal pump is
(a) directly proportional to N
r
I
{b) inversely proportional toN
(c) directly proportiona.l to N'l.
! (a) inversely proporno:o.al to NJ
where N =Speed of the pump impeller.
t¥l. Power reatrlred to drive a. centrifugal pump is••• ~...... propor·
ti~l to zv:..
(a) di...-ectiy (b) inversely
 98. Delive?' head of a. centr.J'ugal p~p .is
(a) directly proportional toN
(b) inversely proportional toN
(c) directly proportional to N!'
(a) inve:rSeljpropornoile.l to N2
S-9· Discharge of a. centrifugal pump is
.a) directly proportional to diameter of ita impeller
(bJ inversely proportional to diameter of its impeller
(c) directly proportional to (dia.meter)ll of its impeller
(d) inversely proportional to (diameter) 2 of its impeller
100. Delivery he&.d of water of a centrifugal pump is inversely Jiro·
portiona.I to diameter of its ,impeller.
~ 0 ~ 0
101. Power required to drive a centrifugeJ pump is directly pro-
portional to .........ofits impeller.
. (a) diameter rb) square of diameter
(c) ·cube of diameter (d) fou.~ power of diameter

102. The specific speed of a. centrifugal pump may be debd as

the speed of an imaginary pump, identical with· the given pump,
which will discharge one litre of water, while it is being reiaed
through a. head of one metre.
True 0
l!.03. The ;:.peci:fic speed (Ns) of a centrifU!;ai pump is g;ven by
(a) N v'Q (b) N v'Q
Jiz.;s E3t4

(c) (d)

104. The type of centrifugal pump preferred for a specific spred of

20 r p.m. is
(a) slow speed pump with radial flow a.t outlet
(b) medium speed pump with radial.flow at outiet
(c) bjgh speed pump with radial flow at outlet
(d) high speed pump with axiaJ flow at outlet

105. For centrifugal pump impeller, the maximum value of the vane
exit angleis
(a} 10° to !5° (b} 15" to 20°
(c) :w" to .25° (d) .25" to 30"
Its. ~e: specific speed ~m lfit} t.o
pump mdi~tes tha.t the pm:np is

(bi medium speed with radial tlo'?l' ~at outlet

{c) high speed witfi r..di.a.L ffow at outiet
(a:1 r~b: speed with. ax:facl flow at outlet
none of the at'O~e

107. If the net posrtiva suction htsd (YF::IllJ rcquirament for the-
pump is note S&tmi...~. then
no dow will take place
efficiency will be low
exc-es&ve pawe!" will be cm1sumed

:H~S. Wilen. the speed of the pump increases, its net positi>e suction
head (NPSII) requirement decreases.
Agree 0 Disa.gree 0
lt!~tW'ni:!h of the foUowmg: pump is suitable for small discharge and
high heads !
(a} Centrifugs;! pu.mp (o} A~J!l flaw pump
(c; Mixed flow pump {!i} Reciprocating pump
U!l Wnich of the foHow>.ng pump is preferred for flood control and
irrigation applications ?
(~I} Cent!"ifuga.I pump (b} krial flow pump
lC) liixe•.l flaw pump (d} .Recipzoeating pump

111. The centrifU::,crai pump preferred for a apeeifie speed between

§t} to 160 r.p.m., is

(a) s!ow:speed: With radial flow a.t outlet

~b) medium speed with radia.l flow at outlet
with radial tlOw at outlet
(a) high speed with mixed flow a.t outlet
(e) high speed with a::ria1 ffow at outlet
112. In order to avoid cs ritatian in centrifugal pumps
(a} the suction pressure should be hlg~
(b) the deliyeey pressure sha;dd be high
(c) the auction: ~ .!ilhocld be low
{d) the delivery ~ should be low
(e} both the suetion a.nd delivery p~ should be high
·_____
..
- .. .
. - ··-:..·__ : -- . -: -...
.
-;,;;,

i .
150 . :::?J:i~.z~ SC4~eB
'
I
' ~ us~ The~ or a Omimtugal ~p working eder oo~t
witldJ:a~.
he&d ••.•••••• · -
(a) RnCI'eUeS
.--
(b) decreases
114. The power of a can~ pump :JiVo.dtmg m1der oonatant head
~d discha.:rge increases with the speed.

Tnae 0 False 0
115. Which of the following pump ill genemlly used to pump highly
viscous fimd ~ .
'"'(a) Centrifugal pump · {b) Reciprocating pump
(c) All' lift pump taiScrew pump
116. II the mtio of all the oouespondmg linear dimensions are
equal, then the model and the prototype are said to have
(a) geometric similarity (b) kinematic~ - .
(e} dynamic simila.rity (d) none of the above
11i. If the ratio of ~Dding velocities at corresponding poima
are equal, then the model and the prototype are md to have
dynamic similarity.
~ghl 0 w~ 0
Ul. If the ratios of the co~--ponding forces acting e.t. corresponding
points are equal, 1hen the model and the prototype e.re said to have
(a) geometric similarity (b) kinemc.tic similarity
(•·} dynamic similarity (d) none of the above
119. Goo metric similarity is said to exist betwesn the model cmd the
prototypt>, if both of them
(a) have identical-velocities
(b) are identical in shape, but differ only in size
(c) are equal in size and sh&pe {d) h~ve identical forces
120. Dynamic similarity is said to exist between the model and the
prototype, if both of them
(a) have identical velocities
(b) are identical in shape, but diner only in size
(c) are equal in size and shape
(d) none of the -above
121. Kinems.tic similarity is said to exist between the model and the
prototype, if both oft~
(a) have identical velocities
(b) are identical in ehape, but differ only in size
(c) are equal m size and shape
(ti) have identical forces (e) none of the above
 151
122. Which type of the pump is
group 1
(a) Screw pump (b)Gt3a.r pump
(c) Cam and piston pump (d) L<>be pump
(e) Plunger pump (/) none of the above

123. .A hydrs,ulic !'8.m is a. device used to

(a) store the energy of water
(b) increase the pressure of water .._
(c) to lift water from deep wells
(d) to lift sma.ll quantity of water to a. greater height when a
!a.rge quantity of water is available at a smaller height
(e) none of the above
124. \Vhich of the following pump i.;; sucessfuily used for lifting
water to the boilers ~
l
i (al Centrifugal pump (bl Reciprocating pump·
(c) Jet pump (d) Air-lift pump
125. Which of the following pump is successfully used for lifting

I water from deep wells ~ • ·-

(a) Centrifugal pump
(c) Jet pump
(b) Reciprocating pump .
(d) Air lift pump

f 126. Hydraulic press is a device used

(al to store pressure energy which may be supplied • to a
machine later on.
(b) to increase the intensity of pressure of water by means of
energy available from a iarge quantity of water at a low
pressure
(c: to lift larger load by t!!e application or a comparatively
much smaller force
(d) none oft he abo>e
127. Efficiency of a hydrauhc press is gi>en by
W A P a
(a) p- :<a (b) w xT (r)

where W = \Yeight lifted by ram,

P = Force appJ{ed on piunaer.
A = Area of ram, and
a = Area. of plunget.
128 A hydraulic accumulator is a. dt>\·iet• nsPd to ;;torP ...........• f>nergy
which ma.y be supplied to a rnat>hine later on.
(a) strain (Ol prPSSl!rt· (r·l kinetic
 129 The ea.pacity of a hydraulic accumulator is-generally apecffied
as the me.::Cmum amount of energy &to:red.
True 0 Fslse 0
130. A hydraulic intensifier is a device used to increase the inten·
sity of pressure of water by means o:f·-energy available from a large
quantity of water at a. low pressure.
Right 0 Wrong 0

.... ANSWEB.S
l. {d) :!. (c) 3. (d) 4. False 5. (?)
6. (0! 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. Trne 10. (b)
n. (b} 1:!. (a) 13. (a! 14. False 15. (b)
16.•-1gre~" 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. Yes 20. (b)
2L (a) 22. (b) :!3. (d) 24. (b) 25. (e)
26. {c) 27. (c) :!8. Correct 29. Disagree 30. (c)
31. (r) 32. (c) 33. (b) 34. (a) 35. Correct
36. (c) 37. (bi 38. (a) 39. False 40. Correct
41. (d) ~..2. (b) 43. (e) 44.{c) 45. (bj
46. (c) 47. (cJ 48. (a) '49.(a) 50. {a)
51. {a) 52. (c) 53. False 54. {b) 55. Ye<t
56. (b) 57. {b) 58. (a) 59. (a} 60. No
61. {c) 62. (b) 63. (c} 64. (c) 65. {b)
66. (e) 67. (d) 68. (d) 69.. {c} 70. (C), (E),
[D), (B)
71. (If) 72. (d) 73. True 74. (d) 75. (a)
76. Right 77. (a) 78. (c) 79. (c) 80. (b)
81. Yes 82. {b) 83. (e) 84. True 85. (dl
C){\
86. {c) 87. !d) 88. (c) 89. {e) . \1t.l!.n.a;Ct

91. ~wee 92. True 93. {dl 94. (C} ~5. (a)
96. (a) 97. (a) 98. (c) 99. (c) 100. ::Xu
101. (d) 102. True 103. (b) 104. (a) 105. (c)
106. (d) 107. (h) 108. Disagree ~ !)9. (d) 110. (b)
111. (d) 112. (a) 113. (G) 114. True 115. (d)
116. (a) 117. \Yrong 118. fc) 119. (b) 120. (d)
l~L (a) 1.22. (e) 123. (d} 124. (c) 125. (d)
l.:-:6. (c) 127. (c) 128. (b) 129. True 130. Right
 ....
5
Thermodynamics

1. A definite area or a space where soiDe thermodynamic process

takes place is kncwn as
(a) thermodynamic system (b) thermodynamic cycle
(c) thermodynamic process (d) thermodynamic law

2. A closed aystem is one in which neither heat and work nor the
ms.ss of the working substance crosses the bounda.ry of the systeo.
Yes O No 0
3. An open system is one in which
(s) heat and work crosses the boundarv of the svst:em, but the
mass of the working substance does not -
(b) mass of the working substance crosses the boundary of the
system but the heat and work does not
(c) both the heat and work a.s well as mass of the workin~
substance crosses the boundary of the system
(d) neither the heat and work nor the mass of the working
substance crosses the boundar)· of the system
4. In an isolated system ,heat and work crosses the boundary of
the system, but the ma.as of substance does not.
True 0 False
5. In an extensive property of a thermodynamic system
{al extensive heat is transferred
(b) extensive work is done
{c) eruensive energy is utilised
(d) all of the above
(e} none ofthe above

153
II ~··. ' 154
i
6. The thermodynamic property .of-~-aystem-is-said-to-oo sn ---
intC'nsive pro}:erty whose value for the entire system......... ,..the sum
of their values for the individual parts of the system.
(ttl is equal to (b) is not equal to

· 7. Which of the following is the eruensive property of a thermody-

namic system ~
(a) Pressure (b) Volume (c) Tempers.ture (ci') Density

8. Which of the following is an intensive p1'>3perty of a thell:'mody.

na.mic system. "'
(a) Volume (b) Temp~ra.ture (b) Mass {a} Energy
9. \\'hen two bodies are in then:na.l equilibrium with a. th~ body,
they are also in thermal equilibrium with each other. T".nis s<-Wl!.tement
is called
(a) Zeroth law of thermodynamics
(b) first law of thermodynamics
(d second law of thermodynamics
(d) Kelrin Planck's law
10. First law of thermodynami~ deals with
(a) conserv,ttion of heat (b} conservation of momentum
{c) conservation of mass (d) conservation of energy

ll. According to first law of then:nodynami~

(a} total internal energy of a system during a process remains
constant
(b) total energy of a system remains constant
(r:) workdone by a system is equal to the heat transferred by
the system
(d) in1ierna.l energy, enthalpy and entropy during a process
remains constant
12. Energy can neither be created nor destroyed, but it can be
transformed from one form to another. T'.nis statement is known i?S
(a} Zeroth law of thermodynamics
(bJ first law of thermodynamics
{c) second law of thermodynamics
(d) Einetic theory of gases
(e) Avogadro's hypothesis
13. Kelvin-Planck's law deals with ·"-
(a) conservation of work (b) conservation of heat
(c) conservation of mass {dl conversion of heat into work
(e) conversion of work into heat
 /

14. Which Of the following statement is oom.ct according w Cl~a

si;a,tement of second !&w of thf'::modynamies V
(a} It is posmble to transfer heat from a body at a lowe:r tem·
pemtme to to body at e. higher temperature.
(b) It is impcsaible to t.mnsfer heat &om a body at eo lowel'
temperature to s. body at a higher temperatme, without
the sid of an external eomce.
(c) It ia pooaible to tmnsfer heat from a bodv at l:l>·lower t..em-
pemwe to a body at a higher tem~"'ii>tUl'a ~ usmg
!refrigeration cycle.
(d) none oftbe above
1!.5. According to Kelvin-Planck's statement of second law of th~r­
modyna.mics
(a) it is impossible to construct an engine working on a cyclic
proc..ss, whose sole purpoSt' is to eon>ert heat. ent•rgy into
work
(Ol it is possible to construct an cndn,. workin).( on a cyclic
process, whose sole purpost• is to ~eom·l'rt ht·n.t enc>rg>· 'into
work
(c) it is impossible to construct. a device which op<>rntes in a
cyclic process and produces no effect other than tht> transfer
of heat from a. cooler body to a hot body
(cl) when two dissimilar metals are heated at one end and
cooled at the other, the e.m.f. developed is propomon:~.l
to the difference of their temperatures at the two end.
(e) none of the above

16. Which of the following is the cot?ect statement of the secood

!&w of themwdyns.miea ?
(a) It is impossible to construct an engine working on a cyclic
process, whose sole pu..-pooe is to convert heat energy into
wo~. .
(b) It ie impossible to transfer beat from s body at slower
temperature to a higb.e:r temperature, without the aid of w
external source. ·
-]c) There is a definite amount of mechanical energy. which can
be obtained from a given quantity of heat energy.
(d) all oithe above
(e) none ofthe above

11. According to Pettlier Thomson effecv, when two dissimilar

meteaa are heated a.t one end and cooled at the other, the e.mi.
=~oped is propotional to the differe-nce of tempers.tlll'S8 a.t the two

Right 0 Wrong
 100
:!Ui. Serooo law
ta} h~at

1g It is: impossfhle to tr.;~nstei: at "'

tempa:atma to a body ~t a te:&npei'2>tu:E:e, """''"'~'""'""t: the aid of m
a3::tem2.I soul7ce.
Correet 0 0
~- It is.....•............to <m engine: writing on g,
process, whose sole pmpooe is to oon-rert he&t t-nergy mto
(a} possible {ll} impoos.i'ble

21. In the .lUst law of th•el1::::J:!.0::1;yi~ru.es,

system remains. oonst..ant.
'l"n:e
22. The.sta,te of a m:lf.mtanee whose eva.pomtioo from.its Hqmd s'".,a,t;e
is: complete. is kno"\Jii'!l: oo
(a! vapour {lit perl'ec'u gag (e} ail' (d~ steam

~- The state of a substanee evapomtion. from its: liquid state

is partial. is kno.W'!l &B: stes.m.
Agree O D:isagrae
24. The· beha.-rour of super.;.heated vapJllr ia similar to that of
{a) perfect gas {b} air {.;} s".eam
(d'} oroinary gas {e} oone of the a hove
25. Tl:le variables which control the physical prop<>J:ties of a ~::feet
gas are
(a} presame exerted by the gas
(b} volnme occupied by the gas
{e) of the gas
(d.} all of the above
~- The behanom: of a perf~ ga@. undergoing any change in the.
vsriables which control physical properties~ is governed by -
(a} Boyle's law {b)C'.o&les· la.w
(c} Ga.y-~c :la.w {d) all of the above
(e} mme of the above

27. 'l'he absolute ~e of a given mass of a pea-feet gas

mv~ly as its volume, when the temperature rem>~Jn~> oozmt<mt:
mtement is known as .Boyle's law.
Yes 0 No
 157

23: As per Cbsrl.es' ~w, the volume of a. given ma!'s of a perfeot ~..,s
v:mes ••..••.•• ·~·as xts a.nsolute temperature. wh!!ll the absolute pressure
remains constant.
{a) directly (b) indirectly

~. All perfect gases change in volume by l/273th of its original

volume at 0°0 for every ro change in temperature, when the J.mlSI!IU."'e
?emains coll!F...snt. This statement is caiJed
(a) Boyle's ls."W (oj Charles' la.w (c) Ga.y-Lussac la..!f
(d) Jollie's law (e) Avogadros' Ia.w

:00. According to Ga.y-Lusss.c la.w, the absolute pressure of a given

mass of s. perfect gas va.ries ..•........• aa its absolute temperature,
when the volume remains constant. ·
(a} directly (b) indirectly

$1. The ••••••.•....••. states that cln:nge of internal energy of a perfect

gas is directiy proport.iona.l to the change of t.empemture. .
(a) Boyle's law (b) Charla's law (c) Gay-Lussa.c law
{d) Joule's law (e) Avogadro's law

S2. Equal voltm:~es oi all gases, at the same temperature and pres.
sure, contain equal number ·of molecules. This statement is ce-lled
Avogadro's 1aw.
True 0 0
33. For a perfect gas, aceording to Boyle's law
(a) p.v = constant, if Tis kept constant
(b) vj'l' = constant, if pis kept const.<mt
(b) p/T = constant, if vis kept oonsta.nt
(d) Tjp = const-ant, if vis kept constant
where p = .Absolute pressure,
v = Volume, and
T ·- .Absolute temperature.

34. Select the correct statement as per Charles' ]aw

(a) p.t' = constant, if Tis kept constant
{b) v/T = ponsta.nt,"ifp is kt>pt constant
(c) p/T = constant, if vis kept constant
(d) Tfp = constant, if vis kept constant

• 35._ .According to Gay-Lussac law for l:!. perfect ga.s, pjT =constant,
:if v lS kept constant. .
True 0 False D
158

36. The temperature s.t which the volume. of a gas beeomeg-zero"~

called
(a) absolute scale of tempera,t-.zre
(b) absolute zero temperature
(cl absolute temperature (d) none of the above
31. The absolute zero pressu.ra will be
{a) when molecular momentum of the system becomes ze:ro
(b} at sea level
(c} at the tempe.."3.ture of- 273"k
(J) ur.der va<'uum conditions
{e1 a.r the ct·ntre of the esrth
38. The valuE> of one bar (in S.I. unitsl is equal to
(al 100 X/m2 (b) 1000 Nfrn 2 (c) 1 x 10~ N/ma
(ill 1 x lOS Nfm2 (e) 1 x 106 N/m3
39. Accorrling to .James Joule
tcz) H = W/J (b) W = E/J
~c) .J = W/H (J) W = J/H
where H = Heat supplied,
W = Workdone in heat units, and
J = Joub's equivalent of heat.
40. The :>.bsoiute zero temperature is taken as
(ai - 273° c tbl 273' a {c} 23i 0
c (d) -231" (}
41. Which of the following is cor:rect 1
(ai Ab:mlute pressure == Gauge pressure + Atmospheric
pressure
(b) Gauge pressure =Absolute pressure + Atmospheri'.l
pras::.-ure
(c} Atmospheric pressure =Absolute pressure + Gauge preS<>
sure
(d) Absolute pressure = Gauge pressure + Atmospherle
pressure
42. The unit of energy w·s.I. units is
(a) Joule (J) (b) Joule metre (Jm)
(c) Wstt (W) (d) . Joule/metre {J/m}
43. The unit of power in S.!. units is horsepower.
~ 0 F$~

4;1. One watt is eq~ to

{a) l Nm/s (b) l Nm/Tlilil (c)
(rl) 10 Nmjmm (e) 100 Nm/s (f)
 159

45. One Joule (J) is equal to

(a) l Nm {b) l k:Nm (c) 10 Nm/s
46. One kilo-ca!orje (Kca.l) is equal to
(a) 0·427 kg m (b) 4•27 kg m (c) 42·7 kg m
(d) 427 kg m (e) -1~70 kg m
4'1. Boyle's law states that. cha.nJ5e of internal energy of a perfect
gas is directly proportional to the change of temperature.
Agree 0 Disagree 0
43. The absolute pressure of a given mass of a perfect gas varies
inversely s.s its vnlume, when the temperature .remains constant. This
s'"..a.tement is known as C'narles' law.
Yes r Xo 0
49. Charles' law states that all J.lPrfect gast-s change in volume by
...............ofits original volume at o: C for every l c C change in
temperature, when pressure remains constant.
(z} l/2'it'n (b) l/93th : r) 11 li3th id) l/273th
50. The absolute zero pressure can bear: ai·:ed at a tt>mpern.ture of
{a) 0' C (bJ :?73· C (cJ 273° K
{d) 372° K (e) none of: hP abo>e

51. The value of the atmospheric pressure is .:qu:~l to

(a:l 1 kg/cm2 ib) 1·0197 kg, cm2 (c) l-()3:~ kg/cm2
(ti} 14·7 kg/cmz (e) no:1e of the abo>e
52. The va!ae of one bar is equal to
(11) 1 kgfcm= (bJ 1·019'';" kg·emz (c) 1·033 kgicm:l
(d) 14·7 kg/cm 2 (e) none of tlle above

53. The absolute pressure is the sum of the gauge pressure and the
atmosphe.?ic pressure.
True [J False 0
54. The general gas equation is
(a) 'fJV = mitT (o) pv = RTm
(c) :pvm = 0 (Gl pv = (R'I' ym
wherep =Pressure, v =Volume, m=ma.ss,
T =Absolute temperature, and_
R = Gas constant.
55. The value of gas constant {R) in M.K.S. units is
(a) 2·9o!7 kgmfk!rtK {b) 29·27 kgmfkg/"K
(c) ~2·7 kgmfkg/"K (d) 2927 kgmfkgtK
 160

56. The value of ga.s constairt (Rj in S.I. Units is

(a.} 0·.287 J/kgtK {b} 2·87 J/kg}"K

5i. iiccm:ding to Avogadro's law

(tZ} the product of the :;ps constant and the mol.ecular "l'reight
of an ideal gag is ooruta.nt
(ll'l the sum of psrtisl presaura of the ~.n:e of two gases is
sum of the two ....
{c) equal volumes of aU gases, a.t the same tempe;rst"cre a.nd
pressure, contain equal numbaz of molooules
aU of the above
(e) none of the above

58. The molecular weight e~ressed in. gm fi.e. l gm mole} of all

gases, at N.T.P .• occupies a volume of
{a.} 0·2:}! litres fb) 2·24 litl"'.,s (c) 22·4 littes
(d) 2:!4 litreg (e) 2240 litres (f) none of the aoove

59. The ttniversal gas constant (or molar constant) of s gas is the
product of
(a} molecular weight of the gas and the gas constant
{(n atomic weight of the gas and the gas constant
{c) mo!~al' weight of the gas and the specific heat a.t cons-
tant presau..'"e
(d) moiecu..!ax weight of the gas a.nd the specific heat at cons-
tant volume·

66. The value of the univefi!Sl gas constant is M.K.S. units is

!a) 0·848 kg m/kg mole/°K (b} 8·48 kg mjkg mole(K
{c} 84·8 kg mfs.g mole/"K {d) 848 kg mjkg moletK
{e) 848{1 kg mt"kg molefCJr
61. In S.I. units, tile value of th.e universal gas constant is
(:z}0·8314 J/kg molerK {b) 8·314 J/kg mo1e/"K
{e) 83·14 J/kg mole/"K (d) 831·4 J{kg molel'K
(e) 8314 Jfkg moie/"K

62. The amount of heat recraired to raise the ten:roerature of the

unit mass of gas through 1° c·at constant volume, is called
(a} specific heat s.t consta.:o:t volume
{o) specific heat at constant pressure
(c:} kiloca.lorie (d) none of the above
 Thermodynamica 161

63. The amount of heat required to raise the t€mperatnre of unit

---4-·- mass of a gas through l o C at constant pressure is called specific heat
at constant pressure.
True 0 False 0
64. The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of l .kg of
water through 1°C is called
(a) specific heat at constant volume
(b) specific heat at constant pressure
(c) kilocalorie (d) none of the above
65. T"ne specific heat at constant volume is
(a) the smount of heat required to mise the t€mperature of
unit mass of gas through rc, at constant pressure
(b) the amount of heat· required to mise the temperature of
unit ms&> of gas t.hrcugh 1 oc, e.t consta:::tt >olu.me
(c) the amount of heat requir::d to :raise the temperature of
l kg of Wa.t::r through l oc
(d) any one of the a.i:Jove {e) none of the above
ce. The value of snecific heat at constant pr;:ssure is ............tbat
of at con::.-tant volunie.
(a) less than (b) equal to (c) tore than
67. When the gas is heated at constant volute, t.he hzs.t supplied
ta) increaaes the internal energy of the gas
(hi increases the temperature of the gas
(ci does some extt:rnal work during e-=?ansicn
(i) both (b) and (c) ~ (e) none of tlle above
1.<S. Wnen the gas is heated at constant pressure, the heat supplied
(G) increases the internal energy of the ;gas
(b) increases the temperature of the g~s
(c) does some external work du...-iug expaL!Sion
(a) both (b) and (c) (e) none of tb.e above
69. Jia.tch the correct answex from Group B for the statements ;;riv::n
in Group A.., ._.

Group A Group B
(rz) The value of gas constant in (A) 848 kgmjkg moletK
M.K.S. units is
(b) The value of the gas constant (B) 8314 Jjkg mole/"K
in S.I. units is
(c) The value of 'u.n:iversal ga.s
constant fu. !YL.K.S. units is
(a) The value of universal gas (D) 287 J{kgtK
const.ant is 8 .I. units is
11-M.E.
 lG2

7'0. The universal ga.s constant of a. gas is the ,product of mo1ecu1ar ·.-
weight of the ga.s a.nd the ga.s constant. . _ -------'--
Correct 0 Incorrect
0
71. T.b.e a.moWlt of heat required to mise the t.emperattll"e of.. , ......
water· through l°C is called calorie.
{a) 1 gm {b) lO gm (c) lOu gm (d) 1000 gm
72. \Vhen the gas is heated a'i. const<::.nt >olume, the heat supplied
increases the internal energy of the gas. -
True 0 False 0
73. The ratio of specific heat at coill:lta.nt preMure and specific hea.t
a.t constant volume is always ........• on~.
(a) equa.I to (b) less than (c) greeter than

14. The heat supplied to the ga.s at constant volume is

(a) mP. {1": - 1\) {bl mCc (T~ - :'1'1.)
(c; mC,, {T: - T:t) (d) mC)J (:1': + 1' 1)
wilete m = Mass of gas,
C,. = Specific b.'3at a.t constant volT.mJe,
Op = Specific heat at constn.m p.."'essure,
T'l- 1'1 =Rise in tempera.tme, and
R = Gas const.a.nt.
75. The volumetric or molar specific hea.t at oon::.-tant pressure is the
product of
{a) molecular weight of the gas and tht~ specific heat a.t cona-
t.s.nt volume
{b) a.romic weight of the gas and the gas constant
(c) moleculs.r weight o:f the gas and the ga.a consts.nt
(d} none ofthe above

16. The ratio of specific ht>.at at constant pressure {Cp) and gpecifio
hea.t e.t con.sta.nt volume (0.,) i2
(cz} equa.1 to one (b) less than one
(c} greater than one (d) none of the above

Tl. The genera.! gas energy equation is

(a} ii.H == dE + dW (b) d!:I = dE - dW
(c) dB = d.EfdW (d) dE = dE x dW
where dH = Heat supplied,
J.E ::a Chs.nge in internal energy, and
dW = Work done in heat units.
 m• ' •
""" roermoaynam&cs

18. P.e1a.tion between Cp and 0,. is given by

I
' (a)
Cr
Cp =R (b) 0 11 -C, =T
R
H c.=
I! (d) both (a) and (b) (e) both (b) and (c)
where C:> = Speciffc heat at constant pressure,
C,. = Specific heat at constant volume,
·r = Cp/C,, and
! R = Gas constant.
'
The gas constant (.R) is equal to the

I
1
(a) sum of two specific heats
(b) clliference of two specific heats

ll (c) product of two specific. heats

(d) ratio of two specirlc heats
30. The valu;; of Gp/01• for air is
j (a) l (b) 1·4 1·8 (c) (d)
a 81.. Th:: heat enerzv stored in the ga" and used l~)r raising the
f temperature of the g~sl is known a.'J

l (a) e::rternal energy

(c) kinetic energy
(h) internal ener.zy
(d) molecular energy

I
32. The heating and e::rpanding of a gas is called
(a) thermodynamic system
(b) thermodynamic cycle
(c) thermodynamic process

II
(1) thermodynamic law
33. When a gas is heated, change takes place .in
(a) pressure . (b) volume
(c) temperature (d) specific energy
(e) specific enthalpy (f) i!.ll of the above

I
When a gas is heated at constant volume
(a) its temperature wi11 increase

~
(b) its pressure will increase
(c) both tamp€rature and pressure will increase

'
~ (d) neither temperatUre nor pressure will increase
When a gas is heated at constant pressure.
(al its temperature will increase
I (b) its ""¥>lume will increase .

I (c) both temperature and ·volume will increase

(d) neither temperature nor volume wiH increase

'
 ,,•

164

86. The heating of a gas at constant pres:.mre is governed by

(a) .Boyle's law (b) Charles' Ja.w
(c) Gay-Lussa.c law (d) Avogadro's law
{e) JoulG's law (/) none of the a.bo>e
81. When gas is heated at constant pressure, the heat ~upplied is
m.ilised in
{a) increasing the internal energy of gas
(b) doing some external work
(c) increasing the internal energy of gas and aiso for doing
some eri·ernal work
(d) none of the above

~. The gas constant (R) is equal to the ......... of t'~>o specllic heats.
(a) sum (b) difference (c) product {d) ratio

89. The heating and expanding of a gas is called thermodynamic

~m.·

Yes 0 No 0
9@. When the gas is cooled a.t constant pressure,
{a) its temperature increases but volume decreases
(b) il:.s volume increases but temperature decreases
{c) both temperature and volume increases
(d) both temperature and volume decreases

91. A process, in which the gas is heated or expanded in such a way

t.hs.t the product of ita pressure and volume remains constant, is
ealled
(a) isothermal process (b) hyperbolic process
(c) adiabatic process (d) polytropic process

92. The hyperbolic process is governed by

(a) Boyle's law (b) Charles' l11.w
(c) Gay-Lussa.c law (d) Avogadro' law
(e) Joule's law (j) none of the above
93. A process, in which the temperature ofthe working substance
remo.ins constant during its expansion or compression, is called
(a) isothermal process (b) hyperbolic process
(::) adiabatic process {d) polytropic process
H. The heating of a. gas at constant pressme is governed by
Charles' l&w.
True 0 False 0
 Phermodyruzmics

95. A process, in which the gas is heated or expanded in such a

way that product of its pressure and volume remains constant, is
called isothermal process.
Yes 0 No 0
96. In an isothermal process.
(a) internal energy increases
(b) internal energy decreases
(c) there fs no change in intern::>l energy
(a) none of the above

97. An isothermal process is governed by

(a) Boyle's law (b) Charles· law
{c) Ga.y-Lussa"c law (d) Avogadro's law
(e) Joule's law (f) none of the above
98. The expansion ratio (r) is the ratio of

(a) (b) (dl

where v1 = Volume at the beginning of expansion, and

vJ = Volume at l.ihe end of exp:1.nsion.

99. A process, in which the working substance neither receives nor

gives out heat to its surroundings during its expansion cr compres-
sion, is called
(a) isothermal proces:.s (b) hyperbolic process
(c) adiabatic process (d) polytropic process
100. There is no change in internal energy in an isothermal process.
C-orrect 0 Incorrect 0
101. Workdone during adiabatic expanding is given by
m R 1T 1 -T1 l
(a) (b)
y-1
(c) (d) all of the a.bove

where P1s vi> T 1 = Pressure, volume and. temperature for the

initial condition of gas,
p 2 , v 2 , Ta """ Corresponding values for the final condition

I
of gas,
R = Ga.s 'CO~nt, and
1 = Ratio of specific heata.
 ---
102. The genera.lla. w for the expansion or compression of gases, is
(a) pv = 0 {b) p.t' = m R T
{c) :pv" = 0 (d) ;P"f = 0
103. When the expansion or compression ta-kes place according to the-
law~ = 0, the process is known a.s
(a) isothermal process (b) adiabatic process
{c) hyperbolic process (d) polytropic process
'--.
lM. An adiabatic process is one in which
(a) no hea.t enters or leaves the gas
{b) the temperature of the ge.s changes
{c) the change iu internal energy is equal to the meche.nicall
work done
(d) all of'the above (e) none of the above

105. The heat absorbed or rejected during a. polytropic process is

(a) "(·-n X W orkdone

r- 1
i - n_ P1v1 - Ps'02
(b)
"f- 1 X J (n- l;
(c)
r-n X
m .R (T1 - Ts)
y-1 J (n- 1)
(d)
y-n
"f _ X m Ov (T1 - T 2)
1
{e) all of the above {f) none of the above
106. The polytropic index (n) is given by
(a) log IP1 P2J (b) log (pz/Pl) log (t' 1 /v~)
log {v1 v2) log (t'J./v2) {cl log (1'1/P~l
107. When a fluid is allowed to e:s:p&nd suddenlv into a vacuum
chamber through an orifice of large dimensions, the process is known
as free expa.nsion process.
True 0 False 0
!08. When a. perfect gas is expanded through an aperture of minute-
dimensions, the procellt-l is known as
(a) isothermal process .(b) adiabatic process
(c) free expansion process {d) throttling process
109. In e. _thXottling process
{a) W = 0 (b) H ::i: 0 {c) E =0
{d) all of the above (e) none of the ~>hove
 ,
-:;
-'{4
P~ynamica

UO. Workdone in a free expansion process is

167

'
· ···(a)-- zero·· (b) minimum {c) muimum
{d) positive. (e) negative
:U1. In a reversible adiabatic process, the ratio of T 1JTa is equal to
y-1 y-l
(a) ( ;: ) -~- (b) ( ~~ ) 1

r-l y-1
(c) Y (d) ( 1Jx ') I
\ Vs }

!< 1~If th e va4ue

.... . 1 01 n =
.t' 0 m
. t h e equation. p-<1" = '·, ~.
,.., ....:1en '"""'
"'"'"
process is called
(tz) constant volume process {b) a.·~ 'r;, ';.":': P•"': - .·:..
(c} constant pressure process (d) isoth»r:T. ':. -. ·- .'::' o;:
(e) constant. tempern.tura process

i. 113. If .in the equation pv" = C, the value of n= 1, then tb.e

process is called isothermal process.
\ True 0 F'llse i .

11-!. The process is a.dia.ba.tic, if the value ofn in the equation

p'IJn = 0, is

I ~ 0 ~ 1 ~ T ~
115. If in the equation Jl'IJ" = C, the value of n = = (), tnen the
process is called
(a) constant volume process
(c) comta.nt pressure process
{b) adiabatic process
(d) isothermal process
=

{e) comtant temperature process

116. l\-Ia.tch the correct answer from Group B for the given s'tat...:-
ments given in GrO".J,.p A.
Group A. Group B
(a) Workdone during adiabatic
expansion is
h€,ne!:'a.l law for the expan-
sion or compression is
T-1
'Pr\-y
(c) The heat absorbed or (B) ( P:)
rej~ during a polytropic
process is P1V1 - p~v3
(C)
(d) The polytropic inde:x {a) is y-1
given by (D) pv" = c
(e) In a reversible adi&ba.tro log (PJPr)
(E)
process, the ratio of TJTa log rvJvz)
is equal to
168

1.17. T~e general law of expansion or compression is pvn = 0. The

process Is said to be hyperbolic, if n is equal to
(a) 0 (b) l (c) i' (d) c;
118. Workdone in a free expansion process is zer9.
True O False · 0
119. The area. unC.er the temperature-entropv curve (T- s curve) of
any thermodynamic process represents •
(a) heat absorbed (b) heat rejected
{c) either (a) or (b) (d) none of the abo•e
120. The change of entropy, when heat is removed from the gas, is
positive.
Yes No 0
121. The property of a working substance which incrpases or
decreases as the heat is supplied or remo>ed in a reversible manner,
is known as
(a) enthalpy (b) internal energy
(c) entropy (d) e:rternal ciwr:gy
122. The entropy may be e~pressed as a function of
(a) pressure and temperature (b) temperature and >olume
(c) heat and work (d') all of the (lb>oe
(e) none of the above

123. The heat absorbed or rejected by the working substance lS

given by
(a} c!H = T.as (b) dH = Tjas (c) dH = ds/T
where ds = Increase or decre"se of entropy,
T = Absolute temperature, and
c!H = Heat absorbed or rejected.
124. The entropy of water at 0" C is assumed to be
(a) 1 (b) 0 (c) - l · td) 10

125. The area under the tempers.tnre-entropy curve (1".e. T-s curve)
of any thermodynamic pr0ct?ss represents the workcione during the
proces~>.

Agree 0 Disagree 0
126. A series of opc:lra.ticns, which takes p1ace in a certain order and
restore the initial condition, is known as
(a) reversible cyc1e (b) Irreversible cycle
(c) thermodynamic cycle (d) none of the above
127. The change of entropy, when heat is absorbed by the gas, is
{a) positive (b) negative (c) positive or negati..-e
Ploermodynamics 169

128. "Whlch c:f the following sts.t.ement is correct ~

(a) The increase in entropy is obtained from a given quantity

of heat a:t a low temperature.
(b) The change in r;ntropy may be regarded as a m~asure of
the rete of the availability of heat for transformation into
work.
(c) The entropv renresents the maximum amount of work
obtainable per degree drop in temperature.
(d) all of the above
(e) none of the above

129. Tne chang-9 of entropy, when heat is remo>ed from the gas, is
nega.ti>e.
Yes 0 No 0
130. The condition for the reversibility of a cycle is
(a) the pressure and temperature of the >vorking substance
must :u.ot differ, appreciably, from those of the surrounding3
a.t any stage in the process
(b) a.U the proce;s, taking place in the cycle of operation,
must be extremely slow
(c) t;_he workings parts of the engine must be friction
ll'6e
(d) there should be no loss of en'lrgy during the cyde of
operation
(e) all of the above (j) none of the abo>e
131. Iu an irreversible proce!!ls, there is a
; a) loss of heat (b) no loss of heat
(c) gain of heat (a) no gain of heat

132. The main cause for the irreversibility 'is

(a) mecha.nic.1l and fluid friction
(b) unrestricted expansion
(c) heat transfer with a .finite tempera. ~ure difference
(d) aU cf the above (e) none ofthe abo>e
133. There is a loss of heat in an irre'7"ersible process.
Agree 0 Disagree

13-4. The isot.herma:I and adiabatb procesess are regarded·· as

(!!) reversible process (b) irreversible process
(c) reversible or irreversible process
(d) none of the above
135. The constant pressure, consts.nt volume a11d co.nsta.nt P'i'"
processes are regarded as irreversible proceas.
T.rne O False 0
136. The throttling process is a .......•. pro--ess.
(a) reversible (b) irreversible
"(c) reversible or irrevel:'Sible
137. Which of the following process can be made reversible with
the help of a regenerator 1
(a). Constant pressure process
(b) Constant volume process (c) Consi.aJ:lt pv"
(d) all of the above (e) none ofthe abov-e
138. Camot cycle consists of
(a) two consta.nt volume and two a,dia.ba.tic processes
(b) two isothermal and two adiabatic processes
(c) two eonsta.nt pressure and two adiabatic processes
(J) one. constant volume, one const-ant pressure s,nd two
· sdiabs.tic processes
(e} none of the above
139. The efficiency of the camot cycle is
(a) P.Ti --1 {b) l- ~1 (c}
$ ~~

(d) (e)

where TJ. and T 2 = Highest and lowest tecnper:1ture du...""ing

the cycie.
140. Camot cycle has maximum efficiency for
(a) petrol engine tb) diesel engine (c) new engine
(a) reversible engine (e) :irreversiblo engine
141. Which is the incorrect sta.tement a,bout Ca.."!lot cycle ?
(a} It is used as the alterna.te standard of compar:ision of ell
" hest engines.
(b) All the heat epg:ines are ba.aed on Ca.rnot cycle.
(c) It provides concept of maximising work output between
the ,two temperature limits.
(d) all Q[ the above (e) none of the abon
142. By decre&Sing the highest temperature mthe Carnot cycle, its
efficiency is increased.
True O False 0
 171

H3. The effieiency_o£-the-Camot cycle may be increased by

(a) increasing the highest temperature
(b) decreasing the highest temperature
(c) increa<oi.ng the lowest temperature
(s) dea.."'e&sing ihe lowest temperature
(e) keeping the lowest temperature consta.nt

144. It is ••••••..•to ma.ke an engine working on a. Ca.rnot cycle.

(a) possible (b) impossible

145. Stirling cycle consists of

(a) two constant volume a.nd two adia.ba.tic processes
(b) two constant volume and two isothermal processes
(c) two constant pressure and two isother.:nal processes
(a) one constant volume, one constant pressure· and two
adiabatic processes
(e) none of the above

H6. The efficiency of Stirling cycle is ........ Carnot cycle.

(!l) greater than (b) less tha.n (c) equal to
147. Eric3son cycle consists of two constant pressure and two
isothermal processes.
Agree 0 Disagree 0
143. The efficiency of Ericsaon cycle is ......... Carnot cycle.
(a) greater than (b) less than (c) equa.l to
149. Stirling and Ericsson cycles are
(a) reversible cycles (b) irreversible cycles
(c) semi-reversible cycles (d} quasi-static cycles
(eJ none of the- above
150. Both the Ericsson and Joule's cycle have two coMta.nt pre-s-
sure processes.
True 0 False 0
1511.. The efficiency of Joule cycle is
(a) greater than Carnot cycle (b) less than Ca.rnot cycle
(c) equal to Ca.rnot cycle (d) none of the a.bove
152. Reversed Joule cycle is known as
(a) Carnot ~ycle (b) Bell-Coleman cycle
(c) Rankine cycle (d) Stirling cycle
(e) Brayton cycle (f) none ofthe above
 112 Therr:~.odynamics
-~---

153. Otto cycle consists of

{a) two constant volume and ·two adiabatic processes
(b) two constant pressure and two adiabatic processes
(c) t-..vo constant volume ana two isothermal processes
(d) one constant pressure, one constant volume and two adia-
batic processes
(e) none of the above
154. Otto cycle is also known as
. (G) constant pressu:'e cycle (b) constant volume cycle
{c) constant temperature cycle
(a) constant temperature and pressure cycle
(e) none of the above

155. Diesel cycle consists of.................. processes.

(a) two constant v-olume and two adiabatic
(b) two constant pressure and two adiabatic
(c) two constant volume and two isothermal
(d) one constant pr-essure, one constant volume and t>vo
adiabatic
(e} none of the above
156. For the same compressrm ratio, the efficiency of Diesel cycle
is ......... Otto cycle.
(a) greater thEm (b) less than ~c) equal to

157. The efficiency of Dies;:;l cycle increases with

(a) decrease in cut-cff (b) increase in cut-off
(c) constant cut-off (d) none of the above

158. The effidency of Diesel cycle approaches to Otto cycle efficiency

when
(a) cut-off is increased (b) cut-off is decreased
(c) cut-off is zero cut-off is constant
1.59. The dual combustion cycle consists of one constant pressure,
two constant volume and two adiabatic processes.

I .Agree 0 Disagree
160. For the same compression ratio, the efficiency of dual com-
n
bustion cycle is
(a) greater than Diesel cycle and !ess th2.n Ot~o cycle

I
!
(b)- less than Diesel cycle and greater than Otto cycle
(c) greater than Diesel cycle
(e) none of the abov~
(d) less than Diesel cycle
 ,...

l Thermodynamics 173

I 161. The air s+..a.nds.rd efficiency of an Ot+,o eycle)s given by

(a) 1-r'l'- 1 . ____ ___ (b)__ l+r'l'-2

(c) " l
-~---
r-r-1
where r ·= Compression ra.tio, and
y = Ratio of specific heats.
162. The efficiency of Diesel cycle increases with increase in
cut-off.
. ..._ Yes 0 No 0
163. A cycle consisting of two isothermal and two a.dia.ba tic
processes, is known a.s
(a) Carnot cy?le (b) Stirling cycle
(c) Ericsson cycle (d) Joule cycle
(e) Otto cycle (/) Diesel cycle
164. A cycle consisting of ............ and two isothermal processes is
known as Stirling .::ycle.
{a) two constant pressure (b) two constant volume
(c) two adiabatic
165. A cycle consisting of two constant pressure and two iso-
thermal processes is known as Ericsson cycle.
True 0 False 0
166. A cycle consisting of two constant pressure and two adiabatic
processes is known e:s
(a) Carnot cycle (b) Stlrlir:g cycle (c) Otto cycle
(d) Ericsson cyc:!e (e) none 0f til; s.bove
!6i. Seiect the wrong statement
(a) A Joule cycle consists of two constant volume and two
adiabatic processes.
(b) An Otto eye le consists of two constant . >olume and two
adiabatic processes.
(c) An Ericsson cycle consists of two constant pressure and
,two isothermal processes.

l (d) all of the above (e) none of the abo>e

168. A cycle consisting of one constant pressure one constant >olume
and two adiabatic processes is known as
·I
,/) {a) Carnot cycle (b) Stirling cycle
(c) Erics~on cycle (d) Joule cycle
f (e) Otto cycle (j) Diesel cycle
I-
I
:r1
 1'14

169. Which of the following is the correct statement 1

a-
(a) For-- given compression r-atio, both Otto and Diesel
cycles have the same efficiency.
(b) For a given compression ratio, Otto cycle is more efficient
than Diesel cycl.;
(o) For a. given compression ratio, Diesel cycle is more
efficient than Otto cycle.
(d) The efficiency of Otto or Diesel cycle has nothing to do
with compression ratio.
(e) In actual practice, Otto cycle is more efficient tb.!ln
Diesel cycle.
1'.10. Which of the following is the correct statement ~
(a) .All the reversible engines have the same efficiency .
(b) .All the r-eversible and irreversible en~ines ha,·e
~· ~
ewcxency.
.(c)L"'i"Gversible engines have ma:rimum efficiency .
(d) All engines are designed as reversible in order to obtain
ma::rimum efficiency.
171. The efficiency of a dual combustion cyclto .... " ... upon the cut-
off ratio.
(a) depends tbl does not depend
172.. :a-nt-off is~~··~~···the efficiency of Diesel cyc1e appr-oaches
to Otto cycle efficiency .
. (a) ·zero - (b) l/5 (c)_ 4:/5 (d) l
173. Th~ e:ffic~~nc;r of the .dual combustion cycle, for the same
compresslO:U rano, 1s ..•.•..•• D1esel cycle.
(al greater than rb) less than (c) equal to
174. A closed cycle gss turbine works on Jouie's cycle.
0 0
l'i~. Which of the following atatment is wrong ~
{a} The closed cycle plants are external combustion plants.
In the closed cycle gas turbine, the pressure range depends
upon the atmospheric pressure.
(c) The advantage of efficient int&-nal c-ombustion is elimina·
ted as the dosed cycle has an external surface.
[a) In open cycle system, atmosphere acta as a, sink and no
cool.a.nt is required.
{e) In closed cycle plants, the therm.C!.l efficiency at part loa-d
is hlgher.
 175

176. In open cycle plants

(a) the indirect heat exchanger and cooler is a.>oided'
(b) direct combustion system is used
(c) a conde:nser is used
(d) all of the above
(e) none of the above
177. The v.;:.'1rk ratio of a turbine -ola.nt is .,.iven by
. "'
Net work output
(a)
W orkdone by the turbine
Net work output
(b)
Heat supplied

Actual temperature drop

(CJ
Isentropic temperature drop
\
J Isent:opic increase in temperature
j id)
I Actual i;tcrease in temperature

I
Actual heat drop
(e)
Isentropic heat drop

liS. The ideal efficiency of simple gas turbine cycle depends upon
pressure ratio.
1 Yes u Xo 0
1i9. The work ratio of simple gas turbine cyr.!e depends upon
I· (a) maximum cycle temperature
J (b) minimum cycle temperature
r (C)
(e)
pressure ratio
none of the above
(d) all of the above

I 130. The efficiency and work ratio of a simple gas turbine cycle ~
(a) low {b) very low (c) high {d} very high

l
:·.
181. The principal constituents of a fuel are
(al carbon and hyc!rogen (b) oxygen and hydrogen
{c) sulphur and oxygen (d} sulphnr and h~gen

Ij 182. The amount of heat generated per kg of fuel is known as

(a) calorific va-iue
(c? lower calorific vaJue
{b) heat energy
{d) highel' calo.r.i.fio value

I
 176 Tkermorlynam,ic.a

183. Match the correct answer from Group B for the average c•1lorifi"
value of the fuels given in Group A. ~ ~ v

Group A Group B

(a) Wood (A) 5500 kcs.l.k

(b) Peat (B) 8000 kca11kg
(c) Lignit-e coal (C) 6000 kcai/kg
(d) .Bituminous coal (D) 4'100 kcal!kg

18-4. The fuel mostly used in steam boilers is

(a) brown coal (b) peat
(c) coking bituminous coal
(d) non-coking bituminous coal
185. If the carbon content in the bitn...7Uinou.a {.'Clad ia '18 to 81 %, i: is
said to coking bituminous coal.
Agree C! Di.sagree '
L..:
.

18-S. 'Yne na.tn..?SJ. solid fuel is

(a) wood (b) eoke
.(c) anthraci'-IJ6 eqal (d) pulve..rised coal
187. Whlch of the following has the highest calorific vslue ?
(a) Peat (b) Lignite
(c) Bituminous ccal (d) Anthracite coa1
183. The fuel mostly used in cement industry and in metaHtligicsl
processes la
(a) wood charoo~l (b) bitimrlnous coke
(c) pulverised coal (d) coke
189. Tb.e fuel mostly u!ed in blast furnace for extracting pig iron
from iron ores m
(a) hard coke (b) sofi coke
(c) pulverised coal (d) brtum.inous coal
190. Coke is produced
(a) when ooa.l ia first dried and then crushed to a fine powder
by pulve:ill!ing maclune
(b) ' from the :finely ground coal by moulding under pressure
with or without a binding material .
(c) when coal is strongly heat~d c-ontinuously for 42 to 4S
hours in the &bsence of air in a closed vessel
(d) by heating wood with a limited supply of air t-n a. tempera.
ture not less than ~80° C
 1"!7

191. Wood charcoal is produced by heating the-wood a.t 100° C.

Yoo O No 0
192. Briquetted coal is pr9duced from the finely grotmd coal by
moulding under pressure with or without a binding materhl.
'I'rne O False rl
193. Wben coal is ~rst dried a.::1d then cmshed to a fine powder by
pulverising machine, the t'esulting fuel is called
(a) c~ks '"' (h) wood charcoal
{c) bituminous coal (d) briquettd coal
(e) none of the above
194. When wood is heated with a limited supply of air to a tempers-
i?'Jre not less than 280° C, the resulG:ing fuel is
(a) coke (b) wood charcoal
(b) bituminous coal (4) briquetted coal
(el none of the above
135. W"hen the finely ground coal is moulded under pressure with or
without a bmdiug material, the :esulting fuel is called briquetted coal.
Yes 0 No 0
1~. W'hen coal is stronglv heated continuouslv for 42 to 48 hours in
the absence of air in a clo;ed vessel, the proces~ is known ss ........... .
of fueL
Ia) atomfuation (h) carbonisation
197. The ............:is obtair:.ed when carboni.sation of coal is earned
out at 500° to 700° C.
(a) soft coke (b) hard coke
(c 1 pulverised coal ( 4) bituminous coal
,e: none of tbe above
193. The hard coke is obtained when ca.rboni.sation of coal is ~rried
out at
(al 300" to 500° C (b) 500° to 700° C
(c} 700? to 900" C (d) 900° to ll00c C
(e) none of the ~bove
199. Carbonisation of coal consists of
(a) drying and crushing the coal to a. fine powder
(b) moulding the finely ground coal under pressure with or
without a bind.L11g material
( CJ hea.tin"' the wood with a limited :supply of air to a tem-
pera.t~e not ie88 than 280° C
(d) none of the above
12- :M: .E.
178 "
The:rmodynamica'

200. Steam coal is a.

(a) pulverised coal (b) brown coal
(c) coking bituminous coal
(d) non-coking bituminous coal
201. Match the correct answer from Group B for the fuels given in .
Group A.

Grou.p A Group B

(a) The bituminous coal is non-coking (A) 81 to 82·5%

if its carbon content is ~
(b) The bituminous coal is highly coking, (B) .94 to 89%
if its carbon content is
(c) The bituminous coal is medium (0) 78 to 81%
coking, ~its carbon content is
(d) The bituminous coal is strongly (DJ 82·5 to 84%
coking, if its carbon content is

202. The ultimate analysis of coal consists of the determination of

the percentage of
(al carbon (b) hydrogen and nitrogen
(c) sulphur and ash (d) all of the above
(e) none of the above

203. All the comr:J.erci:l.lliquid fuels are derived from natural petroleum
(or crude oil).
Agree O Disagree 0
204. Liquid fuels consists of hydrocarbons.
True 0 False 0
205. The natural petroleum.may be separated inro
(a) petrol {b) kerosene
(c) fuel oil (dl lubricating oil
(e) all of the above (j) none of the above
206. The distillation carried out in sue.h a way that the liq•.1id with
the lowest boiling point is first evaporated and recondensed, then the
liquid with the next higher boiling point is then evapora •ed and
recondensed, and so on nntil all the available liquid fuels are separa·
tely recovered in the sequence of their boiling points. Such a. process
is called
{a) cracking (b) carbonisa.tion
(c) fra..ctiona.I distillation (d) f.ill distillation
 '179

207. A process of hea.ting crude oil to a high temperature under a

very high pressure to increase the yield of lighter distillates, is known
as
(a) cracking (b) carbonisa.tion
(c) fractional distillation (di full distiliation
(e) none oft.he above
200. Petrol is distilled at
(a) 65' to 220' C (b) :!20' to 3-4:.1·· C
(cl 345·' to ..!70° C (d) 470° to 550"' C

~. Kerosene is distilled at
(a) 65° to 2.20~ C (b) 220' to 345' C
(e) 345~ to 470" C (d) 478° to 550° (!
210. Liquid fuels have higher c'llorific value tha.n solid fueh.
Yes lJ No 0
211. Liquid fuels ha.ve lower efficiency tha.n solid fuels.

0
212. Which of the following ga..; ha.s the highest ca.loriiic value ?
(a) Coal gaa tb) Producer gas
(c) Mond ga.:; 1t:t) Blast fu..--na.ce gas
21.?. The ca.loriic value of gaseous fuel is expressed in
(a) kcal (b) kcal/kg (C' kcal'm2 (d) kcal/m3
214:. The _various gaseous fuels are given in Group A. Select the
correct calorific value for the:>e fuels, from Group B.

&-cup A

(eb} Coal gag (A) 1200 to 1600 kcaJfm3 ·

(b) Produeer gas (B' 1400 kcal/m3
{c) Monel gaa (0) 5000 to 6000 kcs.l/m 3
(d) Blast furnace gas {D) 4.'500 kcs.l/m 3
(e) Coke oven gas (E) 900 kcaljm3

ns. Coal gag consists n::tainly of hydrogen, carbon monozide and

vs,:cioua hydrocarbons.
Agree 0 0
 180

216. Coal gas is obtained by mixing ooa.i and gas ·at ambient condi-
tions.
Yes ~
L No. 0
2!7. Producer gas is obtained by
(a) ·partial combu~tion of coal, coke, anthracite coal O!' char-
coal in a mixed air steam blast
(b) ca.rbonisation of coal
(c) carbonisation of bituminous coal
(d) passing steam over incandescent coke
(e) passing air and a large amount of steam over waste coal at
about 650° C
218. Water gns is obtained by pa.ssing ·air and a large amount of
steam over waste cl'la.I at about 650°C.
Right n
:.....J
Wrong 0
219 . .1\!ond gas is obtaint>d by
(a) pa.rti'\.1 combustion pf coal, coke, anthracite coal or char-
coal in a. mixed air steam blast
{bl ca.rbnnisation of coal
(c} ca.rbunisation of bituminous coai
(a)· passing steam over-incandescent coke
(e) none of-the above
220. Coke oven gas is obtained by bu.~ing coke in an ·oven.
Agree 0 Di~agree 0
221. The blast furnace gas is a by-product :in the production of :pig
iron in the blast furnace.
Yes 0 No
222. "Which of the folluw:ng gas is mostly used in town· for street
and domestic lighting and h~ating ?
(a) Producer gas (b) Coal gas
(c) Mond gas (a) Coke oven gas
223. A good fuel should have ............ ignition point.
(a) high (b) low
224. Whi.~h of the followin~ is the lightest and most volatile liquid
fuel?
(a) Ga.s::>line (b) Kevsene {c) Fuel ~oil
225. The amount of heat given out by the complete combustion of
1 kg of fuel is knowu as c&lorific value of solid or liquid fuel.
True O False 0
 Plwrmodynm-ics 181
226. The amount of heat obtainecl. by the complete combustion of
l kz of a, fli';l when the products of its rombustion are cooled down
to the tempeuture of supplied air is called ............ calorii:ic >niue or
fuel.
(a) higher (bi lower
'127. The !ower calorific vaiue of fuei may be obtained by Midinc: the
hi;; her :.:al.:r:tic va-:ue.
be:1t of :;team form .·d during combusrio!l to th-:
Y:;s 0 n
228. The! bomb calorimeter is used for finding the ............ calorific
value of ,.,o:id and liquid fuc!s.
(a) higher [J (b) lower ! I
'-'

'l::!S. Th:)s:; substances which h-n-e so far ll('t been re::sol,ed bv an-v
me<m'l mrv other -;ub-;'naces of simpler form are called • •
(a; eiements (b) comp <unds (C) atums td 1 moicc~ies

236. The srn~tl!est auantitv nf 3: substance, \\~hich t·a~ e:s:ist b-.... itself
in a chemically recognizabi·~ form is known as •
(a) element (&) comp mud (c) arum (·.:') molecules

231. Th::: elements are m:1dc up of' minute and chern[c ... ly in· ;::;i[;;.,
particles :.1-~ atoms.
True F~ise

232. A molecule consi::;ting of onl' .:.cum ia k:1ow.~ a:;

~a) mono atomic ;b) <I:~tom.ic
(c) tri~tomic Ui) polya.romic

233 ..A. triatomic m·1h!cu~e consists of ............. :1(oms.

(a) one (b) two (c; three (d) four
234. Tae atomic weight of an element is th-:: numbcl' 0f times. the
ato::: of that cl~me:1t is hcn.\'i•'r ;ha:l th:• hy•lrog"" a:oru.
True u False u
235. Hydrogen is the ......... substance_
(a) lightest (bj heaviest
236. The &tomic weight of oxygen is
(a) l2 (b) 14 (c) 16 (d) <H)
.().;..

237. The atomic weight of nitrogen is ............ ox_:-gen.

{a) equai to (b) less tha.n (c) more than

238. Which of the following has the minimum atomic weight ?

(~ Oxygen (b) Sulphur (c) Nitrogen (d) Ca.rboa
 182
239. The atomic weight of sulphur is
(a) 12 (b) 14 {c) 16 (d) 32 [er .gg---
240. T'ue o:rygen a. rom is ............ times hea.ner than the hydrogen
atom.
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 8 (d) 16 (e) 32
241. The molecular weight of a substance is the number of times
a molecule of that :;ubstance is heavier than the hydrogen atom.
True False 0
242. One molecule of oxygen consists of...':-........ atoms of oxygen.
(a) 2 {b) 4 (c) 8 (d) 16 (e) 32

243. One molecule nf oxygen is .........times heavier than the hydro-

gen atom.
(a) 2 (b1 4. (c) 8 (d) 16 (e) 32
244. One kg of carbon requires 8/3 kg of oxygen for its compi~
combustion and produces ll /3 kg of carbon dioxide gas.
Agree O Disagree 0
245. One kg of carbon requires 4/3 kg of oxygen and produces ........ .
kg of carbon monoxide gas.
(a) 8/3 (b) ll/3 (c) 11/7 (d} 7/3
246. One kl! of carbon monoxide requires 4/7 kg of oxygen and pro-
duces -
(a) lli3 "kg of carbon dioxide gas
(b) 7/3 kg of carbon monotide gas
(c) 11/7 kg of carbon dioxide gas
(d) 8/3 kg of carbon monoxide gas
247. One kg of sulphur requires 1 kg of oxygen for complete combus-
tion and produces 2 kg of sulphur dioxide.
True O False 0
248. One kg of cs.rbon monoxide requires ............kg of oxygen to
produce 11/7 kg of cs.rbon dio:::ide gas.
(a} 4/7 (b) 7/4 (c) 11/4 (d) 9/7
24.9. One m3 of methane (CH 4) requires 2 m 3 of oxygen and produces
l m 3 carbon dioxide and 2 m3 of water or steam.
Correct 0 Incorrect 0
250. One kg of ethylene (02Hi) requires 2 kg of o::cygen and produces
22/7 kg of cs.rbon dio:ride and ............kg of water or steam.
{a) 9/7 (b) ll/7 {c) 7/4 (d) ll/4
 183

251. One kg of carbon produces ............kg of carbon dio:ride.

(aj 3/7 (b) 7/3 (c) ll/3
252. The weight of fl.ue gas per kg of fuel is the ratio of
(a) weight of oxygen in l kg of fl.ue gas to the weight of
oxygen in 1 kg of fuel
(b) weight of oxygen in l kg of fuel to the weight of o::rygen
in l kg of flue gas
(c) weight of carbon in 1 kg of :flue gas t-o the weight of carbon
in l kg of fuel
(d) weight of carbon in l kg of fuel t-o the weight of carl::-on
in l kg of flue gas
253. The weight of carbon per kg of flue gas is gi,·en by
-:';... ~
•1
~co4...:.. ~co 3 ' ~co
(a) 3 • 7 I
(b) -co..-+-
7 ... 3
3
..,
(c} ~
i)
COs+ l l ..!. co (d) -1T co~+..;.
..) co
254. To ensure complete and ra.pid combustion of a. fuel. some quan-
tity of ::tir, iP.. ~xcess of the theoretical or minimum a.ir is supplied.
Yes 0 No 0
55. The weight of excess air supplied is equal to
23
-
1·00
w· ··
X 'iii e1gnt of e::rcess car b on
~

2~
(b) x Weight of excess o::rygen
too
100
(c) xWeight of excess carbon
23
100
(d) x Weight Qf e::ccess oxygen
23

ANSw:&.,.~

1. (a) 2. Yes 3. (c) 4. Fa.lse 5. (e)

6. {b) "!. (b) 8. (b) 9. (a) w. (a)
11. (b) 12. {o) 13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (d)
16. '(d) 17. Right 18. (cl 19. Correct 20. (b)
21. True 22. (b) 23. Disagree 24. (a) 25. (d)
26•. (d) 27. Yes 28. (a) 29. (bj 30. ta)
 ·:_'":§
-··-·:-·~

-·"
184- Phermodynamgc.s
. ·-------
31. (d) 32. True 33. (a) 34. (b) 35. True
36. (b) 37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (a)
41. (a) 42. (a) 43. False 44. (a) 45. (a)
46. (d) 47. Disagree48. No 49. (d) 50. (e)
51. (c) 52. (b) 53. True 54. (a) 55. (b)
56. (d) 57. (c) 58. (c) 59. (a) 60. (d)
61. (e) 62. (a) 63. True 64. (c) 65. (b)
66. {c) 67. (a) 68. (d) 69. (0), (.Ql, 10. Correct
(A), (B)
7i. (a) 72. True 73. (c) 74. (b) 75. (d)
76. (c) 77. (a) 78. (e) 79. (b) so. (b)
81. (b) 82. (b) 83. (j) 84. (c) 85. (c)
86. (b) 87. (c) 88. {0) 89. No 90. (d)
91. (b) 92. (a) 93. (a) 94. True 95. No
96. (-c) 97. (a) 98. (b) 99. (c) 100. Correct
101. (d) 102. (c) 103. (d) 104. (d) 105. (e)
106. (b) 107. True 108. (d) 109. (d) 110. (a)
111. (b) 112. (c) 113. True 114. (c) ll5. (a)
116. (O),(E), 117. (b) 118. TrUe 119. (C) 1~0. No
(A), (B), (D)
1.21. {c) 122. (a) 123. (a) 124. (b) 125. Disagree
126. (c) 127. (a) 128. (d) 129. Yes 130. (e)
lSl. {a) 132. (d) ~33 . .:\gree 134. (a) 135. True
136. (b) 137. (d) 138. (b) 139. (c) 140. {d)
141. (b) 142. (c) 143. (b) 144. False 145. (b)
146. (c) 147. Agree 148. {c) 149. {~) 150. True
151. (b) 152. {b) 153. ta) 154. (bJ 155. (d)
156. (b) 157. (a) 158. (c} 159. Agree 160. (tL)
161. (e) 162. No 163 . .\G) J. t•)
'64-· \0 155. True
166. (e) 167. {a) 168. (j) 169. (b) 170. (c)
171. (a) 17.2. (a) 173. (a) 174. True 175. (0)
176. (d) 177. (a) 178. Yes 179. {d) 180. (b)
181. (a) 182. {a) 183. (B), (D), 184. (d) 185. Disagree
(C), {A),
186. (a) 187. (c) 188. (c) 189. {a) 190. (c) l

I
191. No 192. True 193. (e) 194. (QJ 195. Yes
196. (b) 197. (a) 198. (d) 199. {d) 200. (d)
201. (B), (D) 202. (d) 203 . .Agree 204. True 205. (d)
ll
(-4.), (C) ~
.li

•
 185

2Q6. (c) 207. (a) 208. (a) 209. (b) 210. Yes
<I'; ----;nL False 2l.2. (a) 213. (a) 214. (0), {A), 215. Agree
(B), (E), (.D)
216. No 217. (a) 218. Wrong 219. (e) 220. Di•a.gree
221. Yes 222. (b) 223. (b) Q•">"'
M-"Z. (a) 225. True
226. (a) 227. No 228. (a) 229. (a) 230. (d)
231. True 232. (a) 233. (c) 234. Trueo 235. (a)
.236. (c) 237. (b) 238. (d) 239. (d) 240. (d)
241. T'rne 242. (a) 243. (e) 244. Agree 245. (d)
246. (c) 247. True 248. (a) 249. Correct 250. (a)
251. (c) !!52. (c) 253. (a) 254. Yes 255. (d)
 Engines, Nozzles
1. A closed vessel made of steel anrl n"'-<>d for tha gener-ation of
steam is called a
(a) steam b@iler {b) 5team tuxbine
(c) steam condenser (dj steam injector

2. A good steam boiler is one which produces ma:rimum quantity

of steam with the given fuel.
Agree O Disagree 0
3. The selection of type and size of a S"ve<:,m boiler depends upon
(a) the power required and working pre..<>sUre
(b) the geographical position of the power house
(c) the fuel a,nd wat-er avsil&bLe
(e) none of the above

4. In a fire 'tube boiler, the water is contained inside the tubes

which a..-..e SUI'!'ounded by &.roes and hot gases from outeide.
True 0 Fahre 0
5. W'hich of the followoing is a. fire tube boiler ~
Lansashire boiler (b) Babcock and Wilco::t boilel"
(c) Yarrow boiler {d) ;>-one of the above
6. Fire tube boilers a.re limited to a. maximum working preSSUX'e of
(a) 1·7 kg/cm 2 (b) 17 kgfcm3
(c) 170 kgfcm: (d) 200 kgjcm 3
"l. Which of the following is a water tube boiler·~
{a) Lancashire boiler (b) Babcock a.nd Wilcox boiler
(c) Loeomotiv& boiler (d) Cocl:u;a.n boiler

186
 187
In :fire tube boilers
(a) !later passes through the tubes which a.re surrounded by
names and hot gases
-{b) the :fla.mes and hot gases pass through the tubes which are
surrounded by water
(c) forced circulation takes pla.ce
(d) none of the above

9. In water tube boilers, the wa.tel' passes through the tubes which
are surrounded by flames and hot gases.
Yes 0 No 0
10. Fire tube boilers are
(a.) internally fired (b) externally fired
(c) internally as well as externally fired

11. Water tube boilers are

(a) int erna.lly fired (b) externally fired
(c) internally as well as externaily fired
12. Cornish "~:!oilers are multi-tubular boilers.
True 0 False 0
13. In natural circulation steam boilers, the circulation of water is
by convection currents which are set up during the heating of water.
Wrong r.
Right 0 LJ

H. In forced circuiation steam boilers, the force is applied

(a) to draw water (b) to circulate water
(c) to drain off the water (d) all of the above
15. In a La-mont boiler, there is a ......... circulation of water and
steam.
(t!!l) forced (b) natural

16. Lanca.shire boiler is a stationary fire tube boiler.

0 Disagree 0
li. Water tube boilers produce steam at a ......... pressure than
that of fire tube boilers.
(a) lower (b) higher
18. The mte of flow of steam is ......... in case of fue tube boilers.
(a) less (b) more
188 Steam .Bo{krs, Engines, No:;:;les and Turbines

19. Which of the following statement is correct'!

(a) A fire tube boiler occupies less space tha.n a water tube
boiler, for a giv-en po\ver. ·
(b) Steam ~1t a high pr~ssure and in large qu:mtities can be
p:-oduct!d with o, simple vertical boiler.
(c) A simple >erticJ.l boiler ha.s one fire tube.
td) o,ll of thc above (e) none of the abo'e

2fl. The water tubes in a simple vt>rtical boiler are

(a) horizontal (b) vertical {c) inclineu"
21. A Cochran boiler is a horizontal multi-tubular boHer.
. Yes [J I\o 0
22. The fire tubes in a Cochran boiler usually h:1';-e ......... d:l;;.meter.
(a) 6·25 rum tb) 6;:!·5 mm (c) 72·5 mm
23. A grate, in a boiler, is a place in the combustion ch;,mber upon
which fuel (wood or coal) is burnt.
True 0 False i'
24. The shell of the cochr:m boiler is made hemispberie,_tl
(a) to give ma::timum space and strength
(b) to wii:&-tand the pressure of steam inside the boiler
(c) both (a) <lntl [b)
(dl nonG of the above
25. The crown of the f~"e bo:s: is made he,..,isuheric:tl in o::-der to
resist intens~ heat in the fire box.
True O False- Cl
26. The fue tubes in a co<!hran boiler are
(a) horizontal (o) vertical (c) inclined
27. A single ended Scotch marine steam boiler may have one to
four furnaces which enter from front end of the- boiler.
R;ght O \Vrong LJ
28. The fire tubes in a Scotch marine boiler are
('L) horizontal (b) 'Yertica1 (c) inclined
29. Ll3ncash.ire boiler is
(a) sta.tion:J.ry fire tube boiler (b) internally fued boiler
(c) hor1.zontal boiler (d) natu.ra,l circulation boiler
(e) all ofthe above (f) none of the above
~. For the sa.me diameter and thickness of tube, a. water tube
boiler has ..•.•.... heating smfa.ce a.s compared to fire tube boiler.
{a) more (bj less (c) equa.l
 Steam Boikrs, Engines, Nozzles and Turbines 189
.t
31. Lmcaeh.ire boiler i8 used where working pr~,:>ure and power
:requi?ed are
(a) low (h) >ery low (c) moderate
(d) high (eJ 1·ery high (f) none of the above
32. The cylindrics.l shell of a kncashire hoiler has diameter from
(a) l to 2m (b) 1·25 to 2·:.'5 m
(c) H5 to 2·5 m (d) :!:75 to 2·75 m
33. The length of Lancashire boiler varies from
(a) 5 to 6 m (h) 6 to 7 m
(c) '1·25 to 9 m (d) 9 to 10 m

~- Lancashire boiler has ........ intarnal flue tubes

(a) one ('>) two (c) thr<·t> (d) four
35. The diameter of internal flue tubes of a. La.ncaAhire boiler i~
about ......... that ofits shell.
(a) one-fourth (bl one-thir:l
(c) two-fifth (al one-half

36. The :internal flue tubes of a Lancashire boiler are reduce:! in

diameter at the back to provide access to the lower part of: he
boiler.
True 0 False LJ
37. The damper in a steam bo:ler is prondP<l to con· roi the
draught <i.P. rate of flow of air) e.nd thus regulate the rate of !::mer:;.
tion of ste·1m.
Correct 0 Incorrect
33. Wh;ch of the following statem•·nt indicaies the difference
betweec Cornish boiler and Lancashire boiler ?
(a) Cornish boiler is a. water tube boiler whereas Lanca!>hire
boiler is a :fire tube boiler.
(b) Cornish boiler is a fire tube boiler where.!S Lancashire boiler
is a water tube boiler.
(c) Corni.;h boiler has one flue tube whereas La.ncs.sh.ire boiler
has two flue tubes.
td) Cornish boiler has two flue tubes whereas Lancashire boiler
has o1ie flue tube.
(e) none of the above
39. The diameter of Cornish boiler varies from
(a) 0-5 to 1m. (b) l to 2 m
(c) 1·25to2·5?Jl (d) !!to3m
 40. The length of Cornish boiler "C"&ries from
(a) 2 to 4·:3 m (b) 3 to 5 m
(c) 5 to 7·5 m id) 'i to \.1 m
41. The ;iiameter of flue tube i11 a. Corr.Jsh boiler is ......... that nf
the shell.
(a) one-fourth !b) one-third
(c) two-fifth (d) three-fi.ft.h
42. Loromotive boiler is a '--
(a) single tube, horizontal, internally fu:ed ~nd stationary
boiler
(b). single tube, vert-ical. P::r:terna!l ,. fired a.nrl. stationarv boiler
(c) multitubula.r. horizontal, inter::nlh· fired and mobile boiler
(d) multitubular. ht)ri.z·>ntal, ":;:t..:rr:.ally fired and . ;;tationaiT
~~ -
43. Locomotive boiler produces .steam at a very high :rate.
Yes 0 No 0
44. The shell diame:er of a L~1comotin; boiler is
(a) l m (b) H5 m (cl ;"; m (d; :2·5 !II

45. The length of shell of a Locomotive boiler is

(a) l m (b) 2 ill (c) 3m (d) ~ m

46. The Locomotive boiler has

(a) i 37 fil.'e tubes and 44 superheat~d tubes
(bl 14:7 fire tubes ami 34 superheated tubes
{c) 1:'.7 fue tubes and 2± superheated tube.s
(dl 167 fue tubes and l± superheated tubes
4.7. The ma:cimum steam pressure in a Locomotive boiler is limit-sd
to
(a} J·8k;rfcm2 {b) 18
:c) LSO kz/em 3 {Jl 280 kg/em~
43. The fire tubes in a-Locomotive boiler has ......... diameter.
(a) 4·'i."i mm {bj 5·47 mm (c) 'h!5 m.m (d} 47·5 miD

49. T e diameter of superheat-ed tubes in a. locomotive boiler is

(a) !·3 em (b) ~Hem (c) 13 em fci) 23 em
50. Locomotive boiler is a. ........• boiler.
(a) fu:e tube (b) water tul:Je
51. Babcock and Wilco::t boiler is a stationar;r type of wa~r tube
boiler.
0 Incorrect 0
 Steam Boilers, Engines, lloz:deB and Turbines 191
~. The w.ster tubes in a Babcock and Wilcox boiler are
(a} verticai {b) horizontal (c) inclined
.·
53. La.-mont boiler, 18 a. high pressure water tuoe steam boiler
working on forced circu1a.tion. ~ •
Agrec9 CJ DJ:;agree 0
54. Wnich of the following boiler is best suit-ed to meet the
fluctuating demand of steam ·? ~
(a} Locomotive boiler rb) La.nca.~hire boiler
(c) Cornish boiler (d) Babcock and Wilcox boiler

55. Which of the following statement is correct ?

{a} Lancashire boiler :s a fire tube boiler.
(b) Fire tube boilers ere inve...'"D.·dly fired.
(c) Babcock a.nd Wil.::o:::: b(JJ er 15 a. water tube boi ·-=r
(ai alluf the above (e) none of the n::.ove
56.. VVhich of the following ;;'a.t-em~nt is wrong ?
{a) Lc,comotive boiler it~"' wa.te-r tube boiler.
{bj Wa.ter tube boilers ·~r- i:lterna.l!y fireC:.
(c) .La.-mont blliler iJ; a low pressurr:: water tube boJer.
{d) all of the 1\bo"" (e/ none of the a.~ove
57. The fitting mounted on the boiier fOr its proper and sa.fe
functioning is a.
(aj Wliter ievel indicator (b) pres.tsure gauge
(c) safety valve (d l blow off cock
\e) feed check vs.lvtl (f) fusible plug
{g) all of tho a.bove:: (hl none of the 3.bove
sa. The device attached to tht! steam t:hest for preventing ~lo­
siollS due to e~ceS"~ive iater.nal pressure of steam is called
(a} safety vaive (bl water level i.ndice.tor
(c) pressure gauge {d) fusible plug
~ The water level in.dir.a.t-ors ill 11 boiler a....-e generally ......... in
nn:::nber.
.•
(G) one {b) two (C} th..~ (d) four
i 00. The function of a safety valve is
1 (a) to blow off steam when tha pres.sure of steam inside the
l (b)
boiler exceeds the wo::-km£: pressure
to indicate the water level inside the boiler to a.n observer

l
l
(c)
(d)
t-o measure pressure of steam inside the steam boiler
:o.one of the above
I

'
 192

6!. A safety valve usually employed with stationary boile..=s is

(a) lever safety valve (b) dead weight safety valve
(c) high steam and low water safety valve
(d) all of the above (e) none of the abcve

62. A safety va,l ve mainly used with locomotive and mari..ne boile!'!i
ig

(a) lever safety valve (b) dead weight safety vs,ice

(c) .high steam and low water safety valve
(d) spr1..ng loaded safety valve
(e) all of the above (f) none of the above

63. The.pr..nciprol function of a stop val>"e is to

(;;) control the fiow of ,;te:lm from the boiler t{J th.e m:,ir>. pi.::=.e
and to shut off the s:ea.m completely when required
(b) empty the boiler when required and to disch:•rge the mud,
scale or sediments which are accm::::.u.lated a.t the -:::ot~o:w ::-f
tl:.e boiler
(c) put off :fue in the fur:J.ace of the boiler when t:::.e i.:-::-o:l .:>i
water in the boiler falls to :1n '.."!nsafe limit
increase the temper~tu.re of saturttted stea~ witb.ouu Z"1.i.'3-
ing its press"Gre
(e) heat feed water bv utilising the heat in the
g:1ses before Ieavi..-ig through the cbl:r~:m.ey

64. Blow off cock in a boiler is tLsed. to

(a) control the flow of steam from t:...;:; bdler to tile m:::.i.I1 -ci::.-
and to shut off the ste;.J.m compietciy who::n rt:quirt>ri • -
(b) empty the boiler when required and fo discharge the .::nud.
scale or sediments which :tre a.ecumal.Lted at the bottom of
the boiler
{c) put off fire in the flll'!lace ofthe boiler when the level of
water in the boiler falls to a.n unsa.fe limit
(d) increase the tempera.t<ll'e of satur3ted steam witb.out
raising its pressure
(e) heat feed water by u:;ilising the hc:1t in the exhaust flue
gases before leav..ng through the .chlmn.ey

65 . .A ....... "" in a boiler is used to put off fire in the furnac~ of the
boiler when the level of wat-er in the boiler falls to an 1!11Safe limit.
(a) blow off cock (b) fusible plug
(c) stop valve (d) safety valve
 193

oo. The function--of-a-superheater is to bea.t the feed water by

utilising the heat in-the exhaust flue gases before leaving through the
chimney.

0 No 0
f/'l. An econol.Iliser is used to increase the temnera.ttll'e of saturated
steam without raising its pressure. •
Right 0 Wrong 0
68. A device used in a boiler to control the flow of steam from the
boiler to the main pipe and to shut off the steam completely when
required, is known as
(a) blow off cock {b) fusible plug
{c) superheater (d) stop valve
(e) economiser (/) none of the above
69. .~ device used to empty the boiler whenever required and to
discharge the mud, scale or sediments which are accumulated• at the
bottom of the boiler, is called blow off cock.
Yes [J No 0
70. A device used to put off fire in the furnace of the boiler when
the level of water in the -boiler falls to an u.ns&fe limit, is called
(") bbw off cock (b) stop valve
(c) superheater (d) economiser
(e) none of the above
il. A device used to increase the temnerature of saturated stea.:n::
without raising its pressure, is called •
{a) blow off cock (b) fusfule plug
(c) superheater (d) stop valve
(e) eoonom.ise:r (/) none of the above
72. A device ~d to heat feed water by utilising the heat in' the
exhaust fiue gases before leaving through the chimney is known as
(a) blow off cock (b) fusible plug
{c) SUP"'-l"heater (d} stop valve
(e) economiser (f) none of the above
73. Which of the following are boiler accessories ~
{a) sa.fety valve (b) pressure gtbUge
(c) eoonomiser (d) super:ttester
(el bQth. (a; and (bl (J! both (c) and {d)
74. An economiaer ......... the steam raising capacity of a. boilf'
(a) inel'eaaes (b} decreases {c) has no eifect o·
13-M.E.
194

15. The pressure of feed water .bs.s to be raised before its entry into
the boiler. The pre.sSure is raised by a device known as
(a) :feed pump (b) injector
(c) feed check valve (d) pressu:re gauge

76. There is about 15 to 20% of ooa.l saving when an eoonomiser is

used in a boiler.
True O False 0
'ii. Tile power of a boiler_ may be defined as
(a) the ratio of heat actns.lly used in producing the steam to
the heat liberated in the flll"1laCE>
(b) the amount of water evaporated or steam produced in kg
per kg of fuel burnt
(c) tile amount of wa.ter evaporated from and at 100 = C into
dry and saturated steam
{cl) the evaporation of 15·653 kg of water per hour from and
at 100° c
(e) none ofthe above

78. The evaporative capacity of a. boiler is defined as the evapora-

tion of 15·653 kg Gf water per hour from and at 100" C.
Yes 0 No U
19. The amount of water evaporated or steam produced in kg per
kg of fuel burnt is termed as evaporative capacity of a boiler.

0 Disagree [J

00. The equivalent evaporation is defined as

(a) the ratio of heat actually used in producing the steam to
the hea.t liberated in the furna.ce
(b) the amount. of water evaporated or steam produced in kg
per kg Gf fuel burnt
(c) the amount of water evaporated from and at 100° C into
dry and saturated steam
(d) the evaporation of 15·653 kg of water per ho}ll' from and
at 100° C
(e). none of the above
81. The ratio of heat actually used in producing the steam to the
neat liberated in the furnace, is known as
(a} equivalent evaporation (b) factor of evaporation
{c) boiler-efficiency (d) one boiler hor~power
 195

32. One boiler horsepswet-18 aefihed as

(a) the ratio of heat actua.llv used in producing the steam to
the heat liberat.ed in the' furn.a.ce
(b) the a.mount of water evaporat-ed or steam produced in kg
per kg of fue! bu...'"llt
(c) the a.mount of water evaporated from and at 100, C into
dey a.nd satura.ted steam
(d) the evaporation of 15·653 kg of water per hour from and
at :woe C
{e) none of the above

~:;. T"he amount of water evaporated or steam produced in kg pe::

kg of fuel burnt is known as pow<:r of a boiler.
True· O False 0
84. The ratio of heat actually used in producing the steam to the
heat liberated in the furnace is known a.s equivalent evaporation from
and at 100° C. · .
Co::reet 0 Incorrect 0
85. T".t.e evaporation of... . ...• of water per .hour from and a.t 1.00° C
is called one boile:.:" horsepower.
(a-) 13·5 kg (b) 1.5·653 kg (c) 16·65. kg (d) 17·356 kg

36. The amount of water evaporated from and at ......•.. int-o dry
and saturated steam is called equivaient evaporation from and at
100° C.
(b) ,roo. c

81. When the total heat of steam is li kca!/kg and the sensible
heat of feed water is k kcai/kg, then the factor of evaporation is given
by

(a)
H-k
. l,b', H-h (d)
427 539
88. The amount of Wa.ter evaporated in kg per kg of fuel burnt is
ca.11ed '
j (a) equivalent evaporation from a.nd at 100° C
1
' I
{b) eva.poi'Otive capacity of a ooilel."
!
(c) boiler efficiency (a) one boiler horsepoweF
{e} none of the above

39. The amount of water eva;oore.ted from and ~~ot 100~ C into &y
and saturated steam is called evaporative capacity of a bQ~ler.
Yes 0 No 0
 t:
~
~
196
f
,--------~~~-----
;?u, The evaporation of 15·653 kg of water '"o:~r hour from and a.t
.
•
! 100° C is called r
3
j (a) equiva.ient evaporation from and at 100° C
4 (b) evaporative capacity of a. boiler
~ (c) boiler efficiency (d) one boiler horsepower
It (e) none of the above
l 91. Match the correct answer from Group B for the given sta.te-
l ments :in Group A.

I Group A

Ii (a) T'ne ratio of hea.t actually used in pro- {.A} one boiler horse
ducing the steam to the heat liberated in power

II the furna.ce (.B) boiler efficiency

(b) The amount of water evaporated in kg/kg (0) evaporative ca-
offuel burnt pacity of a boiler
I (c) The ~ount of water evaporated from (D) equivalent eva-
and st 100° C into dry a.nd saturated oo:mtion from
! steam and 100° c
{d) The evaporation of 15·653 kg of water

I
I

!
per hour from and at 100° C

92. Which of the following statement :is wrong ?

(a) The evaporation. of 15·653 kg of water per hour from and
at 100° C :is called one boiler hol'l!lepower.
(b) The amount of water evaporated in kg per kg of :fuel burnt
is called equivalent evaporation from and at 100° C.
(c) the ratio of heat actually used in producing the steam to
the heat liberated in the furnace is called boiler efficiency.
{dl all of the above (e) none ofthe above
93. The main object of a. 'boiler triBJ is
(a) . to determine the generating capacity of the boiler
(b) to determine the thermal efficiency of the boiler when
wor.king a.t a. definite pressure
(c) to prepare heat bala.nce sheet for the boiler
(d) all of the above · (e) none of the above

94:. In a. boiler, the heat is lost

{a l to dry flue gases
(b) in moisture present m the fuel
(c) 1o eteo.m formed by combustion of hydrogen par kg o! mel
{d) of the above {e) !lone of above
Steam BQtlers, Engines, Nozzles and Turbines . 197

95 . .A heat balance sheet for the-boiler-shows the complete account

of heat supplied by 1 kg of dry fuel and heat consumed or lost.
Agree 0 Disagree O
96. The draught is the ......... of pressures above and below the fire
grate.
(a) stn:n (b) difference

9'1. T.he object of producing draught in a boiler is

(a) to pt"ovide an adequate supply of air for the fuel combus-
tion
(b) to exhaust the gases of combustion from the combustion
chamber
(c) to discharge the gases oi combustion to the atmosphere
throngh the chimney
(d) all of the above (e) none of the above

98. The air ures.'lm'e at the fuel bed is reduced below that of
atmosphere by means of a. fan placed at or near the bottom of the
chimney to produce a. a.mught. Such a draught is called
(a) :n.atu.ral draught {b) induced draught
(c) forced draught (d) balanced draught

99. The draught !Il!l.Y be produced by a

(a) mechanical fan (b} chimney
(c) a sta21m jet (d) a.ll of the above

100. A draught produced by a chimney due to the difference of

densities between the hot gases inside the chimney and cold atmos-
pheric air outside it, is called natural draught.
Yes 0 No 0
101. Th"' iu locomotive boilers is produced by a
(a} chimney (b) centrifugal fun
(c) steam jet (a} nope of the above

100:. The draught produced by a steam jet issuing from a. nozzle

in the chlmney is called.
{a) induced 3te&m jet draught (b) chimney draught
(c) forced ~~am jet d..-raught (d} none of the above

103. The draught produced by a steam jet issuing from a nozzle

p:l.lwed in the ashpit under the .lire grate of the flll'II8.ce is cs.lled
\a) mdured steam jet d.'l'8.ught (b) chimney ~~t
(c} foroed 5"~ jet draught (d) none of the shove
 198 Steam Boilers, EnginetJ, Nozzle!J and Turbiro-es

104. ')'he chimney draught varies with

{'ii} climatic conditions (b) temperature of furnace gases
{c} height of chimney (d) all of the above
{e) none of the above

Jl.05. The mecha.nical draught produces more dra.ught than natural

draught.
True 0
100. The mechanical draught ........• the amount of smoke.
(a} increases (b) d.ecreases (c) does not eifeet

!Oi. '!'he efficiency of the plant ......... with the mechanical draught.
(a) increases · (b) decreases (c) remains constant
108. Which of the following statement is wrong ?
(a) The mechanical draught reduces the height of chimney.
(b) The natural draught reduces the fuel consumption.
(c) A balanced draught is a. combination of induced and
forced draught.
(d) all of the above (e) none of the above

100. The velocity of fiue gases (v) through the chimney under a
static draught of (ll) metres is given by
(a} v = v' 2 g ii (b) v == ..j 2g fH
(c) v = ll/..j 2g (d) v =· 2g -v,. H

110. The ra.tio of the energy required to produce the artificial

dra.ught(expressed in metres head or kg m/kg of flue gas) to the
mechanical equivalent of e:rlra. heat carried sway per kg of ftue
gases due to natura.l draught, is known as
(a) efficiency of the boiler (b) efficiency of the chimney
(c) efficiency ofthe fan !d} homepower of the boiler
(el power required to drive the fan
111. .Aij steam engines work on
{al Zeroth law of thermodynamics
(b) first law of thermodynamics
(c) second law of thermodynamics
(d) sll of the above {e) none of the a.h.:>ve
112. Combustion of fuel takes pi&ce .•• .., ••••... t.he engine cylinder of a
i3tes.m engine.
(u} olltside {b) iwrlde
Steam engines tore ca.lled ~~ oom.b~o!! engines.

Yes 0 No 0
 -- ---------·~

199

114. In a, reciprocating steam engine, the heat en.E!rgy ,in the; steam is
converted into mechanical work by the to. and fro motion. of the
pi!rvO:n.
Agree 0 Disagree n
115. In a s~le acting steam engine
(a) the steam is admitted on o~~·aide of the piston and one
~ stro_!s is producro dm.ing each- revolution of
lihe emnksha,.-c.
(b) the steam is a.dmit<-..ed, in tu.."'l, on both ~des .flf the piston
and one working stroke is produced during; each revolution
of the Cl'&n.k.shaft
(e) the steam is admitted on one side otthe piston and two
working strokes are produced dur.ii:lg ·each revolution of
the ~nksha:ft
(d) the steam is admitted. in turn, on both sides of the p~v0r2
and two worlring~ are produe.-cd during each revolu.
tion of the cr&!lka.h&:ft

116. In a double a.ctfng S"'..ea.m engine, the steam is admitted IJn one
side of the pigton and two wor'..dng strokes are produced du..."ing
each revolutien of the crankshaft.

0 No 0
117. Whe.'l the ofthe erankah&it is between 100 r.p.m. and
250 l:'.p.m., the engine~ to be a
(al slow speed steam engine
{b) medium speed steam engine
(c) high speed steam engine

113. When stP--&m afl:.er doing work in the cylinder passes into a
vv'-''"''''"""""4' the is said to be a
(a) siow speed .engine (h) vertical steam engine
(c) condensing steam engine
(d) non-condensing steam engine

U9. Wilen the ~nsion of s<-...eam is ca.c:ried out in a single cylinder

s.nd tnen e::ilia,usted into ~he atmosphere or a condense!', the engine
is said to be a simple steam engine.
0
!20. A sing.'!r:: actmg steam engine produces ........ power than that of
double actmg steam engine.
{a) equal (b) h.$H (a) double (d) four times
 200 Steam Boiilers, Engines, Nozzles. and Turbines

l2l::Z. Which ··Of the following statement is oo!Tect. f

(ci} ' A li<i'rizontal Steam engine requires less floor area than
a vertical steam engine.
zb) The steampres.Srire in the cylinrler is not allowed to fall
below the atmospheric pressure.
(c) The compound steam engines are generally non-condensing
s~~am e~in~~....
(a) a.ll·of the../~bote.. (e) none of the above
122. The motion of a D-s1lae valve in a steam engine is simple
harn:tomc.
~ n ~ o
123. The,. f~ctign of a piston in a steam engine is
(Gf ¥> guide Il10tion of the piston rod and to prev,'nt it from
bendfug
(b). to tra.~er motion from the piston to the cross-head
(c) to convert heat energy of the steam into mechanical
work
(a) to exhs.ust steam from the cylinder at proper moment
124. The function of a D-slide valve is to e::rhaust steam from the
cylinder at proper moment.
Right n Wrong 0
125. The function of a crosshead is to guide motion of the ........ .
and to prevent it from bending.
(a) piston rod · (b) con1;1ecting rod
(c) eccentric rod (d) valve rod
126 The function of a piston rod is
(a) to guide motion of the piston rod and to prevent it from
bending
{b) to transfer motion from the piston to the cross head
(cJ to convert heat er.ergy of the steam into mechanical
work
('f) t.o exhuat stee.m from the cylinder at proper moment
121. .The ftmction of a connecting rod is not to c..:>nvert reciprocating
motion of the piston into rotary motion.
True O Fa;lse 0
128. The function of.a.n eccentric rod is
(a) to provide reciprocating mcr'-..ion to the slide valve
(b) to convert reciprocatmg mot..ion of the niston into rotary
motion of the crank ~
(c) to convert rota.ry motion of the Cl"fl,nkshaft into to and
~o .:motion of the valve rod
(d) to provide simple h.a.."'Zl:-il"'.;C motion to the D-alide